IIFO^         ,A\tf  UNIVERS^ 
Nfe  ^f  £ 


^l-UBRARY 


^MINIVERS/A 


^—3n 
AMSRCW  J  GRAHAM 


Emered,  according  to  Acf  j^  Congress,  in  Hie  year 


m  the  Clerk's  Ojjice  of  Hie  District  Ccuft  of  tlie  United 
for  the   Southern  District  of  New  York. 


. 


] 
v 


.%,. 


t  y?  ),  ^ 


- 


/ 
> 


\ 


* 


b  —  ~  >. 


•*• 


. 


,    (_v  fi  ..).. 


U,  ' 


^  / 

,--<l  u-. 


",    (£ 


;     -9      -^      t/C, 


\ 


x 


Geology, 


i  '  - 


/      v 


>.<M» 


-  x 


1     r  ll  [  ll  r    I 

ienceo  die  xUireylflHon  o  tde|£j!U. 


V 


V 

M   £e/%.     ^-""X'  <x   /    »  ^   J-^ 

-1    ^o    ^    I   ^  -^  ,  N 


ligion  and 


(      ^i> 


•     7         I-        )     N 

7    '    t   "   V- 

^  .  . 


t 


'  /        —  0-  "\    X 

/  j_       I  ~ 


x__ ,     q. s         !    »^v 

•>  ^ 

^  A^  s*V) 

I  ^      -n>  ^ 

/         V 


r/ 


'X 


v- 
r 


K 


\ 

V 


k_<»   O 


— v 
> 


-J N . 


/I 


5  r 


/  -r 

ds,  in   >/T 


0  ur  /  r  lens,  in   >/\)  eavei)  ^ 

* 


< 


10 


/L 


K, 


— ( 


N>; 


{ 
vi 


-N»/ 


,  r 


^o 


u 


V. 


K^- 


V 


IZ 


1-  < 


c  ^u"  L 


-7 


V, 


"^  ~x  5  N  J-.^  ^  r  i 
/  ^  ^  -y«^5  „  K  ) l  s  7 
•^  \^' .  1 1._^  °  V/  i^s 


*>»  ^ 
..,  \A^Af 

^  '-o  u_ 


i? 


"  fi  1 — - 


V          V 


W-  It    i)  W 

())ie  Ae  o  It  (A 
3       ' 


-f 


^.<  ?J..>.X±^^/n^ 


t,/ 


.  >r 

'r-v.- 

/\    "   '    1 

'  \. 


' 

1    /\     t   »- 

-    '  \         .~ 


v-v 

"*>; 


. 


p   x^x. 


L/^^     -  (• 
Mf^*^' 


T 


^^^^  "  -^.^r/^-^* 


IS 


%^    J    I  V    — 

\  /      I         ~~Xo  J 

fd  .^    i  ,<i-Y 


U 


1'H 


mom  o 


ft       <! — 6 


-^-^vX>Vx^ 


TI 

r          7        ^.  .    <      -N  _ 

^-C     'v  *T 

— ^.  >  .rr.  (TI  v)  <.  X- *v  j  ,^-^  ««_»-   / 


\ 
-*-  V 


C         ^—  -j     Q.  .    \^  i^  i  / 


f'7 


AUDI   ALTERAM    PARTEM. 

•,£-•— '  Vl  ./V^C— V«— • .] 
x 


^£..%  W-,  'N^NAx^/.^V.C. 


l 


>- 


(V 


1 

^ 


iv^    ^      .^.     « 


V 


J 


J 


*•* 


:/*. 
Trt 


fc^/""!/'- 

,-/<_/_; 


^^"/-)  ( 


No 


(.  ? 
^ 


20 


VI 


•  u? 


a.  Hi 


-  '  •  / 


/  t.jr./ 


v  1 


r 


\  x^7  '"w 

I 


3.1 


„  6  Ss,."^- 

0    akciio  r 


1.0 


T  ""N  ^~^~~ ~~ '  s    i  '^ 


^/ 
...^.rr^/CAv 


k. 


•sr 


2.2. 


v. 


r 


5       X/1^^ 


V  \    :  ' 
y  I   X  ' 


23 


b 


n 
t) 


ericafj' 


L, 


^V^-t~>^v-"/ 


^  l  C-  ^$ 


SL6 


27 


T.  L, 


*> 


•  —  i 


*~^\   '   "~ 


22 


V- 


s 


' 


/ 


V 


-\/ 


\,  -  v 

r 

f  •NN-:t-'.*S-» — ^  u  r^l 

1  ' 


o>peeen  of  !|/nr.  Lfauloe-n,  of    (j 
'^\-\ 


2.9 


£>f 

v/-^  v 


A 


V~^ 


y^ 


-7 


?$>     6- 


^r  , 

-t.^^D 


£*.- 


\X    ^\  f 

T      X'  »  _      x      V  _ 

^* 


L 


t    ^r 


' 

"    <.  / 


V.  . 


— \ 

;  > 


^Tc  Jlyaw  j-o 


O  •=—-  4 

"NO 


V  > 


i 


31 


vA? 


iy? 


32 


• 


7 


'  ^  ^r  ^  ^"/ 


• 


- 


-o 


J* 


i,  \s-\       •%>  — ^~ »  v 

1c^    IV 


'^•1       ,^- 


T> 


<A<, 


.  ^ 


,  L 


ru. 


VI  ~-  - 


v 


v. 


•v 


x?( 


•V^._tV-.^ 

c  ^TVv,  -\  L-  ^  ^ 4  [5  v/: 


> 


/-  s  L1  ( 


- 


lv_  ^-—  V       I  > 


H-      >•         / 

-     ' 


/ 


V 
J  T 


M 


- 


N.  "-V-/ 


/   f 

/•        / 


VI 


X  C/6.  q.  _/ 

^      7  /"  ,  ' 

"  /        "     *t/ 

-C 


37 


V 


^y  z» 


r 


~r 


^r 


" — 1 

L 


1  *-y  ~c         ~f 

V.    ' "  \_^  I 

.  *•  I  V  -  ,  //T  -7 


cL,  v  -7^ 


y  -\j^__  / 

u-  \  */:.^< 


-\  *• 


^  .  } 


.  L     a,  6" 
^ 


»  A  ^ 


^      o 


kc 


f.«-.~~^  57   V    r   x_^   sr 


^  a.  ' 


\. 


Lnarae  io  ine  Jury. 


A,  .*^..  -k*  x 


\ 


~-Z~* 


'/S... 


<K  ^«> 


Ui 


' 


>r>.>  ~U  c- 


\ 


^-  s 


^ 


ia;*** 


/•\ 


v^-^^  -~~\j  >-  L^ 


"i" 


^^  ^\  ^  ^  /..^'4H/..rTr  >  ^  /^v/  W* 


V 

>/Kc 


L  —  "\\  *  ^f  ^  ^ y  "CA-  r-7  NO-  i 

f— «  v    — N3    -t—  ^-*~\   I  I  --         \ 

J^~*   °L-»   -i^   v    <  -N  .v.N  s  ^—  •   * 


1   "% 


^-^C 

/ 
~l*^    /  ^ 

"4^  *-   r—  ^^T^     ^ 

V^/L^~-^  L     -"-I  ^'fj/'^"^^.0  -V. 

/t,W*->O-..^  .r  -v-  s\(^  — ^  ^.^>>i 


CX^^^^ 


SN^  '  7  Y^  ^-^  ^^T^S  /  -  f/'-J  --i'^l_^r\ 
— ^ 

X 


^ 

^/'  ^"C^,  ^ 


V^-jv-^-*..^— j  ;  &}/* 


i^^>  ^r 


^ 


K 


AT5^    t 

c^lexanoer     on 

fry  Pr>of.     Francis    Liefer. 
V     Y     >    ^  ] 


X 


<. 


I 


t • 


^ 
«-/ 


™^  _  \  •  N,  _^    c  .r»:  n 

;  ^  ^-<7  i  ^^  L  - 


-a- 


^  ...^.  .^W  f  .- 


/  1 


s 


fr    "l>    V   ^i  ^— r    ' 
V* 


u 


«/ , 


«> 


» / 


^vt.frv. 

7  /   \j>    -V"        V ._ 


"/?•«•/  ""7        v« 

r*^. ,  f  s~* 


^  -^1 


^ 


/ 

v-  ^  v  ^>  \ru 


s« 


.^-f 


> 


>t-=^ 

^  L,/^-^ 


s4 


yv 

^V 


^^-  ^V 


*rV 


/ 


%"-  - 


^/^/, 

L^V-'..-^     ' 

*      /?       ^_* 


1i...-rf..^r^/%jf  ^  i-.*}. 
x.^.^-.^.^.U 

'  ^^~ 

,f  ..\..>.  ^.jf 
-x  ^^  ?   ^^  .r 

^ivYr 


V  fe^  /  ! 

^  -L  ^-5.. 

±r/  t- 


-h 


u 


t>J 

J^ 


« — »_^  -/ 


^ 
^/ 


-^  ^-^^r 

.^4^-^v* 


--^r  ^^\ 

_0.  3.._^/  -^  V-^  1  vl^.!  Nj     -)  ^^  *^  -^ 

-i  i  s^-  /v  (y  —  ^  ^  ^-i  ^  ^; 

Y^/^^q/..^   _.^.7.    l-/^^ 


'— *      '"V      -    J) 


u- 


5A 


I—- 


r 


c 


s.  •> 


"V 

)  : 

A 


0 


,  —'  A..  ., 


(  r 


rv. 


c  J 


< 


°-  • 


A, 


; 


» 


-V 


o  . 


PREFACE. 


THIS,  the  fourth  volume  of  the  Series  of  Standard-Phonographic 
Text-Books,  is  designed  for  reading  and  study,  after  the  student  has  read 
and  copied  the  First  Reader,  and  studied  the  Compendium  thoroughly 
from  §  265  to  §  280,  inclusive,  having  committed  to  memory  the  word- 
signs  and  contractions,  and  familiarized  the  list  of  words  distinguished 
by  difference  of  outline  or  position. 

But  if  it  should  seem  too  tedious  to  commit  the  lists  to  memory,  be- 
fore commencing  to  read  these  reporting  exercises,  the  study  may  be 
varied  and  rendered  more  attractive  by  alternating  the  study  of  the 
lists  with  reading  in  this  work. 

But,  of  course,  if  the  reading  is  commenced  before  learning  the  lists, 
there  will  be  required  much  more  frequent  reference  to  the  Key  ;  but 
in  this  manner  many  word-signs  and  contractions  will  be  easily  and 
pleasantly  familiarized. 

But  no  method  of  stiuty  can  obviate  the  absolute  necessity  of  acquiring  the  utmost 
familiarity  with  the  reporting  lists. 

And,  in  no  case,  should  the  learner  allow  himself,  or  be  allowed,  to 
proceed  to  a  second  reading  lesson,  until  the  first  can  be  read  with  the 
utmost  rapidity  of  articulation. 

Considerable  assistance  will  be  derived  before  commencing  to  read 
the  Reporting  Exercises,  from  the  examination  of  the  chapter  on  the 
Characteristics  of  the  Reporting  Style. 

As  soon  as  a  page  or  exercise  can  be  read  easily,  it  should  be  placed 
in  view  as  a  "  copy,"  and  copied  many  times,  with  both  pen  and  pen- 
cil, until  all  the  characters  are  familiarized  and  can  be  easily  and 
gracefully  formed,  and  especially  until  the  forms  and  position  of  word- 
signs,  contractions,  and  phrase-signs  are  carefully  impressed  upon  the 
memory. 

The  engraving  is  designed  as  a  good  example  for  close  imitation, 
both  as  to  the  size  of  characters  and  the  spacing  of  word-;.  A  consid- 
erable loss  of  speed  will  be  incurred  either  by  making  the  letters  larger 
than  is  necessary  for  a  proper  distinction  between  the  different  lengths 
of  strokes,  or  by  writing  the  words  a  considerable  distance  apart.  By 


52  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

making  the  characters  quite  large  there  is  no  greater  distinction  secured 
between  the  different  lengths,  than  when  they  are  made  of  the  size  in 
these  exercises  ;  for,  though  it  sometimes  happens  in  small  v.-riting 
that  a  doubt  arises  as  to  the  intended  length  of  a  particular  stroke,  the 
same  doubt  is  as  liable  to  occur  in  reading  large  writing,  and  even  more 
so,  for  the  loss  of  time  resulting  from  wri'ing  large  necessitates  a  haste 
and  movement  of  hand  which  are  rather  inconsistent  with  making  due 
distinctions  in  length. 

After  an  exercise  has  been  copied  several  times,  let  it  be  written  from 
the  reading  of  some  other  person,  the  rate  of  reading  being  such  as  to 
require  considerable  effort  to  keep  up,  but  not  so  fast  as  to  require 
illegible  and  incorrect  writing,  or  to  induce  a  confused,  hesitating  morement  of 
the  hand — -for  the  hand  should  move  with  regular  and  •uniform  tpeed. 

Compare  the  "notes"  thus  made  with  the  engraved  exercises,  ob- 
serve all  the  differences,  and  write  again  from  reading,  and  again  cor- 
rect ;  and  so  proceed  until  the  exercise  can  be  reported  correclly  and 
rather  neatly  at  a  speed  of  from  80  to  100  words  per  minute. 

Then  let  these  "notes"  be  read  repeatedly  until  they  can  be  read 
with  the  utmost  rapidity  of  articulation. 

The  student  should  next,  especially  if  he  wishes  to  become  a  reporter, 
make  a  longhand  transcript  of  his  notes,  precisely  as  if  he  were  to  fur- 
nish it  for  publication.  (See  remarks  on  the  reporter's  longhand 
writing,  in  the  Phonographic  Intelligencer,  p.  183.)  The  Key,  of 
course,  will  enable  him  to  correct  any  orthographical,  punctuational. 
or  other  errors  in  his  transcript.  He  should  persevere  in  this  tran- 
scribing until  his  transcripts  coincide  with  the  Key,  though  he  should 
not  require  of  himself  precise  agreement  therewith  in  respect  of  minor 
particulars  of  punctuation. 

Considerable  time,  and  perhaps  more  patience,  will  be  required  to 
finish  one  exercise  in  accordance  with  this  plan.  But  he  that  rules 
himself  is  greater  than  he  that  rules  a  city.  Don't  allow  any  impa- 
tience, or  wearisomeness  of  labor,  to  overcome  you.  Rule  yourself  in 
this  phonographic  study  in  the  very  first  lesson  ;  and,  instead  of  diffi- 
culties thickening  as  you  proceed,  the  way  will  constantly  become 
more  easy  ;  and  you  will  acquire  a  habit  that  will  be  invaluable  to  you 
as  a  reporter  or  in  any  other  undertaking  or  profession  ;  and,  what  will 
be  of  great  moment,  you  will  possess  a  thoroughly  practical  knowledge 
of  a  highly  useful  art. 

The  learner  should  be  examined  by  himself,  or  by  his  teacher,  as  to 
the  principles  involved  hi  each  exercise,  after  the  manner  of  syntactical 
examinations. 

After  this  Reader  has  been  thoroughly  studied  through  in  accordance 


PREFACE.  53 

with  the  preceding  directions,  and  through  again  and  again,  until  every 
page  of  the  exercises  can  be  written  with  a  speed  of  from  150  to  200 
words  per  minute,  the  student  may  write  from  dictation  from  other 
books,  etc. ,  in  all  cases  of  doubt  as  to  the  proper  reporting  outlines 
referring  to  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.  (That  work  gives 
an  immense  number  of  phrases  and  their  signs,  which  it  will  be  well  to 
write  repeatedly  from  dictation.)  This  practice  of  writing  from  dicta- 
tion, reading  notes,  and  transcribing  should  be  continued  until  suffi- 
cient speed  has  been  attained  to  commence  the  reporting  of  moderate 
speakers.  But  whatever  opportunities  may  be  offered  to  report  from 
public  speakers,  the  practice  of  writing  from  dictation  should  not  be 
discontinued  until  a  speed  has  been  acquired  of  from  150  to  200  words 
per  minute  in  new  reading 

To  attain  a  speed  greatly  surpassing  the  powers  of  the  Old  (or 
English)  Phonography,  or  any  modification  that  has  been  made  of  it 
since  the  issue  of  the  Hand-Book,  all  that  is  necessary  is,  that  the 
student,  having  commenced  with  Standard  Phonography,  shall  per- 
fectly familiarize  it,  not  meddling  with  works  on  the  Old  or  any  Com- 
promise system  to  introduce  causes  of  confusion  and  hesitation. 

The  author's  system  of  Phonographic  Nomenclature  is  of  great 
service  in  the  study  of  Phonography,  by  enabling  conversation  to  be 
carried  on  easily  and  understandingly  between  the  student  and  his 
teacher  or  fellow-learner  as  to  phonographic  outlines.  It  will  be  espe- 
cially useful  in  the  study  of  the  Reporting  Style.  This  system  famil- 
iarized describes  word-forms  and  phrase-signs  with  perfect  certainty. 
It  is  as  much  better  than  the  former  circumlocutory  descriptions  (as  for 
instance,  "  p  with  an  £-hook  and  a  circle  on  it  and  an  w-hook")  as  the 
modem  chemical  nomenclature  is  better  than  the  old  alchemistic 
names  for  elements  and  compounds.  For  convenience  of  reference,  a 
resume  [razuma-]  of  the  system  will  be  presented  in  a  following  chapter, 
there  being  added  to  the  system  ag  presented  in  the  Hand-Book  the 
method  employed  in  the  Dictionary  of  naming  '  ticks. '  Another  chap- 
ter will  show  the  application  of  the  system,  by  describing  a  page  of 
the  engraving  in  the  Reader, 

In  the  Notes,  the  aim  has  been  to  answer  every  question,  and  to  clear 
away  every  difficulty,  that  the  author  supposed  could  present  itself. 

In  the  Notes,  also,  he  has,  in  a  comparatively  few  cases,  pointed  out 
the  difference  between  the  Old  and  the  New  Phonography,  and  shown 
the  advantages  of  the  latter  over  the  former.  He  has  also  exhibited 
the  reasons  for  and  against  various  phonographic  devices,  because  the 
student,  in  learning  the  reasons  in  any  case,  becomes  possessed  of  use- 
ful principles  to  guide  him  in  analogous  cases  ;  and  these  reasons  being 


54:  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

understood,  and  a  knowledge  of  them  diffused,  will  perhaps  save  Pho- 
nography from  the  mischief  of  attempted  changes  by  persons  ignorant 
of  the  principles  involved  in  the  art. 

Throughout  this  work,  it  should  be  observed — 

1.  That  the  references,  unless  otherwise  specified,  are  to  the  Com- 
pendium, Part  n.  of  the  Hand-Book. 

2.  That  the  references  are  to  the  sections  and  their  subdivisions, 
unless  preceded  by  p  =  page.     Two  or  more  references  are  separated 
by  a  semicolon  ;  thus,  48  ;  150. 

In  making  the  selections  for  this  Reader,  the  aim  has  not  been  to 
make  those  with  which  everybody  would  agree,  for  that  would  be  impos- 
sible, but  to  make  such  as  would  afford  as  great  a  variety  as  possible 
of  styles  of  expression  and  thought  (for  the  reporter  must  study  styles 
of  thought  as  well  as  of  expression),  and  embrace  a  variety  of  the 
general  subjects  of  public  speaking,  so  as  to  introduce  an  extended 
vocabulary,  and  thus  prepare  the  student  for  ACTUAL  reporting,  by 
causing  him  to  familiarize  a  large  number  of  the  most  useful  outlines, 
word-signs,  contractions,  and  phrase-signs,  and  by  acquainting  him 
somewhat  with  the  conflicting  thoughts  which  he  must  be  prepared  to 
report.  If  any  one  should  be  disposed  to  object  to  these  selections  be- 
cause he  does  not,  perchance,  find  his  own  views  represented,  or  because 
be  finds  views  expressed  with  which  he  does  not  agree,  let  him  philo- 
sophically reflect,  that  if  he  should  seek  to  convince  an  opponent,  it 
could  be  done  only  upon  the  condition  of  a  patient  hearing  which  he  is 
disposed  to  refuse  to  the  expression  of  opinions  differing  from  his  own, 
in  this  instance  even  when  the  object  of  presenting  them  is  not  to  propa- 
gate any  particular  opinion,  but  to  furnish  the  most  useful  exercises  for  the  pupil. 

ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM. 
HBW  TOES  August  IS,  I860. 


INTRODUCTION. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  NOMENCLATURE. 

1.  THE  names  of  the  simple-consonant  strokes  are — Pee,  Bee,  Tee, 
Dee,  Chay,  Jay,  Kay,  Gay,  Ef,  Vee,  Ith,  Dhee,  Es,  Zee,  Ish  (sh  writ- 
ten downward),  Shay  (sh  written  upward),  Zhay,  El  (I  written  down- 
ward), Lay  (I  written  upward),  Ar  (r  written  downward),  Ray  (the 
upward  r),  Em,  En,  Ing,  Way,  Yay,  Hay. 

2.  The  circle  for  s  or  z,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  the  stroke,  is 
named  Iss,  where  its  sound  can  not-  be  conveniently  spoken  in  one 
syllable  with  the  name  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined.     Skay  is 
the  s-circle  and  the  stroke  for  k.     Es-Kay,  the  stroke  for  s  and  the 
stroke  for  k.     Iss-Bee,  the  s-circle  and  the  stroke  for  b. 

3.  The  large  circle  is  named  Ses  or  Sez,  printed  either  in  a  separate 
syllable,  or  added  to  the  name  of  a  stroke  without  a  preceding  hyphen. 
Thus,  Ses-Tee,  Chay-  Ses  or  Chay'sez. 

4.  The  loop  for  st  is  named  Steh  (e  as  in  met),  or  the  sound  of  the 
letters  si  is  spoken  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  stroke  to  which 
the  loop  is  joined;    thus,  Steh-Tee,  Steh-Pee,  Star  (sMoop  and  the 
downward  r),  Chayst,  Kayst,  Enst,  Wayst. 

5.  The  loop  for  sir  is  named  Ster.     To  distinguish  it  from  the  name 
of  another  letter  (Iss  and  Ter,  or  simply  Ster),  it  is  made  to  form,  with 
the  name  of  the  preceding  letter,  a  single  word,  accented  on  the  first 
syllable.     For  example,  En,  Bees,  and  Kay  form  with  the  name  for  the 
loop  Ster,  the  words  En'ster,  Bee'ster,  Kay'ster. 

6.  The  brief  sign  for  w  is  called  Brief  Way,  or,  in  order  to  distin- 
guish between  the  different  facings  of  the  sign,  Weh,  when  facing  to 
the  right,  and  Wuh,  when  facing  to  the  left.     When  joined  as  a  hook 
to  Em,  En,  Lay,  Ray,  the  characters  thus  formed  are  named  Wem, 
Wen,  Wei,  Wer. 

7.  The  brief  sign  for  y  is  named  Brief  Yay,  or,  in  order  to  distinguish 
between  the  different  directions,  Yeh,  when  the  sign  opens  upward, 
and  Yuh,  when  it  opens  downward. 

8.  The  brief  Way  and  Yay,  when  written  in  the  vowel-places  to  in- 
dicate a  following  vowel,  are  called  we,  ye,  wa,  ya,  etc.,  the  w  and  y 
being  printed  with  a  small  letter. 

9.  The  tick  for  h  may  be  called  Heh,  or  named  in  accordance  with 
a  plan,  hereafter  explained  (23)  of  naming  ticks,  vowel-dashes,  etc. 


56  INTRODUCTION. 

The  dot  for  h  may  be  called  Hetch,  or  spoken  in  connection  with  the 
•vowels  ;  thus,  he,  ha,  ha,  etc. 

10.  The  El-hook  signs  are  named,  Pel,  Bel,  Tel,  Del,  Kel,  Gel  (g  as 
in  gay),  Fel,  Vel,  Thel,  Dhel,  Shel,  Zhel,  Yel,  Mel,  Nel,  Rel. 

11.  The  Ar-hook  signs  are  named,  Per,  Ber,  Ter,  Der,  Cher,  Jer, 
Ker,  Ger,  Fer,  Ver,  Ther,  Dher,  Sher,  Zher,  Mer,  Ner. 

12.  The  back  hook  for  in,  en,  or  un,  written  at  the  beginning  of  Iss- 
Per  or  Sper,  Iss-Ter  or  Ster,  and  some  other  letters,  is  named  In  ;  thus, 
In-Sper=In-Iss-Per=Ins-Per,  In-Ster,  In-Sker.     In-Iss-Lay=In-Slay 
=-Ins-Lay. 

13.  The  enlarged  El-hook  signs,   t.   e. ,   the   Ler-hook  signs,   are 
named,  Pier,  Bier,  Tier,  Dler,  etc.     See  Comp.,  §  175. 

14.  The  enlarged  Ar-hook  signs,  t.  e.,  the  Rel-hook  signs,  are  named, 
Prel,  Trel,  etc.     See  Comp.,  §  175. 

15.  The  simple,  or  group,  signs  with  an  Ef-hook,  are  named  by  pre- 
fixing the  sounds  they  represent  to  the  syllable  Ef,  if  this  can  be  done 
conveniently  ;  if  not,  add  the  sound  of/  to  the  syllable-name  of  the 
stroke  ;  thus,  Pef,  Chef,  Ref,  Plef,  lief  or  Telf,  Chref  or  Cherf,  Prelf, 
Plerf,  Chlerf. 

16.  The  simple,  and  the  group,  signs  with  the  En-hook,  are  named 
by  prefixing  the  sounds  they  represent  to  the  syllable  En,  or,  if  more 
convenient,  or  better  for  distinction's  sake,  by  prefixing  the  syllable- 
name  of  the  stroke  to  the  syllable  En,  or  to  the  sound  of  n,  the  accent 
being  placed  upon  the  name  of  the  stroke ;  thus,  Pen,  Ken,  Plen, 
Chlen  or  Chel'en,  Pren,  Chren  or  Chern,  Prel'en,  Plern,.  Chlern,  Es'en 
(not  Sen=Iss-En),  Wayn  (instead  of  Wen,  which  is  En  with  the  Way- 
hook),  Yayn. 

17.  The  name  of  a  Shon-hook  or  Tlv-hook  sign  is  formed  by  adding 
the  syllable  Shon  or  Tiv,  as  the  case  may  be,  to  the  name  of  the 
stroke ;     thus,    Pee'shon,    Dee'shon,    Ray'shon,   Pel'shon,   Per'shon, 
Pler'shon,  Prel'shon,  Wer'shon,  Rel'shon  ;  Pee'tiv,  Dee'tiv,  Chay'tiv, 
Pel'tiv,  Rel'tiv,  Per'tiv,  Cher'tiv,  Pler'tiv,  Prel'tiv. 

18.  The  small  hook  for  shon,  is  named  Esh'on  ;  thus,  Dees-Eshon, 
decision  ;  Pees-Eshon,   position,   possession ;   Perseshon,   persuasion  ; 
Trenseshon,  transition.     See  Comp.,  §  197,  1. 

19.  The  widened  Em  is  named  Emp  or  Emb.  according  as  it  repre- 
sents mp  01  mb. 

20.  Lengthened  strokes,  doubled  or  trebled,  are  named  by  prefixing 
the  name  of  the  stroke  to  the  sound  added  by  lengthening;  thus, 
Ing'ker,  Ing'ger,  Lay'ter,  Lay'ther  or  Lay'dher ;  Wuy'ter,  Wcn'dhcr, 
i'el'ther,  Fer'dher ;  Chay'dher,  Kay'dher  ;  Chay'dherdhcr,  Way 'dher- 
dher.     See  Comp.,  §  207  ;  264  ;  204,  R.  9. 


INTRODUCTION.  57 

21.  The   syllables  ter,  der,  tlier,  dher,   Ler,  ger,  when   they  indicate 
strokes,  are  commenced  with  capital  letters,  and  are  separated  from 
the  name  of  any  preceding  stroke  to   which   they  are  joined,  by  a 
hyphen  ;    thus,   En-Tor,    entry  ;    Sen-Der,    sundry  ;  Ver-Ther,  over- 
l,,.  in  ;  Ll'-ijlier,  feathery;  Ing-Ger,  angry. 

22.  The  half-lengths  are  named  by  adding  the  syllable  Et  or  Ed  to 
the  sound  of  the  full-length,  except  when  it  is  more  convenient,  or 
butter  for  distinction's  sake,  to  add  the  sound  of  t  or  d  to  the  syllable- 
.,  ,.i,  .,i  the  full-length;  thus,  Pet  or  Fed,  Bet  or  Bed,  Let,  Eld,  Met, 
Mod,  Net  or  Ent,  Ned  or  End,  Art,  Ard,  Berd  or  Bred,  Mert  or  Merd, 
Pee'&hont  or  Pee'shond,  Dee'shond,  etc.  ;  Weint  or  Wemd,  Wert  or 
Word,  Plet  or  Pled,  Tlet  or  Telt,  Belt  or  Deld,  Pret,  Bret. 

23.  The  dash-vowel  word-signs,  and  similar  small  signs,  may  be 
named  by  the  words  they  represent,  as 'all,'  'of,'  'to,'  'I,'  '  he,' etc.  ; 
or  names  may  be  formed  for  them  by  adding  the  syllable  oid  (signifying 
like,  or  resembling)  to  the  names  of  the  half-lengths  which  these  small 
signs  resemble.     Bcd'oid1  is  the  sign  for  all;  Ded'oid1  is  the  sign  for 
already ;    Kret'oid2  is    the    horizontal    and- tick  with    the   Ar-hook  ; 
Peft'oid2is  the  word-sign  for  to  with  the  Ef-hook. 

24.  Prefix  and  Affix  signs  are  indicated  by  quoting  them,   thus, 
'con,'   'com,'   'accom,'   'discon,'   'ing,'    'ingly,'    '  bility ;'   or,  their 
signs  may  be  indicated  by  their  syllable-names. 

25.  Enlarged  Way  is  named,  when  opening  to  the  East,  "Weh'weh  ; 
to  the  West,  Wuh'wuh ;  to  the  North-east,  Weh'yeh  ;  to  the  South- 
west, Wuh'yuh.     Way  may  be  substituted  for  the  first  syllable  of 
these  names,  if  the  sign  is  heavy.     Weh'wernt  is  the  name  of  Rent 
with  Weh'weh  joined  as  an  initial  hook.     See  Comp.,  §  202. 

20.  Enlarged  Yay  is  named,  when  opening  upward,  Yeh'weh  ;  when 
opening  downward,  Yuh'wuh  ;  when  the  sign  is  heavy,  '  Yay'  may  be 
substituted  for  the  first  syllable  of  these  names  ;  thus,  Yay'weh. 

POSITION. 

27.  The  figures  1,  2,  3  are  used  to  denote  respectively  the  first, 
second,  and  third  position.     The  figure  4  is  employed  to  indicate  that 
the  letter  after  whose  name  it  is  placed  is  to  be  written  to  imply  a 
preceding  to,  according  to  the  Comp. ,  §  250,  Eem.  2.     Thus,  Es4  is  Es 
commencing  at  the  line  of  writing,  as  in  writing  '  to  say'  in  the  Re- 
porting Style. 

LETTERS  DISJOINED,  OR  CROSSING,  ETC. 

28.  To  indicate  that  a  sign  is  to  be  written  disjoined  near  the  other 
portion  of  the  word,  it  is  preceded  or  followed  by  a  colon.     En:Bcest, 
indicates  that  En  is  to  be  written  near,  but  not  joined,  to  Beest. 


58  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

29.  The  dagger  (f)  is  printed  between  two  signs  to  indicate  that  the 
character  following  it  is  to  be  written  through  the  preceding  one : 
thus,  '  EnfEf '  indicates  that  the  Ef  is  to  be  written  through  the  En. 

30.  By  inclosing  one  or  more  letters  (not  vowels)  in  curves,  it  is  indi- 
cated that  the  writer  may,  if  he  choose,  dispense  with  the  sign  or  signs 
for  such  letters. 


KEY  TO  THE  PRONUNCIATION. 

As  pronunciation  will  need  to  be  indicated  occasionally  in  the  subse- 
quent pages,  the  following  Key  should  be  observed  by  the  student : 

a,  e,  etc.,  long;  a,  e,  etc.,  short ;  u  as  in  full,  and  as  o  in  to;  u  as  in 
up;  33  as  ai  in  air ;  o  as  a  in  all;  6  as  o  in  for,  long ;  a  as  a  in  ah;  a  as  a  in 
art;  a  as  a  in  ask;  ra  as  oo  in  too ;  dh  for  the  spoken  th,  as  in  then;  and 
th  for  the  whispered  th,  as  in  thin;  zh  for  the  spoken  sound  correspond- 
ing to  the  whispered  *A.  (•)  Accent;  thus,  ak'sent.  (.)  Syllable- 
mark;  thus,  in.kwlr. 

For  ordinary  purposes  I  do  not  distinguish  between  o  and  6  ;  a,  a, 
and  a  ;  e  and  e  ;  simply  because  the  different  situations  of  these  sounds 
are  sufficient  distinction  for  ordinary  purposes.  In  the  Standard-Pho- 
nographic Dictionary  these  distinctions  are  always  carefully  indicated. 


EXAMPLES  OF  PHONOGRAPHIC  DESCRIPTION. 

THE  following  paragraphs  are  designed  to  exhibit  the  application  of 
Phonographic  Nomenclature,  by  describing  p.  8  of  this  Reader.  The 
sign  (:)  may  be  read  "near"  when  in  the  place  of  of,  of  a-n,  of  the,  or 
implied  con,  com,  cog,  and  "  disjoined,"  when  preceding  affixes  or  follow- 
ing prefixes. 

Net-Els-  Dees-Pee-Jay:'ing'  Geds*-Zed-Em  Dhee3-Lays  Dee2-Strcf 
Petsoid-'-Ged-Ens  Zee?-Retoid  Jel2-Jay  Ith'-Ray  En- Vent3  Ketoid-Pet3- 
Ef  En«  '3Q— Nel2  15  Yeh'-Gay— Bee'-Chetoid  Ray*-Vee-Dcr  Pce(i)1- 
Sem-Ith  Nerd'-Petoid-Ray:Slay>  'the'  Dhen*  Kay '-Ent-Pret:«  first' 
Chay3:Jay--Enses  Weh'-Chetoid  Dee2-Em-Stershons:Jel--Jay-Es-Ens. 
Der'-Sem-Ith  Sded1  Es2  Chays  Es4-Ens  Iss2  Dee4-Met  Dhet'-Ray-Gel-Bee 
Deeses'-Ted  Ef*  Ken t^-Lays- Jays  Ketoid-I)ee:!-Ben-En-Bet  Bee'-Vee- 
Rays-Rayses:En'--Mcls  Bef2  Dee?-Em  Zee-Kret(ya)  [to  be  readKret  voc. 
w  ya,  or  kreat-]  ;  Tetoid*  Ef--Skay:Vcnd'-Ket:' ing-a'  Layter'-Ent- 


INTRODUCTION.  Otf 

Pret:Em-Zee--Kay  Kent3:Kershon2 — Kredl-Chay2  Sen2  Men3  Stars* 
Plents3  En'-Mels  Ketoid-Men2  Ems2  Weh2  Kret2  Net'-Ket  6  Ith3-Yeh- 
Gay  Kletoid2  Dhen'-Petoid  'com':  Pees2: 6  Dee2-Ren-Lay  Dees2:24 
Ar;3-Iss  Chay'— Chetoid2-Ment-End-Dhet  Sem-Ray2  Per2-Pees  In-Sem2 
Senter3-Pref-Ens:(a)Ish2— Nen3  Ens2-Tees  Let3-Ted  Tetoid1  El?-En-Jet 
Ketoid-En'-Jay-Ger  Tetoid1  Jel2-Jay  Iss2-Dees-Kef  En-Ters(a)2-Vet— 
Dher^-Zee  Ketoid-Spet(o) '  Sem2  10  Em-Lays2  Skay-Wer2  Lay'-Kay- 
Chetoid  Dees2-Kel  Wer2  Wei1  Bedoid1  Tees3-Det  En-Dheedher2-Prets- 
Gel-Bce  "  Zee2  Lay'-Ef  Ketoid-Let'  Dher2-Rend(a)  Ef  2-Tee  .Nel2  Dce2- 
Ith  Ketoid-Drens3  (a)Med'-Eetoid.  Welters-Ings :Kay-Tee2-Kay-Es' ; 
Ketoid-Chay2  Tee3-Retoid  Def>:End2  Zee'J-Pent-Ret  Bee'-Let  Tetoid- 
Kay-Ped1  Bee '-Der(I) -Lend  Ketoid-Elt2-Met  (a)Ar2-Retoid-End:Kertiy2 
Wuh-Kayi  Bee2-Kay-Tetoid  Senter2  En-Chay2  Iss-Ret«-Plents  Ketoid- 
Ens-Mels  Ketoid-Ef  '-Nel  Men2  Ems5  Weh2  Kret2. ' '  En2-Petoid,  Wuh'- 
Ketoid-Dees-Gays-Ef  En-Stens2  Iss-Dhees3:Tee?-Ens-Tee  Weh-Chay« 
Ith--Jay  Per2:Sj)eeshons2  Ar--Eld  En-Def'--(I)Ens:Felss-Ef-Ter.  Spees4- 
Dhet  Wei'  Bedoid'-Chetoid  Jel-'-Jay-(e)Ar-Iss  Wen?-Eft-Endher  Weh« 
Pees3:' ing'  Therdher2  Em^-Ens  Skcls'  Ketoid-Wel'  Bedoid > -Ray st : 
Rays-Ith  Zee2-Def3:' ing  '  Steh-Tee4:Per2-Pee-Ray  Ef2-Chetoid  Rays2- 
Dens:Men2  Ketoid-Let'-Pers-Ray:Ka)--Es2  Sem-Ray2  Retoid3-Bee-Kerf 
Ef2-Enst  En'  Ketoid-Chays'-El  Kay-Pet2  Tel"  6  Ith3-Yeh-Gay  Wen'- 
Chetoid  Wer3  Zce«-Den  En'-Skays-Uees  Chef-Dee  Lays2-Ar  Kay-Pet1 
Kent-Lays2-Jays  Pref4  Ketoid-Dhet1  Emses2  En3-Chetoid  Bedoid1  Bet3- 
Dhees  Skays-Dees2  Wer2  Tetoid2  Dent'-En  Bet3-Dheedher  Teftoid1- 
Petoid-Ded  En2  Bet3-Tee  Kay-Pet2  Iss1  En-Jay2  Ems4.  Retoid3  Ef  2-Kay- 
Ish  Wuh2-Bee-Chctoid  Nen3  Tetoid-Kay-Pershon2:Ter3-Jen  Ketoid- 
Ter3-Es-Eus  En-Pref3-Ent:'ing'  Schay2-Ray-Kreds:Ish-Em  Fer2-Bee- 
Ing  In-Sker1  Retoid-Pee7-Jays:Est'-Ray. 

Ver'--Bed  Ens?-Chetoid  Ef2-Kay:Tee2-En-Dee  '  inter '  :Em-Ray- Jays 
Em2-Ing-Perses  Rel2  Bee1  Sen-Gay-En-Teea.  '  The '  '  cog '  :Nefc2  Bled2 
En-En-Ray2-Chet  Ketoid-En-Stee=-Em-Let  Ferdher2  Fent3-Ens  Sen^ 
Breds1  Wuh-Kay'-Ens  Deeses1  Ketoid-Embs-Let1.  Jays?-Ests  Weh1- 
Tetoid  Sket2  Dhet1  Ishts'-Tee  Ter2  Kays-Tee2-Zee-Net  Em-Berst2  En1- 
Skay-Em  Vets'  Fend3-Rays.  'The'  !-Dees2 :Schay2-Sket  Vee2-En  Lay- 
ter*-En-Tef  Efdher^  Tee2-En-Deeses-Tens  Tetoid2  Bred(e)4  En'-Ketoid- 
En  Ketoid-Dhees2  Bee'-Tetoid  Skel-Jay--Lay  Iss3  (I)Em-Tee2-Bel  Iss2- 
Chetoid  Efs2-Jay  Sen3  Bee2-Gets  Per^-Jay-EniEfs-Ith  Ray2,Ens  Bees- 
Ard  Embs-Lay1  Ketoid-Det'-Kay.  Tetoid2  Chetoid:!-Kay-'  we  '  Way3 
Jen1  Weh4-Dee  Es--Ens.  Chetoid3-Ken-' we '  Ray-iSlay1  Es--Ens  Es-- 
Ing  Ester2-En-Jcd  Ketoid-En2-Petoid  Retoid-Ef'-Ar  Mer2  Ester2-En-Jed 
Dhen:!-Vee  Es*-I'ees  Jen'  Ketoid-Dhees3  Spet3-Chetoid  Nel2  Bred'-Ger- 
Em  Dhets'-Wer-DheeiAr1  Ken'-Lay  Bet2  Tetoid-Ar'  Em'-Gay  Dee3- 


60  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   KEADEB. 

Bay.  Retoid '-Ens-Ray  Es'-Ens  Snet'  Skef.  Tee2-Dees-Net:Fen  Tecs3 
En4-Sgay-Ment:Iss-Rel?:Fels--Ef-Ter  Tetoid*  Skays'  Ein4-Bere-Chctoid 
Enter'  Sef2-Rens.  TeeS-Pere-Dee  Ketoid-Bee'-Get  En'-Ea-Ens  Kcnt1- 
Lay-Vee. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  REPORTING  STYLE. 

THE  Corresponding  Style  of  Standard  Phonography  contains,  in  germ 
at  least,  nearly  every  principle  of  the  Reporting  Style.  The  latter  is 
distinguished  from  the  former  principally  by  the  following-mentioned 
characteristics. 

I.  By  usually  omitting  the  A'owels. 

n.  By  the  extension  of  the  use  of  three  positions  for  outlines. 

HE.  By  additions  to  the  word-signs  and  contractions  of  the  Corre- 
sponding Style. 

By  means  of  improvements  in  word-signs  and  contractions  alone 
(many  of  which  improvements,  however,  are  dependent  upon  the  new 
principles  embodied  in  Standard  Phonography)  a  great  gain  over  the 
Old  or  English  Phonography  is  made  in  respect  of  speed.  This  specifi- 
cation is  inclusive  of  the  general  principles  of  contraction  of  Standard 
Phonography,  but  exclusive  of  anything  specified  in  the  following 
paragraphs. 

IV.  By  substituting,  for  convenience  of  phrase- writing,  briefer  word- 
signs  for  some  of  the  Corresponding  word-signs—namely — 

(1)  By  expressing  He  by  a  tick,  whether  standing  alone  or  in  phrase- 
writing.     This  makes  an  important  gain  over  the  Old  reporting  st}  le, 
in  which  fie  was  expressed  by  a  dot,  or  (as  improved  by  the  writer,  for 
convenience  of  phrase- writing)  by  Hay,  the  some  as  in  the  Correspond- 
ing Style  of  Standard  Phonography.     This  method  of  writing  he  secures 
thousands  of  phrase-signs  which  were  either  difficult  or  impossible  upon 
any  former  plan  of  writing  this  word.     See.  in  the  Standard-Phono- 
graphic Dictionary,  the  phrases  commencing  with  He. 

(2)  By  expressing  How  by  the  Hay-tick  in  the  third  position.     This 
makes  a  gain  of  fifty  per  cent,  upon  the  Old  Phonography  in  the  ex- 
pression of  this  word,  and  secures  a  large  number  of  phrase-signs  which 
were  impossible  in  the  Old  Phonography.     See  the  phrases  beginning 
with  How,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

(3)  By  expressing  /  when  standing  alone  by  a  perpendicular  tick 


L 


LNTKODTJCTIOiX.  61 

(271) ;  and  when  joined  to  a  preceding  word,  by  a  perpendicular  01 
horizontal  tick  (103,  R.  1).  This  makes  a  considerable  gain  over  the 
Old  Phonography,  securing  many  valuable  phrase-signs  where  none 
were  possible  in  the  Pitman  Phonography. 

(1)  Dy  <:Apii;of.;iig  You  in  phrase-writing  by  Ych  whenever  Yuh  can 
not  be  employe  1  at  all,  or  without  difficulty  ;  thus,  I  send  you. 
Retoid'-Send-Ych. 


V.  By  implying  7b,  followed  or  not  by  a-n  or  the  (which  are 
by  means  of  the  context). 

(1)  Either  by  joining  the  following  word  to  the  preceding ;  thus, 
Ish'-Bee,  wish  to  be  ;  Kred-Dhet1,  according  to  that. 

(2)  Or,  by  commencing  the  following  word  where  the  word  sign  for 
to  would  stop  (i.  e.,  so  as  to  just  touch  the  lower  edge  of  the  line  of 
writing),     p.  130,  R.  2;  §  260,  b. 

This  single  principle  adds  greatly  to  the  speed  secured  by  the  Old 
Phonography. 

VI.  By  implying  Of,  followed  or  not  by  a,  an,  or  the  (which  are  sup- 
plied by  aid  of  the  context),  by  writing  the  following  word  near  or 
joined  to  the  preceding.     This  principle  adds  considerably  to  the  speed 
of  the  Old  Phonography.     This  principle  is  also  valuable  on  account 
of  its  distinguishing,  almost  always,  between  of  and  /at  the  beginning 
of  phrases. 

VII.  By  writing  the  present  time  for  the  past  tense  or  time  when- 
ever a  stroke  or  more  can  be  saved  thereby. 

This  principle  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography.  It 
is  a  gene/al  principle  of  contraction  of  Standard  Phonography,  not  in- 
cluded in  specification  III. 

VIII.  By  using  a  large  hook  on  Em,  En,  Ray  for  I. 

This  principle  obviates  many  inconvenient  forms  of  the  Old  Phonog- 
raphy. 

IX.  By  enlarging  the  small  El-hook  to  add  r,  and  the  Ar-hook  to 
add/. 

This  new  principle  secures  a  great  advantage  over  the  Old  Phonog- 
raphy in  respect  of  brevity,  analogy,  and  distinctions. 

X.  By  enlarging  Brief  Way  and  Yay.    262  and  263.     This  new  prin- 
ciple renders  easy  the  writing  of  many  phrases  which  by  the  Old  Pho- 
nography were  written  slowly  and  with  comparative  difficulty — such 
expressions,  for  instance,  as  the  following  : — "If  we  can  not  do  wh:it 
we  would,  let  us  do  what  we  can — We  were  with  difficulty — What  were 


62  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

you  thinking  —  What  you  would  —  What  you  were  —  You  were  —  You 
would.     See  Phonographic  Intelligencer,  198. 

XI.  By  frequently  prefixing  you  by  a  Yuh-hook,  and  by  frequently 
joining  we  by  the  Way-hook,  even  to  certain  straight  lines,     p.  167, 
R.  2;  p.  168,  R.  3. 

This  partially  new  principle  also  obviates  in  many  cases  the  slowness 
and  difficulty  of  writing  phrases  which  are  spoken  with  great  rapidity 
—  such  as,  "  We  can  —  we  can  not  —  we  give  —  we  may  be  —  you  do—  \<  /u 
do  not  —  if  you  choose  —  if  you  desire  —  if  you  wish  —  if  we  can  —  if  we 
can  not." 

By  this  principle  many  such  phrases  can  be  written  much  faster 
than  in  the  Old  Phonography.  See,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary,  the  phrases  beginning  with  Have  you,  If  you,  If  we,  Are  you, 
Cxause  you,  Because  we,  Can  we,  Can  you,  Could  you,  Shall  you,  May  you, 
You  do. 

XII.  By  lengthening  the  straight  lines  to  add  thr  (and  by  the  ad- 
vanced reporter  sometimes  to  add  Ir,  dr),  and  trebling  them  to  add 
thrlhr  ;  and  also  by  lengthening  Ing  and  the  other  curves  to  acid 
dhr  =  there,  their,  they  are,  they  were,  other.     See  Dim  in  the  Stand- 
ard-Phonographic Dictionary.     All  this  is  new,  with  the  exception  of 
lengthening  the  curves  to  add  there,  their,  and  they  are. 

The  new  part  of  this  principle  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old  Pho- 
nography. 


By  expressing  dhr  (  =  their,  there,  they  are,  they  were, 
other  ;  see  DHK  in  the  Standard-Phononographic  Dictionary)  by  a 
heavy  tick  (272)  when  it  can  not  be  more  conveniently  expressed  other- 
wise. This  frequently  gams  considerably  over  the  Old  Phonography. 

XIV.  By  the  frequent  expression  of  all  or  will  by  an  El-  hook  or  by 
enlarging  an  Ar-hook.  This  principle  makes  considerable  gain  over 
the  Old  Phonography  in  many  cases,  by  securing  a  condensed  and 
brief  expression  for  many  phrases  which  were  written  too  slowly  in  the 
Old  Phonography,  and  by  enabling  the  reporter  to  avail  himself  of 
other  valuable  principles,  as  in  writing  By  att,  Bel1  ;  by  all  its,  Blets1  ; 
by  all  (Jir,  Beldher'  ;  by  all  (of)  our,  Bier1. 

XV  By  the  frequent  expression  of  are,  were,  or  owr-by  an  Ar-hook, 
or  by  enlarging  an  El-hook.  This  principle  makes  considerable  gain 
over  the  Old  Phouogiaphj,  by  rendering  possible  a  condensed  and 
brief  expression  for  many  phrases  which  were  written  too  slowly  in  the 
Old  Phonography,  and  by  securing  the  advantages  of  other  principles 


INTRODUCTION.  63 

— as  in  writing  By  our,  Ber1 ;  by  our  other,  Berdher1 ;  which  are,  Cher2 ; 
which  were,  Cher3 ;  which  are  there/ore,  Cherdherf  2 ;  which  are  had,  Cherd2 ; 
which  are  of,  Cherf 2 ;  for  all  are  (or  our),  Fler2. 

XVI.  By  making  it  a  general  principle  to  add  it,  had,  what,  or  would 
(and  occasionally,  in  the  writing  of  the  practiced  reporter,  at,  out),  by 
shortening  a  letter.     This  very  frequently  makes  a  great  gain  over  the 
Old  Phonography. 

XVII.  By  using  the  Ef-hook  on  curves,  both  to  express  simple /or  v, 
and  to  express  have,  ever,  fore  (sometimes  for-th),  of,  and  the  affixes  ful- 
ly-ness.     This  method  frequently  makes  a  considerable  gain  over  the 
Old  Phonography.     For  example— Lef-Kend,  loving  kindness ;  Nef-Get, 
navigate;  Dhef-,  they  have;  Emdherf 2,  may  there  ever,  or  may  therefore; 
Es'ef3,  useful-ty-ness. 

XVIII.  By  frequently  adding  than  to  comparatives  by  an  En-hook,  as 
in  writing  more  than,  Mern2 ;  older  than,  Laydern2 ;  longer  than,  Indhern3 ; 
better  than,  Bet2-Ren.     This  principle  frequently  makes  a  great  gain 
over  the  Old  Phonography. 

XIX.  By  omitting  to  a  greater  extent  than  in  the  Corresponding 
Style  words  which  may  be  supplied  ;  as  in  writing  more  than  one,  Mer2- 
Wen  ;  over  and  above,  Ver"-Bee-Vee  ;  from  place  to  place,  Pels-Pels ;  from 
time  to  time,  Tee'iTee1 ;  in  connection  with,  En':Kayshon2. 

XX.  By  the  uses  of  the  mode  of  expressing  repetitions  explained  in  the 
Compendium,  §  276.    This  principle  is  very  valuable  to  the  reporter,  be- 
cause the  repetitions  for  the  expression  of  which  it  provides  are  usually 
spoken  with  such  rapidity  that  it  was  at  least  very  difficult  to  report 
them  by  the  Old  Phonography.     See  an  instance  of  this  on  p.  20  of 
this  Reader,  line  17,  where  Standard  Phonography  gains  over  the  Old 
Phonography  in  writing  what  would  be  spoken  in  two  seconds  seven 
strokes  and  three  liftings  of  the  pen. 

XXI.  By  the  extensive  use  of  phrase-writing.     See,  and  carefully 
study,  the  Compendium  from  §  244-246  inclusive. 

The  following  rather  inelegant  yet  forcible  statement  of  the  advan- 
tages of  phrase- writing  is  commended  to  the  reader's  attention  : 

"  Phraseography  is  of  special  importance  to  the  reporter.  Whatever 
may  be  the  amount  of  his  practice,  the  reporter  will  sometimes  find 
himself  engaged  in  a  chase  with  the  speaker ;  [.]  it  is  then  that  the 
use  of  this  principle  will  be  felt  and  appreciated,  [;]  for  [,]  perhaps  a 
single  convenient  phraseograph  [phraseograrn]  will  bring  him,  as  with 
a  bound,  close  up  to  the  speaker." 


Oi  8ECOKD    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    EEADER. 

Standard  Phonography,  by  its  new  principles  of  writing,  independent 
of  its  peculiar  powers  of  phrase-writing,  renders  the  s]Krt.nle  <;f  "a 
chase  with  the  speaker"  far  less  necessary  than  with  the  OKI  IJhoiu,g- 
raphy ;  and,  by  furnishing  in  abundance  those  convenient  phrase-sijrns 
which  "bring  the  writer,  as  with  a  bound,  close  up  to  the  speaker," 
and  which  in  the  Old  Phonography  were  frequently  absent  when  most 
needed,  enables  the  reporter  to  keep  pace  with  the  spea/  .er,  and  places 
the  reporting  ability  within  the  reach  c  thousands  rho  otherwise 
could  not  attain  it. 

Standard  Phonography,  by  many  of  its  lew  principles,  greatly  facili- 
tates phrase-writing  ;  and  it  is  fully  ada^d  to  the  easy  expression  of 
frequent  and  rapidly-spoken  phrases  of  ordinary  speaking,  which  by 
the  Old  Phonography  were  often  written  with  great  comparative  slow- 
ness. Many  phrases  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  public  speaking, 
especially  if  extemporaneous,  which  rarely  occur  in  books  ;  and  a  sys- 
tem of  shorthand,  when  applied  to  the  writing  of  the  language  of 
elaborate  compositions,  might  seem  sufficiently  rapid  for  reporting 
purposes,  and  yet  prove  very  deficient  or  fail  entirely  when  applied  to 
actual  reporting.  Any  one  who  will  observe  the  wonderful  phraseo- 
graphic  power  of  Standard  Phonography,  as  exhibited  in  the  exercises 
in  this  work,  must  see  that  it  is  greatly  superior  to  any  other  system 
of  shorthand,  and  that  it  is  fully  adequate  to  the  requirements  of  actual 
reporting. 


KEY 

TO  THE 

REPORTING   EXERCISES. 


ANCIENT  AND  MODERN  PHILOSOPHY. 
PAGB 

')  THE  end  which  the  great  Lord  Bacon  proposed  to  himself1  was 
^  the  multiplying"  of  human   enjoyments3  and   the  mitigating 

P<.OK 

O  i  to  himself.— p.  130,  R.  2.  The  caution  of  this  Remark—"  Provided,  th"t 
*-*  the,  word  no  written  would  not  f>e  liable  to  J/e  mistaken  for  some  other  word 
in  the  third  position" — may  be  complied  with  in  respect  of  horizontals  by  writing 
them,  for  the  fourth  position  (i.  e.,  to  imply  to),  clos-e  against  ihe  lower  edge  of  the 
line ;  and,  for  the  third  position,  a  little  below  the  line.  See  an  example  of  the 
third  and  Ihe  fourth  posiiion,  in  accordance  with  this  plan,  in  the  bottom  line  of 
p.  8— "new  securities3  to-the-mariner4."  It  matters  little,  however,  if  there  Is  no 
distinciion  made  between  the  third  and  the  fourth  position;  for  reference  to  the 
context  will  usually  determine,  at  once,  whether  or  not  to  was  meant  to  be  implied. 

2  multiplying  of  human  enjoyments. — Melt2  as  a  word-sign  for  multi- 
ply-'ed,  multitude,  is  nearly  three  times  as  fast  as  the  old  forms,  Em-Let-Pel,  Em-Let- 
Pled,  and  Em-Let-Ted.    This  gain  is,  of  course,  dependent  upon  the  new  principle 
of  writing  a  large  initial  hook  on  En,  En,  Eay,  for  I.    Experience  shows  that  a 
large  initial  hook  may  be  written  as  readily  at  least  as  a  large  final  one.    The  Old 
Phonogr.-iphy  prohibited  the  shortening  of  a  large-hook  letter,  but  there  was  no 
sufficient  reason  for  such  prohibition.    The  shorten  ing  of  large-hook  letters  obviates 
many  difficult  or  needlessly  long  outlines  of  the  Old  Phonography,  and  constitutes 
one  of  the  valuable  and  characteristic  features  of  Standard  Phonography.    (b)  A 
little  practice  will  show  any  one  who  may  think  that  a  large  initial  hook  Is  difficult, 
thnl  it  is  so  for  just  the  same  reason  that  the  making  of  Pee  or  Gay  is  difficult  to  the 
beginner— namely,  thai  it  is  new. 

3  of  human  enjoyments. — The  implying  of  <yby  writing  the  following  word 
near  the  preceding,  which  is  a  novel  feature  of  Standard  Phonography,  secuies  the 
advantage  of  leaving  the  following  word  in  its  proper  position,  and  thus  sidding  to 
legibility,  as  well  for  this  cause  as  by  usually  securing  a  different  indication  of  / 
and  Of  at  the  beginning  of  phrase-sinns.    "  Of  human  enjoyments"  expressed  by 
the  OH  Phonography,  Petoi  J'-Men-En-Jay-Mcnts,  not  only  requires  an  additional 
stroke  and  angle  (for  angles  of  themselves  consume  time,  and  must  be  taken  into 


66  SECOND   STANDARD-PHOITOGRAPHIC   READER. 

of  human  sufferings.  The  ancient*  philosophy  disdained  to  be*  use- 
ful," and  was1  content*  to  be  stationary.*  It  dealt  largely  in  theories 
of  moral  perfection,"  which  were  so"  sublime,  that  they  never  could 
be12  more  than"  theories  ;  in  attempts  to  solve14  insoluble  enigmas,  in 

acconnt),  but  human  must  be  brought  out  of  its  proper  (third)  position,  and,  of 
cuur.-e,  its  legibility  somewhat  impaired. 

<  ancient — See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  ANCIENT.  The 
Old-Phonographic  outline  for  this  word  was  En-Shaynt 

•  disdained  to  be.— 250,  2.    The  implying  of  to  by  the  principle  of  this  refer- 
ence is,  a*  a  general  principle,  a  new  feature  of  Standard  Phonography.    Its  value 
will  be  better  understood  as  we  proceed.    The  principles  of  implying  of  and  to 
have  saved,  in  the  first  line  of  this  exercise,  three  strokes  and  one  lifting. 

•  useful. — See  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

7  and  was. — The  plan  of  joining  awl  by  either  a  perpendicular  or  horizontal 
tick  was  introduced  by  thf  auihor.  The  rule  of  the  Old  Phonography  was  that  and 
might  be  joined  by  a  horizontal  tick  only,  and  only  in  the  Reporting  Style.  Of 
course,  the  writing  of  such  phrases  as  and  was,  and  so,  and  many  other  phrases, 
required  the  lifting  of  the  pen  where  it  is  now  obviated. 

»  content. — Con-  is  here  implied  by  writing  Tent  under  Zee.    p.  112,  R.  7,  6. 

•  stationary.— See  Phonographic  Intelligencer,  p.  136,  "  The  Shon  and  Tiv 
Hooks." 

10  moral  perfection.— 175;  245.    See  p.  61,  ix.  of  this  Reader. 

Ji  which  were  so.— See  p.  62,  xiv.  of  this  work.  The  pri>iciple—l  mean 
much  more  than  exceptional  practices*  single  inntanc»—  of  expressing  areorwere 
by  an  Ar-liook,  is  a  novel  feature  of  Standard  Phonography ;  and  so  also,  conse- 
quently, tbe  method  of  distinguishing  between  which  are,  which  were;  etich  are, 
such  were,  etc.  The  phrase  which  were  so  would  have  been  written  by  the  Old 
Phonography  Chay8  Well2  Es2  ;  i.  e.,  would  have  required  one  character  and  two 
liftings  of  the  pen  more  than  the  Standard-Phonographic  expre^8ion. 

is  tl»nt  they  never  could  be.— 245.  The  advantage  of  a  good  word-sign 
or  contraction  is  not  simply  in  the  saving  of  strokes,  but  also  in  securing  greater 
powers  of  plirEst-vrriting.  To  illustrate— the  Standard-Phonographic  word-sign 
for  never  not  only  saves  in  this  instance  one  of  the  slowest  kind  of  strokes  (a  heavy 
curve),  but  also  secures  a  phrase-sign  here  which  otherwise  would  have  been  im- 
possible. 

"  more  than.— See  p.  63,  xvii.  of  this  Reader. 

"  to  solve.-  («)  As  the  first  stroke  of  solve  is  not  horizontal  nor  descending,  to 
can  not  be  implied  as  in  w  riling  to  himself and  to  (the)  attainment  (see  line  8,  p.  8) ; 
for,  if  [ss  were  written  on  the  line,  the  word  would  be  in  the  second  position  ;  and 
if  writ'en  below  the  line,  in  the  third  position.  (1>)  I  have  in  my  own  reporting 
tried  the  plan,  in  such  cases,  of  omitting  to—  not  implying  ir,  but  leaving  it  to  bo 
supplied  by  reference  to  the  context.  This  is  not  entirely  without  difficulty.  For 
this  reason,  and  considering  thai  it  is  better  in  some  cases  to  write  to  than  to  imply 
it  (as.  for  instance,  in  writing  io  ai!,  to  mi*-),  I  returned  to  the  plan  of  writing  to  in 
«uch  cases  also  as  to  8'  foe,  to  ••e'ir.  (c)  To  might  be  implied,  however,  in  such 
cases  by  writing  the  following  word  D«a*  tAe  proce4ituj ;  thus  Fn  Tee--Emt*:Blay 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  67 

exhortations  to  the  attainment"  of  unattainable  frames  of  mind.18  It 
could  not  condescend  to  the  humble  office  of  ministering  to  the  com- 
fort of  human  beings.17  All  the  schools  regarded18  that  office  as  de- 
grading, some  censured  it  as  immoral.  Once,  indeed,  Posidonius,  a 
distinguished  writer  of  the  age  of  Cicero18  and  Cassar,  so  far  forgot  him- 
self as  to  enumerate  among  the  humbler20  blessings  which  mankind 
owed  to  philosophy,  the  discovery  of  the  principle  of  the  arch,  and  the 
introduction  of  the  use  of  metals.  This  eulogy41  was  considered  as  an 
afl'ront,33  and  was  taken  up  with  proper  spirit.  Seneca  vehemently 


Vee,  in  attempt?  to  solve.  But  I  do  not  know  or  think  that  this  plan  would  be 
without  difficulty,  (d)  It  is  well,  however,  when  some  phrase  beginning  with  to  is 
occurring  frequently,  even  if  to  would  usually  be  expressed  in  writing  such  phrase, 
to  save  the  stroke  either  by  absolutely  omitting  to,  or  by  implying  it  by  writing  the 
following  word  near  the  preceding. 

i*  to  the  attainment. — A  distinction  should  be  made  between  supplying 
and  implying.  In  this  phrase,  only  To  is  implied ;  but  whether  a-n  or  the  follows 
the  to  or  not  is  a  matter  to  be  determined  by  reference  to  the  context.  T!ie,  in 
this  phrase,  therefore,  is  to  be  supplied.  250,  3. 

»•  frames  of  mind.— See  p.  61,  vi.  of  this  Eeader 

"  to  the  comfort  of  human  brings. — The  advamage  of  using,  as  in  the 
Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonography,  the  principle  of  proximity  to  imply  of 
only,  and  leaving  a  following  a-n  or  the  to  be  supplied — instead  of  implying,  as  in 
the  Old  Phonography,  of  the — is  the  saving,  in  a  vast  number  of  cases,  not  only  the 
writing  of  Of  iPetoid1),  and  also  a-n,  but  the  avoiding  either  frequent  liftings  of 
the  pen  or  difficult  junctions. 

is  regarded.— See  p.  61,  vii.  of  this  Reader. 

is  Cicero. — The  plan  of  writing  a  large  initial  ciiUe  was  first  presented  in  the 
Hand-Book.  It  makes  an  average  saving  of  14  per  cent,  (see  Part  V.,  §  9)  over  the 
Old  Phonographic  way  of  writing  the  syllables  sya-,  sus-,  etc.,  in  such  words  as 
system,  sustain,  Sicily,  Cicero,  Catsar ;  besides  adding  to  the  power  of  phrase- 
writing,  and,  in  many  cases,  securing  greater  analogy  or  convenience  of  form.  For 
example,  consistent,  Se~-Tent' ;  inconsistent,  or  in  consistent,  Enses-Tent1  (Old 
Phonography,  En':Iss-Est-Knt);  sustain,  Ses-Ten2;  in  sustaining,  Enses-Teu2: 
'ing';— suspect  {reporting  style),  Ses-Pee2  (Old  Phonography,  Es-Spee-Kct) ;  un- 
tuxpecting,  Enses-Pee2:'  ing.' 

20  humbler.— 175.     See  p.  61,  ix.  of  this  Eeader.     See,  also,  p.  186  of  the 
Phonographic  Intelligencer. 

21  eulogy — The  plan  of  joining  Brief  "Way  and  Tay  as  simply  10  and  y  is  a 
novel  and  valuable  feature  of  Standard  Phonography,  securing  legibility  in  many 
cases  where,  to  secure  it  in  the  Old  Phonography,  the  w  or  y  had  to  be  written  in 
the  vowel-place,  necessitating  a  lifting  of  the  pen  which  Standard  Phonography 
avoids.    It  is  also  valuable  because  of  facilitating  phrase-writing. 

2"  a»  an  affront — .The  expression  of  a-n  by  a  horizontal  or  a  perpendicular 
tick  was  originated  by  the  author.  Its  value  is  well  illustrated  in  this  littlt"  phrase, 
In  which  two  liftings  of  the  pen,  that  would  have  been  required  by  the  Old  Pho- 


68  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    HEADER. 

disclaims  these  insulting  compliments.  Philosophy,  according  to  him,** 
has  nothing  to  do  with  teaching  men  to  rear  arched  roofs  over  their 
heads.  "  The  true  philosopher  does  not  care  whether  he  has  an  arched 
roof,  or  any  roof.  Philosophy  has  nothing  to  do  with  teaching  men 
the  uses  of  metals.54  She  teaches  lib26  to  be  independent  of  all  material 
substances,"*  of  all  mechanical  contrivances."  He  labors  to  clear27 
Democritus  from  the  disgraceful  imputation  of  having  made  the  lirot 
arch,  and  Anacharsis  from  the  charge  of  having28  contrived  the  pott-r'.;- 
wheel.  The  business  of  these  philosophers  was  to  declaim  in  praise 
of  poverty,  with  two  millions  sterling  out  at  usury;28  to  racdit  it 
epigrammatic80  conceits  about  the  evils  of  luxury,  in  gardens  which 

nography,  are  saved.  71.  And  is  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography  in  the  same 
way.  69,  B.  2.  Please  see  also  Note  7,  above. 

23  according  to  him.— In  the  Old  Phonography,  Kred1  was  given  tor 
according  or  according  to,  anil  Nerd1  for  in  order  or  in  order  to.  This  is  an  ab- 
solute proof  that  the  plan  of  implying  to,  even  by  joining  the  following  to  the  pre- 
ceding word,  was  not  &  principle  of  the  Old  Phonography.  In  Standard  Phonog- 
raphy there  is  no  lame  and  exceptional  method  »t  meeting  an  acknowledged 
necessity  (namely,  of  getting  rid,  so  far  as  possible,  of  writing  the  frequent  to);  but 
the  Gordian  knot  is  cut  by  implying  to  in  accordance  with  a  principle.  See  p.  61,  v. 
of  this  Reader.  Notice  the  application  of  this  principle  in  the  very  next  phrase, 
"has  nothing  to  do,"  which  would  very  probaVy  have  been  written  by  any  one  of 
the  publishers  of  ihe  Old  Phonography,  Iss2  En-Iih--Ing  Petoid--l)ce.  f.  t.,  with  two 
strokes  and  two  liftings  of  the  pen  more  than  is  required  by  Standard  Phonography. 

"  men  the  uses  of  metals.—  The,  when  not  connected  closely  with  the 
preceding  word,  is  usually,  in  the  author's  practice,  expressed  by  the  dot ;  though 
it  is  allowable  to  join  it  to  the  following  wo.  d  by  a  tick  adapted  to  the  position  of 
that  word.  For  instance,  "the  uses"  here  might  have  been  written  Chetoid- 
EgS-lM. 

a5  The  principle  of  joining  u»  by  a  circle  or  by  enlarging  a  circle  is  a  novel  and 
valuable  feature  of  Standard  Phonography,  p.  1S2,  E.  2.  It  very  frequently  is 
nearly  equivalent  to  caving  entirely  the  expression  of  «»',  and  often  amounts  to 
more,  by  saving  the  lifting  of  the  pen. 

s«  of  all  material  substances. — The  advantage  of  the  novel,  Standard- 
Phonographic  principle  of  adding  till  by  an  El-hook  to  the  vowel-dashes  among 
other  signs,  is  partially  illustrated  in  this  case.  Without  it,  there  would  be  required 
after  making  q^(Petoid')  the  lifting  of  the  pen  and  the  making  of  the  heavy  da.--h, 
Bedoid1.  The  same  gain  is  repeated  in  the  very  next  phrase.  See  Standard-Pho- 
nographic Dictionary,  under  OF  ;  and  p.  62,  xiv.  in  this  Reader. 

"  lie  labors  to  clear — To  is  here  meant  to  be  implied  by  writing  Kler  in 
the  fourth  position.  26:>,  b.  It  is  placed  by  mistake  a  little  too  near  lalort. 

"8  of  having. — It  is  better  in  this  case  to  add  hating  by  the  hook  and  dot 
than  to  imply  of  and  write  Vee  and  the  dot 

*»  out  at  usury. — See  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Beader. 

»•  epigrammatic  conceit  = — Oi-nerally,  in  the  Beporting  Style,  the  K»jr  of 
the  termination  -Mel-Kay  may  be  omitted. 


KEY   TO   THE   KEPOKTING   EXEECI8ES.  69 

moved  the  errvy  of  sovereigns ;  to  rant  about  liberty,  -while  fawning 
on  the  insolent  and  pampered  freedman  of  a  tyrant  ;31  to  celebrate  the 
divine  beauty  of  virtue  with  the  same  pen  which  had  just  before  writ- 
ten a  defense  of  the  murder  of  a  mother  by  a  son.  From  the  cant  of 
this  philosophy,  a  philosophy  meanly  proud  of  its  own  unprofitable- 
ness, it  is  delightful  to  turn  to  the  lessons  of  the  great  English  teacher. 
The  philosophy  which  he  taught  was  essentially  new.  Its  object  was 
the  good  of  mankind,  in  the  sense  in  which  the  mass  of  mankind 
always  have  understood,  and  always  will  understand,  the  word  good. 
The  aim  of  the  Platonic  philosophy  was  to  exalt  man  into  a  god.  The 
aim  of  the  Baconian  philosophy  was  to  provide  man  with  what  he 
requi  vs.33  while  he  continues  to  be  a  man.  The  aim  of  the  Platonic 
philosophy33  was  to  raise  us  far  above  vulgar  wants.  The  aim  of 
the  Baconian  philosophy33  was  to  supply  our  vulgar  wants.  The 
former  aim  was  noble ;  but  the  latter  was  attainable.  Ask  the  follower 
of  Bacon  what  the  new  philosophy,  as  it  was  called  in  the  time  of 
Charles  the  Second,34  has  effected  for  mankind,  and  his  answer  is 
ready.  It  has  lengthened  life  ;  it  has  mitigated**  pain  ;  it  has  extin- 
guished diseases  ;  it  has  increased  the  fertility  of  the  soil ;  it  has  given 
new  securities  to  the  mariner  ;  it  has  spanned  great  rivers  and  estuaries 
with  bridges,  of  form  unknown  to  our  fathers  ;3°  it  has  guided  the 

3i  frertlmaii  of  a  tyrant. — Of  a  would  have  been  omitted,  had  there  been 
room  after  the  word  freedman  for  the  word  tyrant.  In  the  author's  practice,  of  a 
is  omitted  in  such  cases  even,  as  it  will  be  in  some  cases  in  the  engraved  exercises. 

si  with  what  he  requires.— 262.    See,  also,  p.  61,  x.  of  this  Reader. 

33  "Platonic  Philosophy"  and  "Baconian  Philosophy." — This  «x- 
ercise  is  a  good  illustration  of  progressive  contractions.    The  first  time  a  rather 
slowly-written  phrase  or  word  occurs,  it  may  be  written  without  contraction ;  but 
if  it  s-hould  occur  Jigain,  and  (he  reporter  should  anticipate  its  recurrence,  he  may 
contract  it  to  some  extent.     If  it  should  occur  frequently,  he  may  contract  it  more 
and  more  until  the  utmost  brevity  luis  been  attained.     Such  are  i-pecial  contrac- 
tions.    If  I  were  reporting  a  lecture  in  which  I  anticipated  the  frequent  occurrence 
of  the  phrases,  "Platonic  philosophy"  and   "Baconian   philosophy,"  I   should 
probably  write  Pel-Fel,  or  even  Plef,  for  the  former,  and  Bee-Fel,  or  even  Bef,  for 
the  latter.    Be  sure  to  read,  in  this  connection,  Comp.,  §  237,  It.  2. 

34  Charles  the  Second.— When  several  Es-sounds  occur  together,  one  or 
more  may  be  omitted  to  secure  the  advantage  of  a  phrase  sign.    p.  194.  E.  8. 

35  mitigated — p.  16S,  E.  8;  p.  61,  vii.  of  ihis  Reader.    This  novel  principle 
of  Standard  Phonography  is  of  such  frequent  application  that  even  if  the  gain 
effected  by  it  in  each  instance  were  slight,  it  would  in  the  course  of  a  single  hour's 
reporting  save  a  great  many  strokes,  and  also  many  liftings  of  the  pen,  in  writing 
both  wurds  and  phrases. 

ss  to  our  fathers.— Pretoid2  for  to  our  is  quicker  than  Ar4.  It  is  also  better 
for  phrase-writing. 


70  SECOXD    STANDABD-PHONOGKAPIIIC   READEB. 

A  thunderbolt  innocuously  from  heaven  to  earth  ;  it  has  lighted  up 
^  the  night  with  the  splendor  of  the  day ;  it  has  extended  the 
range  of  the  human  vision ;  it  has  multiplied  the  power1  of  the  human 
muscles ;  it  has  accelerated  motion ;  it  has  annihilated  distance  ;  it 
has  facilitated  intercourse,  correspondence,  all  friendly  offices,  all  dis- 
patch of  business  ;  it  has  enabled  man  to  descend  to  the  depths  of  the 
sea  ;  to  soar  into  the  air  ;a  to  penetrate  securely  into  the  noxious  re- 
cesses* of  the  earth,  to  traverse  the  land  on  cars  which  whirl  along 
without  horses,  and  the  ocean  in  ships  which  sail  against  the  wind. 
These  are  but  a  part  of  ite*  fruits,  and  of  its  first  fruit.  For  it  is  a 
philosophy  which  nevei  rests,  which  is  never  perfect.  Its  law  is 
progress.  A  point,  which  was  yesterday  invisible,  is  its  goal  to-day, 
and  will  be  its  starting-post  to-morrow. — Edinburgh  R&new. 


LOGIC. 

IN  every  instance  in  which  we  reason*  in  the  strict  sense  of  the  word, 
f.  e.,  make*  use  of  arguments,  whether  for  the  sake  of  refuting  an  ad- 
versary, or  of  conveying  instruction,  or  of  satisfying  our  own  minds  on 

4'  power  — Poicer  being  a  rather  frequent  word,  it  is  well  to  write  it  Pee3- 
Kay  instead  of  Pee-Ar,  to  secure  the  greater  speed  of  the  straight  line  for  r, 
and  also  so  that  the  analogous  form,  Pee'-Ref,  may  be  used  for  the  derivatives 
PQIC e  ful-ly-ness.    To  write  power  with  Pee-Ar  and  powerful  with  Pee-Kef  would 
be  a  confusing  change  of  outline. 

2  Into  the  iilr — If  this  were  occurring  frequently,  I  should  write  it  En-Tees- 
(a)Ar. 

3  noxious  recesses. — In  the  Reporting  Style  of  Standard   Phonography, 
words  ending  in  the  sounds,  ti7tux-li-ne*,  are  usually  contracted,— the  contraction 
ending  with  Ish ;  and  if  the  word  should  be  long,  and  less  of  the  word  would  suffice 
to  characterize  it,  even  more  may  be  cut  off;  as  in  Vreo.l,perntctou»^f-nMt, 

<  but  n  pnrt  of  Its. — This  phrase  is  but  one  of  thousands  of  instances  in 
which  the  novel  characteristics  of  Standard  Phonography  combine  to  effect  a  great 
gain  over  the  Old  Phonography.  This  phrase  in  the  Old  Phonography  would 
have  been  written  Tetoid"  aa  (heavy  dot)  PeeVRet  Petoid'-Tees,  nine  strokes  and 
liftings  of  the  pen.  This  phrase  in  Standard  Phonography  requires  only  four 
ttrokes,  i.  «.,  it  is  twice  as  fast  as  the  Old  Phonographic  expression. 

«  we  reason.— p.  168,  R.  3,  b. 

•  make.— The  full  forms  for  make  and  take  arc  too  long  for  the  Reporting 
Style;  they  aro,  therefore,  provided  in  Slandard  Phonography  with  word-signs — 
Em3,  make;  Tec",  take  (Tee3,  took).  See  phrases  beginning  with  MAKI  »nj 
TAKE  in  the  Standal  i-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  71 

any  point,  whatever  may  be  the  subject  we  are  engaged  on,  a  certain 
process  takes  place9  in  the  mind,  which  is  one  and  the  same7  in  all 
cases,  provided  it  be  correctly  conducted. 

Of  course  it  can  not  be  supposed  that  every  one  is  even  conscious  of 
this  process  in  his  own  mind  ;  nmch  less,  is  competent  to  explain  the" 
principles  on  which  it  proceeds.  This  indeed  is,  and  can  not  but  be, 
the  case  with  every  other  process  respecting  which  any  system  has  been 
formed  ;  the  practice  not  only  may  exist  independently  of  the  theory, 
but  must  have  preceded  the*  theory.  There  must  have  been  Language 
before10  a  system  of  Grammar  could  be  devised  ;  and  musical  composi- 
tions, previous  to  the  science  of  Music.  This,  by  the  way,  will  serve 
to  expose  the  futility"  of  the  popular  objection  against  Logic,  that 
men  may  reason  very  well  who  know  nothing  of  it.  The  parallel  in- 
stances adduced  show  that  such  an  objection  might  be  applied  in  many 
other  cases,  where  its12  absurdity  would  be  obvious  ;  and  that  there  is 
no  ground  for  deciding  thence,  either  that  the  system  has  no  tendency 
to  improve  practice,  or  that  even  if  it  had  not,  it  might  not  still  be  a 
dignified  and  interesting  pursuit. 

One  of  the  chief  impediments  to  the  attainment  of  a  just  view  of  the 
nature  and  object  of  Logic,  is  the  not  fully  understanding,  or  not  suf- 
ficiently keeping  in  mind,  the  SAMENESS  of  the  reasoning  process  in  all 
cases.  If,  as  the  ordinary  mode  of  speaking  would  seem13  to  indicate, 


*  which  Is  one  and  the  same.—  Tlie  is  omitted  here  so  as  to  secure  a 
phrase-sign  for  a  frequent  phrase— one  and  the  same. 

s  to  explain  the. — The  plan  of  omitting  Kay  in  many  such  words  as  ex- 
plain, explore,  expend,  etc.,  is  a  novel  and  valuable  chanacteristic  of  Standard  Pho- 
nography. It  not  only  saves  a  stroke,  but  in  many  cases  avoids  a  difficult  junction 
within  the  word,  and  facilitates  joining  wilh  other  words. 

»  but  must  have  preceded  the. — See  249;  and  especially  25  \  3. 

'"before  a  system  of  Grammar.— See  remark  under  ABOVE  in  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.  This  phrase  illusirates  the  advantage  of  the 
reporter's  availing  himself  of  every  judicious  expedient  This  phrase  could  not 
have  been  written  without  the  use  of  three  riovelties  of  Standard  Phonography, 
namely,  the  tick  for  a,  the  word-sign  for  system  (depending  upon  the  new  principle 
of  employing  a  large  initial  circle),  and  the  principle  of  implying  of  by  joining. 

11  futility — Many  words  ending  in  -Ity  are  provided  in  Standard  Phonog- 
raphy with  contractions  by  adding  t  by  halving  El,  Lay,  or  an  El-hook  sign.  This, 
of  course,  saves  a  stroke  and  a  half,  and  in  most  cases  an  angle. 

11  where  Its — 221,  K.  4.    See,  also,  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Keader. 

13  would  seem.— (a)  This  phrase-sign  closely  resembles  In-Sem  ;  but  I  have 
never  found  any  confusion  arising  from  this.  (M  Just  as  in  the  common  orthog- 
raphy, when  we  know  that  a  loiter  has  several  different  powers,  we  readily  discover 
the  correct  power  to  assign  it  in  the  case  presented,  so  in  stenographic  matters  we 


72  SECOND   STAND  ARD-rHONOGBAPHIC   HEADER. 

mathematical  reasoning,  and  theological,  and  metaphysical,  and  politi- 
cal, etc.,  were  essentially  different  from  each  other,  i.  e.,  different  lands 
of  reasoning,  it  would  follow,  that  supposing  there  could  be  at  all  any 
such  scienie,  as  we  have  described  Logic,  there  must  be  so  many  differ- 
ent species  or  at  least  different  branches  of  Logic. 

5  And  such  is  perhaps  the  most  prevailing  notion.  Nor  is  this 
much  to  be  wondered  at ;  since  it  is  evident  to  all,1  that  some 
men  converse  and  write,  in  an  argumentative  way,  very  justly2  on  one 
subject,3  and  very  erroneously  on  another,  in  which  again  others  excel, 
who  fail  in  the  former.  This  error  may  l>3  at  once  illustrated  and  re- 
moved, by  considering  the4  parallel  instance  of  Arithmetic,*  in  which 
every  one  is  aware  that  the  process  of  a  calculation  is  not  affected*  by 
the  nature  of  the  objects  whose  numbers  are  before  us  ;  but  that  (e.g.) 
the  multiplication  of  a  number  is  the  very  same  operation,  whether  it 

nee3  apprehend  no  serious  difficulty  from  different  uses  of  the  same  thing,  or  from 
slight  differences  between  different  things,  so  Ion  ff  as  ice  are  aware  of  such  different 
use*  or  close  resemblances,  unless,  of  course,  the  luio  of  legibility  is  too  much 
neglected,  (c)  When  Ihe  same  thing  has  different  uses,  or  when  things  of  different 
uses  or  values  are  not  readily  distinguishable  of  themselves,  the  use*  of  values 
must  le  so  different  that  one  could  not  reasonably  lie  substituted  for  Vie  other  in 
uny  case,  (d)  This  principle  saves  the  phrase-sign  Wuh-Sem  ;  for,  the  use  or  value 
can  not,  in  any  case,  reasonably  (/.  <•.,  so  as  to  make  sense  i  be  substituted  for  the 
use  or  value  of  In-Sem.  Try  it,  (e)  This  also  saves  Prctoid,  Pletoid,  Peftoid, 
Pentoid,  Kletoid,  Kefloid,  etc.,  from  the  objection  that  they  too  c'osely  resemble 
Pret,  Plet,  Peft,  Pent,  Klet,  Keft,  etc.,  as  thoroughly  and  completely  as  it  saves 
Petoid,  Tetoid,  Ketoid,  Eetoid,  etc.,  from  the  precisely  similar  and.  no  less  valid 
objection— which,  however,  is  not  now  made,  though  it  was  formerly— thai  they  too 
much  resemble  Pet,  Tet,  Ket,  Eet,  etc. 

51  to  all.— This  is  the  quickest  expression  for  this  phrase.    See  To  in  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.    See  above,  p.  71,  N.  13,  e. 
i  justly.- 237,  E.  1,  b;  p.  168,  R.  8. 
>  on  one  snfcjcct — 250,  3,  On. 

*  l>y  considering  the. — The  plan  of  implying  -ing  preceding  a-n  or  thf,  by 
uniting  the  latter  in  the  place  of  the  '-z'np'-dot,  originated  with  the  author.    How 
admirably  it  works,  and  how  valuable  it  is,  will  be  seen  in  the  course  of  reading 
the  reporting  exercises  of  th's  Reader.    Isaac  Pitman  has  proposed  to  use  the  dis- 
joined tick  at  the  end  to  signify  the  rarely  occurring  -ings.    Tins  plan  supposes  the 
objection  that  -ing*  written  with  a  heavy  dot  can  not  be  distinguishe<l  from  ing 
written  with  a  light  dot.     If  this  objection  were  valid  in  this  case,  it  would  be 
equ-illy  valid  against  the  whole  Phonographic  plan  of  heavy  and  light  dot*  for  long 
and  short  vowels.    See  the  same  objection  to  the  heavy  dot  for  ac-com,  disposed  of 
in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary  under  ACCOKC. 

*  arithmetic.— See  above,  p.  3.  N.  3D. 

*  Is  not  affected — The  word-sign  for  is  not  is  here  adapted  to  the  position 
of  a/eeted  for  the  sake  of  greater  legibility.    246,  1. 


KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  73 

be  a  number  of  men,  of  miles,  or  of  pounds  ;  though  nevertheless  per- 
sons may  perhaps  be  found  who  are  accurate  in  calculations  relative  to 
natural  philosophy,  and  incorrect  in  those  of  political  economy,  from 
their  different  degrees  of  skill  in  the  subjects  of  these  two  sciences ; 
not  surely  because  there  are7  different  arts  of  arithmetic  applicable  to 
each  of  these  respectively. 

Others  again,  who  are8  aware  that  the  simple  system  of  Logic  may  lie 
applied  to  all  subjects  whatever,  are  yet  disposed  to  view  it  as  a  pecu- 
liar method  of  reasoning,  and  not,  as  it  is,  a  method  of  unfolding  and 
analyzing  our  reasoning :  whence  many  have  been  led*  (e.g..  the  antlior 
of  the  Philosophy  of  Rhetoric)  to  talk  of  comparing  Syllogistic"  rea&op- 
ing  with  Moral  reasoning ;  taking  it  for  granted  that  it  is  £€&>»ble  to 
reason  correctly  without  reasoning  logically ;  whicli  LJ,  in  fact,  as  great 
a  blunder  as  if  any  one  were  to  mistake  grammar  for  a  peculiar  language, 
and  to  suppose  it  possible  to  speak  correctly  without  speaking  gram- 
matically. They  have,  in  short,  considered  Lo<jic  as  an  art  of  reason- 
ing; whereas  (so  far  as  it  is  an  art)  if  is  <Ac"  art  of  reasoning;  the 
logician's  object  beini^,  not  to  I~y  rk>;vr>  principles  by  which  one  may 
reason,  but  by  which  all  must  rsr.o^n,  even  though  they  are  not  dis- 
tinctly aware  of  them  • '—  to  lay  down  rules,  not  which  may  be  followed 
with  advantage  out  «Li<"\i  «an  not  possibly  be  departed  from13  in  sound 
feasoning. —  F/  A>^  *  E'Rments  of  Logic. 


GEOLOGY. 

THE  Tf»yrtr  in  which  the  geologists  have  been  able  to  restore  the 
Mstov  «1  the  primeval  earth,  affords  one  of  the  most  brilliant  tri- 
"•>»»vi*>  of  the  human  intellect.  Chemistry,  botany,  mineralogy,  and 

»  because  there  are.— 272;  also  p,  6>,  *ii.  of  this  Reader. 

«  who  are.— ITS,  R.  5 ;  also  p,  62,  *v.  of  this  Reader.  See  these  notes,  p.  4, 
T.  13,  e. 

•  many  have  been  lcd.^249. 

i»  syllogistic. — Contractions  for  words  ending  in  istic-al-aHy  are  usually 
ormed  in  analogy  with  U»i»  contraction;  for  example,  Ker2-Kayst,  characteristic ; 
fhest2,  aiheistic-al. 

"  the — 69,  R.  1. 

"  aware  of  them.— See  p.  61,  vi.  of  this  Reader, 

is  departed  from.— 244,  R.  8  (2).  In  this  phrase,  the  peculiar  Standard- 
Phonographic  principle  of  writing  the  present  for  the  patt  time  whenever  a  stroke 
»r  more  can  be  saved  thereby,  not  only  saves  a  stroke  and  the  difficult  obtuse  angle 
formed  by  Per  and  Ted,  but  avoids  the  lifting  of  the  pen  which  would  otherwise 
have  been  required. 


74  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

physical  geography"  have  all"  aided  in  unfolding  this  enigma ;  but  it 
Is1*  perhaps  to  comparative  anatomy,  which  enables  us  to  identify  an 
animal  by  a  single  bone,  that  the  principal  merit  is  due.  A  laborer, 
in  blasting  a  limestone  rock  or  sinking  a  well,  throws  up  a  bone,  which 
has  been  buried  there17  for  millions  of  ages  :18  it  is  looked  upon  \\ith 
wonder  by  the  simple  rustic,  who  supposes  that  it  must  have  been. 
there1*  ever  since  the  flood ;  but,  to  the  eye  of  Cuvier,20  that  bone 
suggests  a  whole  animal,  with  all  the  conditions  necessary  for  its  ex- 
istence. The  mastodon,  the  megatherium,  the  paleotherium,  and 
pterodactyl  are  thus  restored  to  our  natural  history, 

6  and  live  again  in  our  literature.      Nor  is  this  all ;  for,  where; 
there  are  no  bones  to  speak,  the  strata  often  contain  the  impress 
of  their1  former  inhabitants.     In  a  thin  bed  of  clay,  occurring  be- 
tween two2  beds  of  sandstone,  this  evidence  is  often  preserved.     The 

i«  and  physical  geography. — The  word  physical  written  alone  would 
not  be  contracted;  and  this  contraction  of  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  falling  under  the 
rule  for  special  contractions.  See  these  notes,  p.  3.  N.  38.  Words  ending  in 
•offraphy-ic-ieal  are  usually  provided  with  contractions  ending  in  Ger,  in  analogy 
with  this  contraction.  See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  ADMONISH- 
ED-ITION  and  APPREHENSIVE. 

is  have  all.— 178,  R.  4;  and  p.  62,  xiv.  of  this  Reader.  See  phrases  begin- 
ning with  HAVE  ALL  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

is  but  It  Is.— This  is  distinguishable  from  Tees3  both  from  the  context  and 
from  the  fact  that  it  commences  slightly  above  the  line,  while  one  half  of  Tees3  is 
above  the  line.  This  useful  phrase-sign  was  first  presented  by  the  Hand-Book. 

i'  which  has  been  burled  there.— 264;  and  p.  62,  xii.  of  this  Reader. 

is  for  millions  of  ages.— The  Did  Phonography  was  defective  in  not  having 
provided  any  word.-signs  for  the  frequently  occurring  numerical  denominations— 
hundred-th,  thousand-th,  million-th. 

i»  that  It  must,  hnve  been  there.— Thii  phrase  can  be  rendered  per- 
fectly distinct  from  must  lie  there,  by  writing  -Ems-Ben-Jedoid  ;  but  as  the  context 
furnishes  sufficient  distinction,  I  prefer  this  mode  because  more  rapid. 

20  but  to  the  eye  of  Cuvier.— Cuvier  is  pronounced  kii'vifi;  ii  being 
sound  No.  29,  and  i,  sound  No.  2,  of  the  Extended  Alphabet,  p.  210,  §  25,  No.  29; 
p.  2  6,  §  24,  No.  29;  p.  201,  §  2,  2 ;  p.  2  2,  §  7.— (I)  This  expression  of  these  six 
words  gains  three  strokes  and  one  lifting  of  the  pen  over  the  Old-Phonographic 
expression. 

p  i  of  their. — Veedher1  for  of  tUr,  and  Vet1  for  of  it,  are  new  and  useful 

"  word-signs  introduced  by  the  Hand-Book. 

2  two. — As  numbers  are  usually  written  by  figures,  as  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  I  find  !t 
generally  most  convenient  to  write  two  in  the  same  way ;  and  besides,  Bedoid3  is 
not  so  distinct  as  2;  though,  of  course,  in  phrases,  such  as  one  or  ttco,  "Wen2-Bed- 
oid ;  two  or  threi,  Bedoida-Ther ;  year  or  two,  YeM-Bedoid  ;  the  word-s.gn  must 
be  ised. 


KEY    TO   THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  »O 

ripple-mark,  the  worm-track,  the  scratching  of  a  small  crab  on  the 
sand,  and  even  the  impression  of  a  raindrop,  so  distinct  as  to  indicate 
the  direction  of  the  wind  at  the  time  of  the  shower — tliuse,  and  the 
footprints  of  the  bird  and  reptile,  are  all  stereotyped,  and  offor  an  evi- 
dence which  no  argument  can  gainsay,  no  prejudice  resist,  concerning 
the  natural  history  of  a  very  ancient  period  of  the  earth's  life.  But 
the  wave  that  made  that  ripple-mark  has  long  ceased  to  wash  tb<^c 
chores.  For  ages  has  the  surface  then  exposed  been  concealed  under 
groat  thicknesses  of  strata.  The  worm  and  the  crab  have  left  no  solid 
fragment  to  speak  of  their  form  or  structure  ;3  the  bird  has  left  no 
bone  that  has  yet  been  discovered  ;3  the  fragments  of  the  reptile  are 
email,  imperfect,  and  extremely  rare.  Still,  enough  is  known  to  de- 
termine the  fact ;  and  that  fact  is  all  the  more  interesting  and  valuable 
from  the  very  circumstance  under  which  it  is  presented. — Prof.  Aiisted. 


EVIDENCE  OF  THE  CIRCULATION  OF  THE  BLOOD. 

1.  WITH  the  microscope,  in  the  transparent  parts  of  animals,  the 
blood  can  be  seen  in  motion ;  and  if  its  course  be  attentively*  observed, 
its  route  may  be  clearly  traced. 

2.  The  membranes,  termed  valves,  are  so  placed  as  to  allow  of  the 
freest  passage  to  the  blood  in  the  circle  described ;  while  they  either 
altogether  prevent,  or  exceedingly  impede,  its  movements  in  any  other 
direction. 

3.  The  effect  of  a  ligature  placed  around  a  vein  and  an  artery,  and  of 
a  puncture  made  above  the  ligature  ia  the  one  vessel  and  below  it6  in 
the  other,  demonstrates  both  the  motion  of  the  blood  and  the  oourse 
of  it.     When  a  ligature  is  placed  round  a  vein,  that  part  of  the  vessel 
which  is  most  distant  from  the  heart  becomes  full  and  turgid,  on  ac- 
count of  the  accumulation  of  blood  in  it ;  while  the  part  of  the  vessel 
which  is  between  the  ligature  and  the  heart  becomes  empty  and  flaccid, 

3  "structure"  ami  •'  discovered."— The  engraving,  by  presenting  a 
larger  space  than  usual  after  these  words,  affords  a  good  illustration  of  the  manner 
of  writing  by  a  good  reporter  to  indicate  punctuation.  By  leaving  little  spaces,  in 
this  way,  corresponding  to  the  pauses  of  the  voice,  the  legibility  of  the  writing  will 
be  greatly  increased  ;  for  frequently  the  greatest  difficulty  in  reading  notes  ariaei 
from  misapprehending  tlie  punctuation. 

«  attentively.—  237,  R.  1,  &. 

•  below  it.— 221,  E.  4;  and  n.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Eeader. 


76  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGKAPHIC    READER. 

because  it  has  carried*  on  its  contents  to  the  heart  and  it  can  receive  i 
no  fresh  supply  from  the  body.     When,  on  the  contrary,  a  ligature  is 
placed  round  an  artery,  that  portion  of  the  vessel  which  lies  l><  twcen 
the  ligature  an  1  the  heart  becomes  full  and  turgid,  and  the  other  por- 
tion empty  and  llaccid.     This  can  only  be7  because  the  contents  of  the 
two  vessels  move  in  opposite  directions— from  the  heart  to  the  artery. 
from  the  artery  to  the  vein,  and  from  the  vein  to  the  heart.     At  th 
same  time,  if  the  vein  be  punctured  above  the  ligature,  there  will  be 
little  or  no  loss  of  blood  ;  while  if  it  be  punctured  below  the  ligature 
the  blood  will  continue  to  flow  until  the  loss  of  it  occasions  deuth 
which  could  not  be  unless  the  blood  were  in  motion,  nor  unless  th 
direction  of  its  course  were  from  the  artery  to  the  vein,  and  from  the 
vein  to  the  heart. 
4.  If  fluids  be  injected  into  the  veins  or  arteries,  whether  of  the  dead 

7  or  the  living  body,  they  readily  make  their  way  and  fill  th 
sels,  if  thrown  in  the  direction  stated  to  be  the  natural  • 
of  the  circulation  ;  but  they  are  strongly  resisted  if  forced  in  the  oppo- 
site direction. 

Such  is  the  description,  and,  with  the  exception  of  the  first  proof, 
such  the  evidence  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  human  body, 
pretty  much  as  it  was  given  by  the  discoverer1  of  it,  the  illustrious 
Harvey.  Before  the  time  of  Harvey,  a  vague  and  indistinct  concept kn 
that  the  blood  was  not  without  motion  in  the  body  had  been  forined- 
by  several  anatomists.  It  is  analogous  to  the  ordinary  mode  in  which 
the  human  mind  arrives  at  discovery,  that  many  minds  should  have  an 
imperfect  perception  of  an  unknown  truth  before  some  one  mind  sees 
it  in  its  completeness,  and  fully  discloses  it.  Having  about  the  year 
1620'  succeeded  in  completely  tracing  the  circle  in  which  the  blood 

•  because  It  has  carried. — 171,8. 

*  this  can  only  be.— p.  169,  E.  12. 

«  there  will  be.— 175 ;  178,  E.  4,  b  ;  p.  62,  xir.  of  this  Reader. 

H  »  discoverer.— p.  194,  E.  7. 

a  ha«l  been  formed — p.  169,  E.  12. 

»  1620.— Throughout  these  exercises  I  have  given  the  common  figures  for 
dates,  instead  of  Phonographic  numerals;  because  if  any  one  were  not  <r- 
to  make  use  of  the  Phonographic  numerals,  he  need  not  b<-  troubled  to  read 
them;  but  any  one  who  has  studied  them  may  substitute  lliern  for  tin-  flgnr.--:  ;i* 
for  instance,  Kays-Lay-Tee,  for  1620.  I  have  sometimes,  in  order  the  bi-tf.T  to  dis- 
tinguish the  Phonographic  numerals,  written  a  long  Kay  above  the  1'ne,  and  writ- 
ten  the  remainder  of  the  date  below;  thus,  Kay':Slay-Tee=lG2!).  This  correspond! 
to  tlie  longhand  pracdce,  which  is  sometimes  followed  in  these  exerc  set,  of  placing 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING-   EXERCISES.  77 

moves,  and  having  at  that  time  collected  all  the  evidence  of  the  fat;t, 
with  a  rare  degree  of  philosophical  forbearance,  Harvey  still  spent  no 
less  than  eight  years  in  re-examining  the  subject  and  in  maturing  the 
proof  of  every  point,  before  he  ventured  to  speak  of  it4  in  public.  The 
brief  tract  which  at  length  he  published  was  written  with  extreme  sim- 
plicity, clearness,  and  perspicuity,  and  has  been  justly  characterized  as 
one  of  the  most  admirable  examples  of  a  series  of  arguments  deduced 
from  observation  and  experiment  that  ever  appeared  on  any  subject. 

Contemporaries  are  seldom  grateful  to  discoverers.  More  than  one 
instance6  is  on  record,  in  which  a  man  has  injured  his  fortune  and  lost 
his  happiness  through  the  elucidation  and  establishment  of  a  truth 
which  has  given  him  immortality.  It  may  be  that  there  are  physical 
truths  yet  to  be  brought  to  light,  to  say  nothing  of  new  applications 
of  old  truths,  which,  if  they  could  be  announced  and  demonstrated  to- 
day, would  be  the  ruin  of  the  discoverer.  It  is  certain  that  there  are 
moral  truths  to  be  discovered,  expounded,  and  enforced,  which,  if  any 
man  had  now  penetration  enough  to  see  them,  and  courage  enough  to 
express  them,  would  cause  him  to  be*  regarded  by  the  present  genera- 
tion with  horror  and  detestation.  Perhaps  during  those  eight  years  of 
re-examination,  the  discoverer  of  the  circulation  sometimes  endeavored 
hi  imagination  to  trace  the  effect  which  the  stupendous  fact  at  the 
knowledge  of  which  he  had  arrived  would  have  on  the  progress  of  his 
favorite  science ;  and,  it  may  be,  the  hope  and  the  expectation  occa- 
sionally arose,  that  the  inestimable  benefit  he  was  about  to  confer  on 
his  fellow-men  would  secure  to  him  some  portion  of  their  esteem  and 
confidence.  What  must  have  been  his  disappointment  when  he  found, 
after  the  publication  of  his  tract,  that  the  little  practice  he  had  had  as 
a  physician  by  degrees  fell  off !  He  was  too  speculative,  too  theoretical, 
not  practical.  Such  was  Hie  view  taken  even  by  his  friends.  His  ene- 

a  long  stroke  (which  may  be  regarded  as  a  long  1)  liefore  the  concluding  figures  of 
a  date. 

*  before  lie  ventured  to  speak  of  it — It  is  sometimes  well  to  vocalize  a 
•word-sign  in  phrase-signs  when  there  is  seen  a  possibility  of  its  being  read  for  some 
o  her  w»rd.    In  this  case,  however,  there  is  no  such  necessiiy  for  the  vocalization 
of  Spee;  for  the  context  will  not  allow  it  to  be  read  for  anything  but  xpe-'k ;  and 
it  is  a  principle  of  ^Standard  Phonography  to  have  the  word-signs  and  contractions 
BO  constructed  that  they  may  be  introduced  in  phrases  witho'U  their  legibility  being 
seriously  impaired  thereby. 

5  more  tlian  one  Instance. — 250,  3. 

•  \v»iil<l  cntise  him  to  be  regarded. — In  this  case  le  is  added  to  J,im  bf 
widening  the  Em,  and  to  is  omitted.     To  lie  may  frequently  be  added  to  Em  in  this 
way;  lor  instance.  KelVEmb,  cluim-ed  to  be;  Tee2-Semb,  it  seemed  to  be;  Toe*- 
Beinben,  it  seemed  to  have  been. 


78  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READEE. 

mies  saw  in  his  tract  nothing  but  indications  of  a  presumptuous  mind, 
that  dared  to  call  in  question  the  revered  authority  of  the  ancients ; 
and  some  of  them  saw,  moreover,  indications  of  a  malignant  mind, 
that  conceived  and  defended  doctrines  which,  if  not  checked,  would 
undermine  the  very  foundations  of  morality  and  religion.  When  the 
evidence  of  the  truth  became  irresistible,  then  these  persons  suddenly 
turned  round  and  said  that  it  was  all  known  before,  and  that  the  sole 
merit  of  this  vaunted  discoverer  consisted  in  having  circulated  the 
circulation.  The  pun  was  not  fatal  to  the  future  fame  of  this  truly 
great  man,  nor  even  to  the  gradual  though  slow  return  of  the  public 
confidence,  even  during  his  own  time,  for  he  lived  to  attain  the  sum- 
mit of  reputation. — Philosophy  of  Health. 


RELIGION  AND  SCIENCE. 

8  Nor  less  disparaging  to  God's  wisdom,  though  less  destructive 
to  his  goodness,  was  the  geologic  theory,  invented  and  put  forth1 
in  1839- — only  fifteen  years  ago — by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Pye  Smith,  in  order 
to  reconcile  the  then  common  interpretation  of  the  first  chapter  of 
Genesis  with  the  demonstrations  of  geological  science.  Dr.  Smith  con- 
ceded so  much  to  the  science  as  to  admit  that  our  globe  had  existed 
for  countless  ages,  and  had  been  inhabited  by  various  races  of  animals 
before  Adam  was  created ;  but,  for  the  sake  of  vindicating  a  literal 
interpretation  of  the  Mosaic  account  of  the  creation — according  to 
which  sun,  moon,  stars,  plants,  animals,  and  man  himself  were  created 
not  quite  six  thousand  years  ago,  and  all  within  the  compass  of  six 
diurnal  days,  of  twenty-four  hours  each— he  maintained  that  some- 


8 


J  and  put  fortl».-p.  1fi9,  K.  16. 

1839. — It  is  always  sufficient  to  write  the  last  two  figures  of  a  date  of  the 
present  century,  and  simply  the  last  figure  of  the  present  decade.  These  figures 
may  be  preceded  by  an  apostrophe:  thus,  '8J  (1839),  '0  (1S60):  or  by  a  l..ng  stroke 
like  Cliay-Chay  close  to  them.  If  a  particular  date  or  a  few  dates  are  frequently 
occurring,  sufficiently  distinguished  to  the  memory  of  the  reporter  by  the  last 
figure,  of  course  that  figure  would  be  all  that  need  be  written  after  the  apostrophe 
or  the  Ions  stroke.  (In  such  a  case,  though  the  Phonographic  numtmls  would  be 
more  rapid,  it  is  sometimes  better  to  employ  the  common  figures,  because  they 
more  readily  catch  the  eye  and  are  of  advantage  in  finding  a  certain  part  of  your 
no'cs.)  But  this  pl«n  must  not  be  employed  (/'  the  reporter  employs  the  plan  of 
leritiny  only  the  limf  Jigu  e  of  n  date  of  the  pre-ifiit  decude,  UNLESS  those  dates 
belong  to  the  present  decade,  or  if  not.  are  so  frw  and  so  well  known  to  the  re- 
porter that  no  confusion  can  possibly  arise  from  writing  only  the  last  figure. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  79 

where,  perhaps  in  some  central  province  of  Asia — no  one  knows  its 
latitude  or  longitude,  and  no  geography  or  geology  has  discovered  any 
trace  of  it — there  was  a  spot,  some  "ten  miles  square,"  like  the  Dis- 
trict of  Columbia,  where,  while  all  outside  of  it,  in  the  other  parts  i.t' 
the  globe,  "  was  life  and  light,  there  reigned  for  a  time  only  death  an  1 
darkness  amid  the  welterings  of  a  chuotiu  sea;  and  which,  at  the 
Divine  command,  was  penetrated  by  light,  and  occupied  by  dry  land, 
and  ultimately,  ere  the  end  of  the  creative  week,  became  a  center  in 
which  certain  plants  and  animals,  and  finally  man  himself,  were  cre- 
ated." Now  what  a  disgraceful  instance  is  this  of  the  tenacity  with 
which  theological  pre-conceptions  are  held,  in  defiance  of  philosophical 
truth !  To  suppose  that  while  all  the  geological  eras,  one  after  an- 
other, were  passing  through  their  immense  cycles,  and  while  all  the 
rest  of  the  earth  was  advancing  to  a  state  of .  preparation  for  the  resi- 
dence of  man,  a  little  "preserve  of  chaos,"  somewhere,  should  be 
carefully  fenced  in,  and  choicely  kept,  until  six  thousand  years  ago, 
when  the  work  was  there  done  in  six  days  which  it  had  elsewhere  oc- 
cupied countless  ages  to  perfect ;  and  that  Moses  knew  all  about  this 
six  days'  work,  but  did  not  know  about  the  other ;  or,  if  he  did  know 
about  it,  kept  his  knowledge  to  himself !  How  efficacious  would  be 
the  union  and  co-operation  of  true  religion  and  true  science  in  pre- 
venting such  records  of  shame  from  being  inscribed  on  the  pages  of 
history ! 

Everybody  knows  the  effect  of  continued  intermarriages  among  per- 
sons related  by  consanguinity.  The  cognate  blood,  unenriched  and 
unstimulated  from  other  fountains,  soon  breeds  weakness,  disease,  and 
imbecility.  Just  so  it  is  with  a  sect  that  shuts  out  truth  because  it  was 
not  embraced  in  the  scheme  of  its  founders.  The  ideas  of  such  a  sect 
have  no  alternative  for  their  continued  existence  but  to  breed  in  and  in, 
and  this,  by  a  psychological  law  as  immutable  as  the  physiological, 
soon  begets  a  progeny  of  faith  erroneous,  absurd,  imbecile,  and 
idiotic. 

But  how  can  we  woo  Religion  to  wed  Science  ?  How  can  we  recon- 
cile Science,  so  long  estranged,  and  now,  I  fear,  more  estranged  than 
ever,  to  espouse  Religion,  and  thus  accept  the  only  bridegroom  that  ia 
worthy  of  her  queenly  beauty  and  her  magnificent  dowry  ? 

I  answer,  Science  is  not  sectarian.  It  does  not  confine  itself  to  any 
segment  of  the  circle  of  philosophic  truth,  but  seeks  to  embrace  the 
entire  circumference.  At  the  present  day  a  bigot  in  science  can  not  live. 


9 


Its  pure  empyrean  air  either  exorcises  the  demon  of  bigotry  out 
of  him,  or  sends  him  and  it  after  the  swine  of  the  Gadarenes,  to 


80  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

be  choked  in  the  sea  of  oblivion.  Let  any  man  at  this  time,  in  ;my 
scientific  body  or  association  in  Christendom,  defend  any  dogma  on  the 
authority  of  his  government,  or  by  any  decree  of  old  council,  or  assembly, 
or  sanhedrim,  against  the  facts  of  observation  and  the  results  of  experi- 
ment, and  he  is  considered  as  blaspheming  against  the  "  higher  law," 
and  his  words  accounted  as  "  vain  babbling."  He  can  not  be  heard  to 
set  up  theory  against  fact,  authority  against  experience,  or  the  tradi- 
tion of  a  thousand  years  against  the  demonstration  of  yesterday.  The 
only  religion,  therefore,  with  which  science  will  freely  and  rejoicingly1 
consent  to  live  and  to  work,  is  an  unsectarian  religion.  Any  other 
union  is  forced  and  unnatural,  involving  discord,  dishonest  compli- 
ances, and  a  suspension  c  f  progress  in  the  pursuit  of  truth.  In  fine, 
any  other  union  is  not  wedlock,  but  concubinage  only.  Science  has 
no  creed  or  articles  of  faith  which  a  man  must  subscribe  before  he  can 
be  allowed  to  enroll  his  name  as  her  follower,  and  to  offer  his  accept- 
able contributions  at  her  shrine.  Science  welcomes  all  new  truth,  all 
honest  lovers  of  truth,  and  all  honest  inquirers  after  truth  from  what- 
ever quarter  they  may  come  ;  and  the  recommendation  of  her  votaries 
is,  not  that  they  have  attached  themselves  to  the  school  of  Werner  or 
Hutton,  of  Newton  or  Laplace,  but  that  they  have  not.  The  great  book 
of  Nature  is  her  Bible.  Devoutedly  she  believes  that,  "'tis  elder 
Scripture,  writ  by  God's  own  hand,"  and  she  suffers  no  one  to  shut  it 
np  in  order  that  he  may  open  in  its  stead  some  philosophy  of  the  Dark 
Ages,  or  substitute  for  it  some  cosmogony  of  the  heathen.  And  there- 
fore science  demands  of  religion  that  she,  too,  shall  love  truth 
supremely ;  not  Talmuds,  nor  acts  of  Parliament,  nor  decrees  of  Councils 
or  Synods,  and  that  she  shall  subject  the  old  interpretation  to  every 
new  test  which  the  continual  evolution  or  unrolling  of  God's  provi- 
dence shall  supply. 

Science  is  the  interpreter  of  Nature.  It  reverently  inquires ;  it  list- 
ens to  know  ;  it  seeks  ;  it  knocks  to  obtain  communication ;  and  then 
all  that  it  does  is  reverently  to  record  nature's  processes,  and  accept 
them  as  true.  And  it  demands  that  religion  shall  proceed  on  similar 
exegetical  principles. — lion.  Horace  Mann. 


OUR  FRIENDS  IN  HEAVEN. 

SUMMER  is  coming  to  us  once  more,  with  its  flowers,  and  its  grass, 
and  its  waving  trees  ;  and  naturally'  in  our  gladness  our  hearts  turn  to 

Q  i  rejoicingly.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  Dn*,  4. 
»  and  naturally.-  261,  E.  2. 


r 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  81 


our  friends,  scattered,  driven  hither  and  thither  over  life's  prairie. 
How  few  can  we3  draw  to  our  side  !  -  how  few  surround  us  in  our  walks, 
and  gather  in  our  home  circle  !  Yet  we  think  of  them  in  their  disper- 
s;r>ii,  ,in d  we  send  them  letter  or  token,  and  receive  from  them  from 
.-.. :..i-  pi.x-ang  and  token  in  reply.  But  we  have  friends  to  whom  we 
can  send4  no  word,  no  token.  We  are  certain  that  we  still  have  these 
friends.  We  call  them  ours ;  and  though  the  places  that  once  knew 
tly-ivi  nov.-  know  them  no  more;  though  their  name  is  effaced  from 
i..  :.  ii  ui  living 

•j  A  nrmes,  yet  we  call  them  still  our  own.  Amid  our  summer 
'  wreaths  and  joyous  garlands,  let  there  be1  one  to  Our  Friends  in 
Heaven.  Are  we  not  richer  for  their  being  there  ?  Are  we  not  made 
nearer  to  heaven  by  thinking  of  them  there  ?  They  have  known  us  so 
intimately  ;  they  have  known  our  history,  our  individualities,  our 
soul-wants,  our  aspirations,  our  trials.  We  have  wandered  with  them 
hand  in  hand  through  the  tangled  wood  of  life.  We  have  lost  our 
way  together.  We  have  hungered  and  thirsted  together,  and  looked 
out2  with  weary  and  perplexed  star-gazing,  now  trying  this  path  and 
now  that ;  and  we  have  rejoiced  together  when  our  way  has  been 
made  plain  before  us.  We  have  seen  them  wrestle  and  strive  with 
life,  as  we  still  must.  We  have  seen  their  heart  fail,  and  their  hand 
fall  slack,  as  ours,3  full  oft,  may  do.  We  have  seen  them  bear  the 
wrench  and  strain,  the  cruel  agony  which  life  forces  inexorably  on  all, 
in  one  or  other*  of  its  phases ;  and,  last  of  all,  we  have  seen  them  at 
the  river  of  death.  We  have  seen  the  heaven  opening,  and  the  angels 
descending,  and  they  have  been  borne  from  our  sight,  and  as  they  rose 
they  were  transfigured,  and  became  as  the  sons  of  God. 

s  en  ti  we.— p.  169,  E.  12. 

4  we  can  send — p.  16«,  E.  8;  p.  1C9,  E.  12;  p.  62,  xi.  of  this  Reader.    It  is 

yory  desirable  that  such  phrases  as  tee  (fire,  tee  can,  tee  could,  which  are  spoken 
a<  rap'dly  ;is  /  '.ire,  I  con,  Icnulrt,  should  he  as  conveniently  and  rapidly  written. 
To  atta:n  this,  I  introduced  the  meihod  of  joining  tee  as  a  hook  in  a  few  such  eases. 
See  remarks  as  to  different  uses  of  the  same  signs  and  of  those  nearly  alike,  in  Note 
13,  p.  71  of  this  Eeader. 

-j  A  >  let  there  be.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  Dun,  3,  a. 

2  and  loafeeel  out. — In  this  case  the  principle  of  writing  the  pr»sen  ''  ir 
the  past  time  is  availed  of.  Were  it  not  for  this,  there  would  hav.e  been  r<  quired  an 
additional  stroke  and  lifting  of  the  pen. 

'  as  ours.— 246,  4. 

*  In  one  or  otlier.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  Dim. 


82  SECOND    S  rANDABD-PHONOGKAPHIC   READER. 

It  is  strange  what  a  change  is  wrought  in  one  hour  by  death.  The 
moment  our  friend  is  gone  from  us  forever,  what  sacredness  invests 
him  !  Everything  he  ever  said  or  did  seems  to  return  to  us  clothed  in 
new  significance.  A  thousand  yearnings  rise  of  things  we  would  fain* 
say  to  him  — of  questions  unanswered,  and  now  unanswerable.  All  he 
wore,  or  touched,  or  looked  upon  familiarly,  become  sacred  as  relics. 
Yesterday  these  were  homely  articles,  to  be  tossed  to  and  fro,  handled 
lightly,  given  away  thoughtlessly ;  to-day  we  touch  them  softly,  our 
tears  drop  on  them  ;  death  has  laid  his  hand  on  them,  and  they  have 
become  holy  in  our  eyes.  Those  are  sad  hours  when  one  has  passed 
from  our  doors  never  to  return,  and  we  go  back  to  set  the  place  in 
order.  There  the  room  so  familiar,  the  homely  belongings  of  their 
daily  life— each  one  seems  to  say  to  us,  in  its  turn,  "Neither  shall 
their  place  know  them  any  more." 

Ah  !*  why  does  this  bring  a  secret  pang  with  it,  when  we  know  that 
they  are  where  none  shall  any  more  say,  "I  am  sick  !"  Could  only 
one  flutter  of  their  immortal  garments  be  visible  in  such  moments — 
could  their  face,  glorious  with  the  light  of  heaven,  once  smile  on  the 
deserted  room,  it  might  be  better.  One  needs  to  lose  friends  to  under- 
stand one's  self  truly.  The  death  of  a  friend  teaches  things  within 
that  we  never  knew  before.  We  may  have  expected  it,  prepared  for 
it,  it  may  have  been  hourly  expected  for  weeks ;  yet  when  it  comes,  it 
falls  on  us  suddenly,  and  reveals  in  us  emotions  we  could  not  dream. 
The  opening  of  those  heavenly  gates  for  them  startles  and  flutters  our 
souls  with  strange,  mysterious  thrills  unfelt  before.  The  glimpse  of 
glories,  the  sweep  of  voices,  all  startle  and  dazzle  us,  and  the  soul  for 
many  a  day  aches  and  longs  with  untold  longings. 

We  divide  among  ourselves  the  possessions  of  our  lost  ones.  Each 
well-known  thing  comes  to  us  with  an  almost  supernatural  power. 
The  book  we  once  read  with  them,  the  old  Bible,  the  familiar  hymn ; 
then,  perhaps,  little  pet  articles  of  fancy,  made  dear  to  them  by  some 
peculiar  taste,  the  picture  the  vase — 

Uhow  costly  are  they  now1  in  our  eyes !     We  value  them  not  for 
their  beauty  or  worth,  but  for  the  frequency  with  which  we 
have  seen  them  touched  or  used  by  them  ;  and  our  eye  runs  over  the 
collection,  and  perhaps  lights  most  lovingly  on  the  homeliest  thing 
which  may  have  been  oftenest  touched  or  worn  by  them . 

«  we  wonUl  fain.— 262;  and  p.  61,  I.  of  this  Reader. 

•  All  I- As  the  words  Ah  t  and  Oh  !  or  0  !  are  usually  spoken  quite  slowly,  I 
prefer  to  write  tbvm  in  longhand. 


KEY   1O   THE   KEPOKTLNG   EXERCISES.  83 

But  there  are  invisible  relics  of  our  lost  cues  more  precious  than  the 
book,  the  picture,  or  the  vase.  Let  us  treasure  them  in  our  hearts. 
Let  us  bind  to  our  hearts  the  patience  which  they  will  never  need 
again  ;  the  fortitude  in  suffering  which  belonged  only  to  this  suffering 
state.  Let  us  take  from  their  dying  hand  that  submission  under  afflic- 
tion which  they  shall  need  no  more  in  a  world  where  affliction  is  un- 
known. Let  us  collect  in  our  thoughts  all  those  cheerful  and  hopeful 
sayings  which  they  threw  out  from  time  to  time,1  as  they  walked  with 
us,  and  string  them  as  a  rosary  to  be  daily  counted  over.  Let  us  test 
our  own  daily  life  by  what  must  be  their  now  perfected  estimate ;  and 
as  they  once  walked  with  us  on  earth,  let  us  walk  with  them  in 
heaven. 

We  may  learn  at  the  grave  of  our  lost  ones  how  to  live  with  the 
living.  It  is  a  fearful  thing  to  live  so  carelessly  as  we  often  do  with 
those  dearest  to  us,  who  may  at  any  moment  be  gone  forever.  The 
life  we  are  living,  the  words  we  are  now  saying,  will  all  be  lived  over 
in  memory  over  some  future  grave.  If  we  would  know  how  to  meas- 
ure our  words  to  living  friends,  let  us  see  how  we  feel  towards  the 
dead.  Let  us  walk  softly  ;  let  us  forbear  and  love  ;  none  ever  repent- 
ed of  too  much2  love  to  a  departed  friend ;  none  ever  regretted  too 
much  tenderness  and  indulgence  ;  but  many  a  tear  has  been  shed  for 
too  much  hardness  and  severity.  Let  our  friends  in  heaven,  then, 
teach  us  how  to  treat  our  friends  on  earth  ;  thus,  by  no  vain  fruitless 
sorrow,  but  by  a  deeper  self-knowledge,3  a  tenderer  and  more  sacred 
estimate  of  life,  may  our  heavenly  friends  prove  to  us  ministering 
spirits. 

The  Apostle  Paul  says  to  the  Christian,  "  All  things*  are  yours — life 
and  death."  Let  us  not  lose  either  ;  let  us  make  Death  our  own,  in  a 
richer,  deeper,  and  more  solemn  earnestness  of  life.  So  those  souls 
which  have  gone  from  our  ark,  and  seemed  lost  over  the  gloomy  ocean 
of  the  unknown,  shall  return  to  us,  bearing  the  olive  leaves  of  Para- 
dise I— Mrs.  H.  B.  Stowe. 

-j  -j   i  from  time  to  time.— 250,  8,  From — to. 

a  too  much. — Some  writers  prefer  in  such  phrases  as  too  mucfi,  very 
muc7i,  so  much,  to  vrrite  much  in  full.  My  own  preference  is  to  use  the  word-sign 
(Chay3),  because  writing  a  word  in  full  part  of  the  time,  and  part  of  tbe  time  by  a 
word-sign,  tends  to  cause  hesitation. 

»  self-know ledge — p.  113,  E.  14. 

«  nil  things — In  the  Old  Phonography,  the  advantage  of  many  phrase-signs 
was  lost  from  prohibiting  many  junctions  which  the  practiced  writer  will  find  suffl- 
elei  tiy  easy,  especially  by  proper  variations  of  the  inclination  of  sloping  strokes 
mid  of  the  curvature  of  curved  ones.  See  Comp.,  §  25. 


SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   BEADEB. 


CREATION. 

CREATION,  in  its  primary  import,  signifies  the  bringing  into  being 
something  which  did  not  before  exist.  The  term  is  therefore*  most 
generally  applied  to  the  original*  production  of  the  materials  whereof 
the  visible  world  is  composed.  It  is  also  used  in  a  secondary  or  subor- 
dinate sense,  to  denote  those  subsequent  operations  of  the  Deity  upon 
the  matter  so  produced,  by  which  the  whole  system  of  Nature,  and  all 
the  primitive  genera  of  things,  receive  their  form,  qualities,  and  laws. 

There  is  no  subject  concerning  which  learned  men  have  differed  in 
their  conjectures  more  than  in  this  of  creation.  "  It  is  certain,"  as  a 
good  writer1  observes,  "  that  none  of  the  ancient  philosophers  had  the 
smallest  idea  of  its  being  possible  to  produce  a  substance  out  of  nothing,* 
or  that*  even  the  power  of  the  Deity  himself  could  work  without  any 

1  O  materials  to  work  upon.  Hence  some  of  them,  among  whom 
-"•«  was  Aristotle,  asserted  that  the  world  was  eternal,  both  as  to 
its  matter  and  form.  Others,  though  they  believed  that  the  gods  had 
given  the  world  its  form,  yet  imagined  the  materials  whereof  it  is 
composed  to  have  been  eternal.  Indeed,  the  opinions  of  the  ancients, 
who  had  not  the  benefit  of  revelation,  were  on  this  head  so  confused 
and  contradictory,  that  nothing  of  any  consequence  can  be  deduced 
from  them.  The  free-thinkers  of  our  own  and  of  former  ages  have  de- 
nied the  possibility  of  creation,  as  being  a  contradiction  to  reason ; 
and  of  consequence  have  taken  the  opportunity  from  thence  to  dis- 
credit revelation.  On  the  other  hand,  many  defenders'  of  the  sacred 
writings  have  asserted  that  creation  out  of  nothing,  so  far  from  being 
a  contradiction  to  reason,  is  not  only  probable,  but  demonstrably  cer- 

»  Is  therefore.— 264,  E.  6,  2. 

•  to  the  original.— 7b  is  here  implied  by  writing  the  tte-tiek  (Petoid  in  this 
case)  in  the  fourth  position.    260,  b. 

i  good  writer— 164,  R.  2. 

*  out  of  nothing — The  maxim  of  the  ancients  upon  this  subject  was,  K* 
nihilo  nVMfit—  Nothing  from  nothing  springs.    (I)  In  this  case  it  is  better  to  ex- 
press of  by  the  Vee-hook  than  to  imply  it. 

»  or  that. — It  is  allowable  to  join  or  (Tetoid1  to  any  following  word  to  which 
and  would  be  joined  by  a  horizontal  tick  (i.  e.,  Ketoid). 

-in  i  many  defenders  of  the — Here  nfthe  are  omitted,  although  the  fol- 
*••*  lowing  word  is  carried  to  the  next  line,  an  example  which  the  reporter 
may  safely  follow  in  almost  all  cases. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  85 

tain.  Nay,  some  have  gone5  so  far  as  to  say,3  that  from  the  very  in- 
specti  )n  of  the  visible  system  of  Nature,  we  are  able  to  infer  that  it 
was  once  in  a  state  of  non-existence."  We  can  not,  however,  here 
enter  into  the  multiplicity  of  the  arguments  on  both  sides  ;  it  is  enough 
for  us  to  k.;^\v  what  God  has  teen  pleased  to  reveal,  both  concerning 
himself  rnd  the  works  of  his  hands.  Men,  and  other  animals  that 
inhabit  the  earth  and  the  seas  ;  all  the  immense  varieties  of  herbs  and 
plants  of  which  1  he  vegetable  kingdom  consists ;  the  globe  of  the  earth ; 
and  the  expanse  of  the  ocean — these  we  know  to  have  been  produced 
by  his  power.  Besides  the  terrestrial  world,  which  we  inhabit,  we  see 
many  other  material  bodies  disposed  around  it  in  the  wide  extent  of 
space.  The  moon,  which  is  in  a  particular  manner  connected  with  our 
earth,  and  even  dependent  upon  it ;  the  sun,  and  the  other  planets, 
with  their  satellites,  which,  like  the  earth,  circulate  round  the  sun, 
and  appear  to  derive  from  him  light  and  heat ;  those  bodies  which  we 
call  fixed  stars,4  and  consider  as  illuminating  and  cherishing  with  heat 
each  its  peculiar  system  of  planets  ;  and  the  comets  which  at  certain 
periods  surprise  us  with  their  appearance,  and  the  nature  of  whose 
connection  with  the  general  system  of  Nature,  or  with  any  particular 
system  of  planets,  we  can  not  pretend  to  have  fully  discovered  ;  these 
are  so  many  more  of  the  Deity's  works,  from  the  contemplation  of 
which  we  can  not  but  conceive  the  most  awful  ideas  of  his  creative 
power. 

"  Matter,  however,  whatever  the  varieties  of  form  under  which  it  is 
made  to  appear,  the  relative  disposition  of  its  parts,  or  the  motions 
communicated  to  it,  is  but  an  inferior  part  of  the  works  of  creation. 
We  believe  ourselves  to  be  animated  with  a  much  higher  principle  than 
brute  matter  ;  in  viewing  the  manners  and  economy  of  the  lower  ani- 
mals, we  can  scarce  avoid  acknowledging  even  them  to  consist  of 
something  more  than  various  modifications  of  matter  and  motion. 
The  other  planetary  bodies,  which  seem  to  be  in  circumstances  nearly 
analogous  to  those  of  our  earth,  are  surely,  as  well  as  it,  destined  for  j 
the  habitations  of  ration  il,  intelligent  beings.  The  existence  o  intel-  j 
ligences  of  a  higher  order  than  man,  though  intinitcly*  below  the  I 

2  some  have  gone.— 250,  3;  p.  63,  xix.  of  ihis  Ecader. 

s  as  to  sny. — As  "to  any'"  would  be  written  Es4,  Iss2  may  be  Joined,  the  same 
as  to  Tee4  in  writing  us  to  it,  Iss2-Tee. 

4  fixed  stars — This  is  a  special  contraction  (237,  R.  2),  Ef  standing  for  fxed 
and  the  consonants  of  tstars  being  expressed  by  the  Ster-loop  and  Iss. 

•  infinitely.— One  great  object  kept  cnns-tantly  in  view  l.y  me  in  my  Phono- 
graphic improvements  was  the  removal  of  the  disparities  which  existed  in  the  Old 
I'uonugraphy,  in  which  the  outlines  for  many  frequent  and  rapidly  spoken  woida 


86  SECOND    STAND ARD-PIIO^OGRAPHIC    KFADEK. 

Deity,  appears  extremely  probable.  Of  these  spiri*  ual  beings,  called 
angels,  we  have  express  intimation  in  Scripture.  B;t  the  limitt  of  the 
creation  we  must  not  pretend  to  define.  How  far  the  regions  of  space 
extend,  or  how  they  are  filled,  \*e  know  not.  How  the  planetary 
worlds,  the  sun,  and  the  fixed  stare  are  occupied,  we  do  not  pretend  to 
have  ascertained.  We  are  even  ignorant  how  wide  a  diversity  of  form.-, 
what  an  infinity  of  living  animated  beings  may  inhabit  our  own  globe. 
So  confined  is  our  knowledge  of  creation,  yet  so  grand,  so  awful,  that 
part  which  our  narrow  understandings  can  comprehend. 

"Concerning  the  periods  of  time  at  which  the  Deity  executed  his 
several  works,  it  can  not  be  pretended  that  mankind  have  had  oppor- 
tunities of  receiving  very  particular  information.  Many  have  been  the 
conjectures,  and  curious  the  fancies  of  learned  men,  respecting  it ;  but, 
after  all,  we  must  be  indebted  to  the  sacred  writings  for  the  best  in- 
formation." Different  copies,  indeed,  give  different  dates. 

"I  O  The  Hebrew  copy  of  the  Bible,  which  we  Christians,  for  good 
•1*-'  reasons,  consider  as  the  most  authentic,  dates  the  creation  of 
the  world  3944  years  before  the  Christian  era.  The  Samaritan  Bible, 
again,  fixes  the  era  of  the  creation  4305  years  before  the  birth  of  Christ. 
And  the  Greek  translation,  known  by  the  name  of  the  Septuagint 
version  of  the  Bible,  gives  5270  as  the  number  of  the  years  which 
intervened  between  these  two  periods.  By  comparing  the  various 
dates  in  the  sacred  writings,  examining  how  these  have  come  to  disa- 
gree, and  to  be  diversified  in  different  copies  ;  endeavoring  to  reconcile 

were  fifty  per  cent,  glower  than  speech,  so  that  if  the  other  words  could  be  written 
with  the  rapidity  of  speech,  the  reporter  was  obliged  to  fall  behind  in  writing  the 
slow  words,  of  which,  for  example,  the  word  infinitely  (En-Ef-Xet-El)  was  one, 
requiring  four  slowly-written  strokes,  i.  t.,  slow  as  compared  with  straight-lines. 
For  Injinite-ly,  etc.,  Standard  Phonography  provides  a  word-sign  which  can  be 
written  with  sufficient  rapidity ;  and  by  providing  appropriate  word-signs  (of  which 
this  is,  of  course,  but  a  single  instance),  by  new  principles  of  writing  and  new 
sources  of  brevity,  and  by  gen.Tal  principles  of  contraction,  "the  rough  places 
hav«  been  made  smooth,"  so  ihat  the  pen  or  pencil  by  an  even  movement  keeps 
pace  with  the  speaker.  For  further  illustration— the  old  form  Tetoid-Ketoid,  when 
employed  for  ichi/  and  irhilf,  was  too  slow,  requiring  two  strokes  for  rapidly  spoken 
monosyllable;1,  and  allowing  but  little  opportune.-  'or  joining  in  phrase- ;  l>ut  wh<»n 
used,  as  in  Standard  Phonography,  to  represent  two  words,  it  is  -ufliciently  rapid  ; 
and  the  use  of  Tetoid-Ketoid  in  this  way,  and  providing  quickly-written  word  signs 
for  tcA.v  (Way1)  and  while  (Wei1),  serve  to  remove  a  disparity  of  speed  which  must 
have  been  felt  by  any  Old  Phono.'rapber  who  has  had  to  write  after  a  rapid  speaker 
such  phrases  as  the  following:  Why  ix  it:  iclujtu-e  you;  ichij  were  you;  irliHe  it; 
nhiU  thr ;  lut  n  little  time  ;Tetoil2-Ketoid-Let-Tee) ;  or  a-n  (Tetoid-Ketoid); 
but  I  am  (Tetoid2-Ketoid-Em). 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  87 

the  most  authentic  profane  with  sacred  chronology,  some  ingenious 
men  have  formed  schemes  of  chronology  plausible,  indeed,  but  not 
supported  by  sufficient  authorities,  which  they  would  gladly  persuade 
us  to  receive  in  preference  to  any  of  those  above  mentioned.  IMier 
makes  out  from  the  Hebrew  Bible  4004  years  as  the  term  between  the 
creation  and  the  birth  of  Christ.  Josephus,  according  to  Dr.  Wills  and 
Mr.  Winston,  makes  it  4658  years ;  and  M.  Pezron,  with  the  help  of 
the  Septuagint,  extends  it  to  5872  years.  Usher's  system  is  the  inost 
generally  received.  But  though  these  different  systems  of  chronology 
are  so  inconsistent,  and  so  slenderly  supported,  yet  the  differences 
among  them  are  so  inconsiderable  in  comparison  with  those  which 
arise  before  us  when  we  contemplate  the  chronology  of  the  Chinese, 
the  Chaldeans,  and  the  Egyptians,  and  they  agree  so  well  with  the 
general  information  of  authentic  history,  and  with  the  appearances  of 
nature  and  of  society,  that  they  may  be  considered  as  nearly  fixing  the 
true  period  of  the  creation  of  the  earth."  Uncertain,  however,  as  we 
may1  be  as  to  the  exact  time  of  the  creation,  we  may  profitably  apply 
ourselves  to  the  contemplation  of  this  immense  fabric.2  Indeed,  the 
the  beautiful  and  multiform  works  around  us  must  strike  the  mind  of 
every  beholder  with  wonder  and  admiration,  unless  he  be  enveloped 
in  ignorance,  and  chained  down  to  the  earth  with  sensuality.  These 
works  every  way  proclaim  the  wisdom,  the  power,  and  the  goodness 
of  the  Creator.  Creation  is  a  book  which  the  nicest  philosopher  may 
study  with  the  deepest  attention.  Unlike  the  works  of  art,  the  more 
it  is  examined,  the  more  it  opens  to  us  sources  of  admiration  of  its 
great  Author ;  the  more  it  calls  for  our  inspection,  and  the  more  it  de- 
mands our  praise.  Here  everything  is  adjusted  in  the  exactest  order  ; 
all  answering  the  wisest  ends,  and  acting  according  to  the  appointed 
laws  of  Deity.  Here  the  Christian  is  led  into  the  most  delightful  field 
of  contemplation.  To  him  every  pebhle  becomes  a  preacher,  and 
every  atom  a  step  by  which  he  ascends  to  his  Creator.  Placed  in  this 
beautiful  temple,  and  looking  around  on  all  its  various  parts,  he  can 

-i  o  '  we  may  be— p.  163,  E.  S.    See  p.  71,  N.  13,  of  this  Eeader. 

"  a  this  immense  fabric.— The  Compendium.  §  27,  4,  requires  that  a 
circle  between  two  strokes  shall  be  written  In  the  most  convenient  manner.  In 
Tees-Kay,  Tees-Pee,  Chays-Gay,  Chays-Pee,  the  most  convenient  manner  is  to 
turn  the  circle  on  the  left-hand  side  of  Tee  and  Chay.  In  such  a  combination  as 
Dhees-Em  the  question  of  convenience  must  be  settled  In  favor  of  turning  the  circle 
on  the  right-hand  side  of  Dhee  ;  i.  e.,  so  that  it  comes  on  the  concave  side  of  both 
Dhee  and  Em.  Turning  Iss  on  the  back  of  Dhee  seems  to  be  very  difficult  10  many 
writers,  and  in  rapid  writing  the  Dhee  becomes  almost  Vee-Ar.  As  to  Ef-Sem,  the 
most  convenient  way  of  writing  the  circle  is  undoubtedly  on  the  back  of  Et 


88  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

not  help  joining  with  the  Psalmist  in  saying,  "0  Lord,  how  manifoM 
are  thy  works !  in  wisdom  hast3  thou  made  them  all." — Suck's  llttologi- 
cai  Dictionary. 


THE  AGE  OF  THE  HUMAN  RACE. 

OF  all  the  subjects  which  have  occupied  the  attention  of  the  scien- 
tific societies*  and  journals  of  Europe  during  the  past  year,  none  have 
excited  so  much  interest  as  the  geological  evidence  lately  adduced  from 
various  sources,  tending  to  prove  that  the  period  of  man's  existence 
upon  our  planet  has  been  vastly  greater  than*  that  hitherto  assigned 
by  Biblical  and  common  chronology.  It  is  also  a  very  noticeable  cir- 
cumstance that,  notwithstanding  this  subject  has  occupied  the 

W  attention  of  the  scientific  men,  generally,  of  Europe,  daring 
the  past  year,  to  a  greater  extent  than  any  other,  har.lly  a 
•word  relative  to  the  evidence  or  discussion  has  found  its  way  into  any 
American  publication  (book  or  newspaper)  save  the  Annual  of  Scientific 
Discovery.  Whether  theological  prejudice  or  censorship  has  contributed1 
to  this  result,  may  be  a  question.2  The  following,  however,  is  a  brief 
resume  of  the  recent  contributions  which  have  been  made3  to  our 
knowledge  on  the  subject : 

Some  two  years  ago  or  more,  Mr.  Leonard  Horner,  an  English  engi- 
neer of  wealth,  and  a  member  of  the  Royal  Society,  undertook,  in 
connection  with4  some  French  engineers  in  the  employ  of  the  Pasha 
of  Egypt,  to  determine  the  depth  of  the  alluvial  deposits  in  the  valley 

»  haU  than  made  them.— p.  163,  B.  7. 

*  scientific  societies.— The  word  society  is  frequently  represented  in  phrase- 
writing  by  Es.    It  is  rendered  more  legible  in  such  case  by  writing  it  through  the 
last  stroke  of  the  preceding  word. 

«  greater  than.— 201,  P..  8;  and  p.  63,  xviii.  of  this  Reader. 

Wi  contributed.—'  Contri '  is  here  joined  to  Bet     See  this  word  In  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,     p.  112,  B.  8.    Beeshun3  is  »  word- 
sign  for  contribution. 

n  question. —  Ken2  as  a  word-sign  for  qutstion-ed  was  first  introduced  In  the 
Hand-Cook. 

»  which  have  been  made.— p.  1C9,  E.  12. 

*  lit  connection  with.— 250,  3,  and  example  With. 


KEY  TO  THE  REPORTING  EXERCISES.         89 

of  the  Nile.  This  river,  as  is  well  known,  is  remarkable  for  its  annual 
overflow,  whereby  a  great  part  of  all  the  arable  land  of  Egypt  is  sub- 
merged for  the  period  of  several  weeks,  and  covered  with  a  thin 
deposit  of  mud,  or  sediment,  which  in  geological  language  is  termed 
"alluvium."  This  action  recurring  with  great  regularity,  year  after 
year,  has  produced  on  both  sides  of  the  Nile  a  strip  of  land  of  unex- 
ampled fertility,  and  is  also  yearly*  extending  the  delta  or  coast -line, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  farther  and  farther8  into  the  Mediterranean. 
In  all  places  in  the  valiey  of  the  Nile  where  the  soil  has  remained 
undisturbed  by  human  agency,  the  annual  deposits  of  mud  can  be  seen 
reposing  upon  each  other  with  great  regularity — each  successive  layer 
or  stratum  of  sediment  representing  a  year  in  time,  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  successive  rings  in  the  trunk  of  a  tree  represent  the  wood-growth 
of  successive  seasons.  By  counting,  therefore,1  the  number  of  layers 
in  a  given  thickness  of  Nile  deposit,  we  have  an  almost  certain  measure 
of  the  time  required  for  its  formation. 

Mr.  Horner's  researches  were  based  upon  these  facts,  and  were  made 
by  sinking  a  series  of  shafts,  ninety-live  in  all,  across  the  Nile  valley, 
nearly  in  a  line  with,  and  crossing  the  site  of,  the  ancient  city  of 
Heliopolis.  In  every  case  the  alluvium  was  found  to  be  regularly 
divided  into  layers,  and  the  average  of  many  careful  measurements 
indicated  that  the  rate  of  vertical  increase  of  sediment  was  about  three 
and  one  half8  inches  per  century.  One  of  these  shafts,  in  particular, 
was  sunk  close  to  the  great  monolithic  statue  of  llameses  II.,  at  Mem- 
phis, and  it  was  found  that  there  were  nine  feet  four  inches  of  Nile 
sediment  between  eight  inches  below  the  present  surface  of  the 
ground  and  the  lowest  part  of  the  platforms  of  which  the  statue 
stands.  Now  this  statue  has  been  determined  by  Lepsius  and  other 
Egyptian  scholars  to  have  been  erected  1,361  years  before  Christ,  and 
this  date,  added  to  1858,  gives,  therefore,  3,219  years,  <.uring  which 
the  above-mentioned  depth  of  sediment  accumulated,  a  rate  of  increase 
in  strict  accordance  with  the*  results  of  the  measurements  above 

»  yearly.— p.  118,  R.  3,  c. 

•  farther  nnrt  farther.— 276,  c.     See  p.  63,  xx.  of  this  Reader.    The  beet 

Old-Phonographic  expression  for  this  phrase  is  Ferdher  Ketoid-Fcrdlier. 

i  <•<>!!!  U!ir.  therefore. — The  Dher-tick  is  here  written  in  the  plnee  of  the  / 
-ing-ilot.  to  imply  -ing ;  and  -fore  is  added  by  an  Ef-hook.     See  Standard-Phono- 
graphic Dictionary,  DHU,  5. 

8  3\.— In  writing  fractions,  the  reporter  may  save  himself  the  trouble  of  writi;  g 
the  hoiizontal  line,  as  in  the  engraving. 

»  In  strict  accordance  with  the.— p.  168,  R.  10;  250,  3,  and  exar  pie 
With. 


90  SECOXD    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 


1 


alluded  to.  Below  the  platform  of  stone  on  which  the  statue  rests,  the 
shaft  was  driven  thirty-two  feet ;  but  the  lowest  two  feet  consisted  of 
sand,  thus  leaving  thirty  feet  of  true  Nile  sediment  in  an  undisturbed 
condition  beicw  this  foundation.  At  the  base  of  this  sediment,  or  at 
a  depth  of  thirty-nine  feet  four  inches  from  the  present  surface  of  the 
ground,  fragments  of  pottery  were  found  in  a  good  state  of  preserva- 
tion, and  exhibiting  some  considerable  artistic  skill.  Allowing  now 
that  the  thirty  feet  of  sedmit^t  covering  these  remains  (below  the 
platform  of  the  statue)  were  deposited  at  the  rate  of  three  and  one 
half  inches  per  century,  we  have  in  the  fragments  of  pottery  a  record 
of  the  existence  of  man  13,500  years  before  A.D.  1858,  11,500  years 
before  the  Christian  era,  and  7,000  years  before  the  commencement  of 
the  reign  of  Menes  as  assigned  by  Lepsius  ;  of  man,  moreover, 

~t  t  in  a  state  of  civilization  sufficiently  advanced  to  be  able  to 
*-*J  fashion  clay  into  vessels,  and  harden  it1  by  heat. 

The  fragments  in  question  are  now  deposited  in  the  British  Museum, 
and  Mr.  Homer,  in  exhibiting  them  to  the  Royal  Society,  expressed  a 
confident  opinion  that  their  antiquity  was  at  least  equal  to  the  calcu- 
lation above  given.  At  any  rate,  it  seems  certain  that  they  were 
deposited  in  the  place  from  whence  they  were  taken  long  anterior  to 
the  time  wlien  the  workmen  of  Rameses  II.  laid  the  platform  for  the 
reception  of  his  statue,  3,000  years  ago. 

The  results  of  Mr.  Homer's  investigations  are,  however,  cast  entirely 
into  the  shade  oy  the  discovery  of  flint  weapons,  spear-heads,  axes,  etc., 
associated  with  the  remains  of  extinct  animals — elephant,  rhinocems, 
bear,  tiger,  hyena,  etc.— in  undisturbed  beds  of  gravel,  in  the  noith 
of  France.  The  announcement  of  this  discovery  was  first  made  by 
Mr.  Lvans,  an  English  geologist,  to  the  London  Society  of  Antiquaries, 
in  June,  1859,  and  suosequent  researches  have  fully  confirmed  it.  The 
weapons  and  bones  occur  in  what  is-  geologically  known  as  the  drift, 
in  the  neighborhood  or  tne  town  of  Amiens,3  and  present  unmistakable 

-i  r   i  and  harden  It.— 221,  E.  4 

*•**  2  iii  wlu»t  ls.-22t,  E.  4. 

3  A  miens — Pronounced  iircifi, — (,)  expressing  the  nasalization  of  the  preced- 
ing a.  The  i  is  represented  by  Yay,  go  as  lo  help  give  a  suggestive  outline.  For 
the  stenographic  represen  (avion  of  nasalized  vowels,  see  p.  203,  §  12.  My  usual 
plan  is  in  reporting  foreign  niuj^s,  when  their  pronunciation  isquile  different  from 
the  values  of  the  letters  intei-pret'.d  l>y  general  Englixh  tmalttgien,  to  write  ths 
word  as  thougli  it  were  English  ;  for  instance,  tvriting  Amiens  as  though  it  wera 
pronounced  Am'ienz.  This,  of  oourae,  is  upon  the  supposition  that  the  orlhogru* 
pby  is  known.  If  not,  you  are,  of  cou_-*v»,  *  write  the  spoken  word. 


KEY    TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  91 

evidence  of  having  been  buried  cotemporaneously.  At  the  meeting 
of  the  British  Association4  in  September,  1859,  Sir  Chas.  Lyell,  who 
has  hitherto  favored  the  received  chronology  respecting  man's  exist- 
ence as  a  race,  said  that  he  fully  believed  that  the  antiquity  of  these 
flint  weapons  was  "immensely  great  as  compared  with  the  times  of 
either  history  or  tradition  ;"*  and  it  is  conceded  by  all  geologists  that 
the  continued  existence  of  tropical  animals  is  not  possible  in  Central 
Europe,  under  the  present  conditions  of  climate.  The  conclusion, 
therefore,  seems  unavoidable,  that  there  were  races  of  men  inhabiting 
Europe  at  a  period  when  this  temperature  was  altogether  different  from 
what  it  now  is,  and  when  the  country  was  the  natural  habitation  of 
species  of  animals  now  restricted  to  the  tropics. — Life  Illustrated. 


THE  INFALLIBILITY  OF  THE  CHUECH. 

THE  infallibility  of  the  Church  of  Home  has  been  one  of  the  great 
controversies  between  the  Protestants  and  Papists.  By  this  infallibility 
it  ia  understood  that  she  can  not  at  any  time  cease  to  be  orthodox  in 
her  doctrine,  or  fall  into  any  pernicious  errors  ;  but  that  she  is  consti- 
tuted, by  Divine  authority,  the  judge  of  all  controversies  of  religion, 
and  that  all  Christians  are  obliged  to  acquiesce  in  her  decisions.  This 
is  the  chain  which  keeps  its  members  fast  bound  to  its  communion ; 
the  charm  which  retains  them  within  its  magic  circle  ;  the  opiate 
which  lays  asleep  all  their  doubts  and  difficulties ;  it  is  likewise  the 
magnet  which  attracts  the  desultory  and  unstable  in  other  persuasions 
within  the  sphere  of  popery,  the  foundation  of  its  whole  superstructure, 
the  cement  of  all  its  parts,  and  its  fence  and  fortress  against  all  inroads 
and  attacks. 

Under  the  idea  of  this  infallibility,  the  Church  of  Rome  claims — 1.  To 

4  British  Association. — If  this  should  occur  frequently,  it  might  be  written 
Bretseshon1,  and  British  Society,  if  occurring  frequently,  might  be  written  Brets1, 
the  circle  standing  for  society,  the  entire  contraction  transferred  to  common  print 
being  "Brit.  S." 

6  Pn>f.  Agassiz  estimates  the  age  of  a  human  foot  and  jaw,  discovered  by  him 
in  the  coast  limestone  of  Florida,  from  data  furnished  by  the  growth  of  the  l.-md,  at 
18o,OCO  years.  [In  an  Essay  contributed  to  Types  of  Mankind.] 

In  making  an  excavation  at  New  Orleans,  an  Indian's  skull  was  found  beneath 
four  cypress  forests,  the  production  of  each  of  which,  it.  is  estimated,  required  14.400 
years.  Allowing  a  period  of  500  years'  rest  between  the  d  Ifereut  productions, 
69,100  years  must  have  passed  away  since  the  skull  v  as  deposited  iu  the  position 
where  it  was  discovered. 


92  SECOND    STAXDAKD-FHOXOGBAPIIIC   READER. 

determine  what  books  are  and  what  are  not  canonical,  and  to  oblige  all 
Christians  to  receive  or  reject  them  accordingly.  2.  To  communicate 
authority  to  the  Scripture ;  or,  in  other  words,  that  the  Scripture  (quoad 
nos),  as  to  us,  receives  its  authority  from  her.  3.  To  assign  and  fix 
the  sense  of  Scripture,  which  all  Christians  are  submissively  to  receive. 

•j  f*  4.  To  decree  as  necessary  to  salvation  whatever  she  judges  so, 
•*•"  although  not  contained  in  Scripture.  5.  To  decide  all  contro- 
versies respecting  matters  of  faith.  These  are  the  claims  to  which  the 
Church  of  Rome  pretends,  but  which  we  shall  not  here  attempt  to  re- 
fute, because  any  man  with  the  Bible  in  his  hand,  and  a  little  common 
sense,  will  easily  see  that  they  are  all  founded  iipon  ignorance,  super- 
stition, and  error.  It  is  not  a  little  remarkable,  however,  that  the 
Roman  Catholics  themselves  are  much  divided  as  to  the1  scat  of  this 
infallibility,  and  which,  indeed,  may  be  considered  as  a  satisfactory 
proof  that  no  such  privilege  exists  in  the  Church.  For  is  it  consistent 
with  reason  to  think  that  God  would  have  imparted  so  extraordinary  a 
gift  to  prevent  errors  and  dissensions  in  the  Church,  and  yet  have  left 
an  additional  cause  of  error  and  dissension,  viz.,  the  uncertainty  of  the 
place  of  its  abode?  No,  surely.  Some  place  this  infallibility  in  the 
Pope  or  Bishop  of  Rome  ;  some  in  a  general  council ;  others  in  neither 
Pope  nor  council  separately,  but  in  both  conjointly  ;  whilst  others  are 
said  to  place  it  in  the  church  diffusive,  or  in  all  churches  throughout 
the  world.  But  that  it  could  not  be  deposited  in  the  Pope  is  evident, 
for  many  Popes  have  been  heretics,  and  on  that  account  censured  and 
deposed,  and  therefore  could  not  have  been  infallible.  That  it  could 
not  be  placed  in  a  general  council*  is  as  evident ;  for  general  councils 
have  actually  erred.  Neither  could  it  be  placed  in  the  Pope  and 
council  conjointly ;  for  two  fallibles*  could  not  make  one  infallible, 
any  more  than  two  ciphers  could  make  an  integer.  To  say  that  it  is 

-j /•>  »  ns  to  the. — As  to,  Speto'd",  rests  on  the  line;  but  as  to  the  it  distin- 
•l"  guished  from  it  by  the  circle's  resting  on  the  line  and  the  extending  below 

the  line.     It  is  to  the  (t.  e.,  tlte  written  in  the  fourth  position  to  imply  to)  with  «« 

prefixed. 

*  In  a  general  council  — Presuming  that  the  phrase  general  council  will 

occur  frequently,  1  make  here  a  special  contraction  for  it,  upon  the  principles  of  2o7, 

B.  2.     If  I  apprehended  that  it  mig!it  conflict  with  the  contraction  for  ilenus  Ch.ri.-tt, 

I  would  distinguish  it  by  placing  it  in  the  third  position. 

3  fnlllbleg. — The  reporter  may  frequently  write  '  We'  by  its  sign  '  Bee,'  instead 
of  Bel,  thus  making  a  slight  though  desirable  saving  in  some  jases.  C<i]ntl//e,  for 
instance,  a  contraction  tKay-Bel*i  of  the  Corresponding  Slyl,-,  n<ay  be  shortened  a 
little  more  in  the  Reporting  Style  by  leaving  off  the  hook,  i.  e.,  by  writing  Kay-Bee3. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXKRCISES.  93 

lodged  in  the  church  universal  or  diffusive,  is  equally  erroneous  ;  for 
this  would  be  useless  and  insignificant,  because  it  could  never  be  exer- 
cised. The  whole  church  could  not  meet  to  make  decrees,  or  to  choose 
representatives,  or  to  deliver  their  sentiments  on  any  question  started  ; 
and  less  than  all  would  not  be  the  whole  church,  cud  so  could  not 
claim  that  privilege. 

The  most  general  opinion,  however,  it  is  said,  is  that  of  its  being 
seated  in  a  Pope  and  general  council.  The  advocates  for  this  opinion 
consider  the  Pope  as  the  vicar  of  Christ,  head  of  the  church,  and  cen- 
ter of  unity ;  and  therefore  conclude  that  his  concurrence  with  and 
approbation  of  the  decrees  of  a  general  council  are  necessary,  and  suffi- 
cient to  afford  it  an  indispensable  sanction  and  plenary  authority.  A 
general  council  they  regard  as  the  church  representative,  and  suppose 
that  nothing  can  be  wanting  to  ascertain  the  truth  of  any  controversial 
point,  when  the  pretended  head  of  the  church  and  its  members,  assem- 
bled in  their  supposed  representatives,  mutually  concur  and  coincide 
in  judicial  definitions  and  decrees,  but  that  infallibility  attends  their 
coalition  and  conjunction  in  all  their  determinations. 

Every  impartial  person,  who  considers  this  subject  with  the  least  de- 
gree of  attention,  must  clearly  perceive  that  neither  any  individual  nor 
body  of  Christians  have  any  ground  from  reason  or  Scripture  for  pre- 
tending to  infallibility.  It  is  evidently  the  attribute  of  the  Supreme 
Being  alone,  which  we  have  all  the  foundation  imaginable  to  conclude 
he  has  not  communicated  to  any  mortal,  or  associations  of  mortals. 
The  human  being  who  challenges  infallibility  seems  to  imitate  the 
pride  and  presumption  of  Lucifer,  when  he  said,  ' '  I  will  ascend,  and 
will  be  like  the  Most  High."  A  claim  to  it  was  unheard  of  in  the 
primitive  and  purest  ages  of  the  church,  but  became,  after  that  period, 
the  arrogant  pretension  of  papal  ambition.  History  plainly  informs  us 
that  the  bishops  of  Rome,  on  the  declension  of  the  western  Roman 
Empire,4  began  to  put  in  their  claim  of  being  the  supreme  and  infal- 
lible heads  of  the  Christian  church  ;  which  they*  at  length  established 
by  their  deep  policy  and  unremitting  efforts ;  by  the  concurrence  of 
fortunate  circumstances  ;  by  the  advantages  which  they  reaped  from 
the  necessities  of  some  princes,  and  the  superstition  of  others  ;  and  by 

«  Western  Roman  Empire.— Roman  is  here  contracted  to  Ar.  If  this 
phrase  were  occurring  frequently  I  would  contract  it  (in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  23T,  K.  2)  to  Way2-Ar-Emp  (i.  e.,  "W.  E.  Emp.). 

•  \vliteti  they — In  writing  this  phrase-sign,  Dhee  must  be  joined,  as  in  the 
engraving,  without  an  angle.  If  it  should  seem  difficult,  it  should  be  the  more 
practiced,  until  it  becomes  easy. 


94:  SECOND    STANDARD-PIIOXOGRAPHIC    READER. 

the  general  and  excessive  credulity  of  the  people.     However,  when 
they  had  grossly  abused  this  absurd  pretension,  and  committed 

n  various  acts  of  injustice,  tyranny,  and  cruelty  ;  when  the  blind 
veneration  for  the  papal  dignity  had  been  greatly  diminished 
by  the  long  and  scandalous  schism  occasioned  by  contending  Popes ; 
when  these  had  been  for  a  considerable  time1  roaming  about  Europe, 
fawning  on  princes,  squeezing  their  adherents,  and  cursing  their 
rivals  ;  and  when  the  councils  of  Constance  and  Basil  had  challenged 
and  exercised  the  right  of  deposing  and  electing  the  bishops  of  Home, 
then  their3  pretensions  to  infallibility  were  called  in  question,  and  the 
world  discovered  that  councils  were  a  jurisdiction  superior  to  that  of 
the  towering  pontiffs.  Then  it  was  that  this  infallibility  was  trans- 
ferred* by  many  divines  from  Popes  to  general  councils,  and  the  opinion 
of  the  superior  authority  of  a  council  above  that  of  a  pope  spread 
vastly,  especially  under  the  profligate  pontificate*  of  Alexander  VI.  and 
the  martial  one  of  Julius  II.*  The  popes  were  thought  by  numbers  to 
be  too  unworthy  possessors  of  so  rich  a  jewel ;  at  the  same  time  it  ap- 
peared to  be  of  too  great  a  value,  and  of  too  extensive  consequence,  to 
be  parted  with  entirely  It  was,  therefore,  by  the  major  part  of  the 
Roman  Church,  deposited  with,  or  made  the  property  of  general  coun- 
cils, either  solely  or  conjointly  with  the  Pope. — Buck's  Theological  Dic- 
tionary. 

-j  *",   1  for  a  considerable  time. — It  is  well  to  make  use  of  a  species  of 

*  •    phrase-signs,  like  that  fir  this  phrnse,  in  which,  though  tlirre  is  a  disjoin- 
ing, the  pen  moves  but  a  slight  distance  before  commencing  the  disjoined  word, 
that  being  made  to  overlap  the  preceding  as  a  sort  of  indication  that  it  forms  a  part 
of  the  phrase-sign,  just  as  in  cases  of  necessary  disjoining  in  writing  a  single  word, 
the  disjoined  part  is  made  to  slightly  overlap  the  preceding  one,— the  word  being 
thus  distinguished  from  two  words.    See  d  ted  (Dee:Ted),  218.     If  in  writing  this 
phrase,  time  had  oeen  written  Tee1,  there  would  have  been  lost  the  time  of  a  long 
air-stroke,  and,  moreover,  the  writing  would  not  be  so  legible;  for,  judicious 
phrase-writibg  adds  to  legibility. 

»  cursing  their.— p.  62,  xiii.  of  this  Reader. 

»  then  tlielr — I  prefer  to  join  there,  etc.,  by  the  Dher-tick  than  to  employ  the 
lengthening  principle  when  it  produces  a  form  which  needs  vocalization  to  distin- 
guish it  from  some  other,  though  there  is  hardly  ever  any  such  necessity. 

*  was  transferred.— In  accordance  with  the  great  principle  of  UNIFORM- 
ITY of  Standard  Phonography,  «"  contracted  words  ending  in  -fer-red  are  con- 
tracted in  like  manner,  as  Refer-red,  Bay2-Ef;  Infer-red,  En-Ef2;  Transfer-red, 
Ter»2-Ef. 

*  profligate  pontificate.-  236,  4. 

*  Julius  II.— p.  194,  R.  8 


KEY   TO    THE   KEPOETING   EXERCISES.  95 


AUDI   ALTERAM   PARTEM.7 

[Abstract  of  a  Lecture  by  Rev.  Dr.  Cahill,  delivered  in  Brooklyn.     Reported  in 
full  by  Andrew  J.  Graham.'1] 

DEAREST  brethren,  I  am  now  going  to  deliver  a  discourse  upon  whatj 
wo  call  the  Infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church.  By  infallibility  I  do 
nut  mean  that  no  man  in  the  Church  can  fail,  but  that  the  doctrines 
taught  by  Christ  to  His  Apostles  are  still  taught  in  the  Church,  and 
will  be  taught  throughout  all  countries  and  all  time  to  the  end  of  the 
world.  The  infallibility  of  the  Church,  therefore,  means  this,  that  I, 
having  passed10  my  examinations  in  college,  taken  out  my  degree,  and 
being  recognized  and  approved  as  a  priest  by  my  bishop,  you  may  rely 
upon  what  I  tell  you  with  the  same  certitude  as  if  you  heard  Christ 

i  Audi  alt  era  m  pnrtcm—  near  the  other  side.-  A  Eoman  and  Grecian 
maxim  of  fairness  and  justice,  which  it  would  be  well  to  adopt  in  modern  tiroes, 
especially  as  it  may  sometimes  happen  that  after  hearing  both  sides  we  may  see 
that  the  truth  lies  with  "  the  other  side,"  or  only  in  part  wiiii  either,  or  with  neither. 
"  Veritas  nihil  teretur  nisi  abscondi."  —  Veritas  visit  et  mord,  fulsa  festutione  et 
incerti.?  valescunt.  —  Tac. 

8  A  reporter  having  established  in  the  only  possible  manner  a  reputation  for 
accuracy  and  impartiality,  will  find  no  difficulty,  on  account  of  difference  of  opinions, 
in  getting  business  from  parties  of  opinions  directly  contrary  to  his  own,  if  the  de- 
sire is  to  have  a  report  at  all.  I  do  not  say  a  correct  report,  for  a  garbled  or  mis- 
representing report  is  no  report  at  all.  A  misrepresentation  of  a  speaker  may  be 
made  from  putting  words  into  his  mouth  which  it  is  known  he  never  uttered  — 
words  calculated  to  subject  him  to  odium  or  ridicule  ;  which  is  morally  nothing  less 
than  forgery  and  libel.  A  misrepresentation  may  be  made  by  taking  from  his  words 
clauses  or  sentences  which  serve  to  modify  a  proposition  which,  perhnps,  without 
such  modification,  would  be  repugnant  to  the  common-sense  of  mankind,  and  de- 
testable to  himself.  This  also  is  moral  forgery  and  libel.  A  misrepresentation  may 
also  be  made  from  throwing  around  the  speaker  such  circumstances  as  will  give  to 
the  reader  an  untrue  idea  of  the  spirit  or  occasion  of  the  speech. 

No  reporter  who  would  keep  his  soul  unspotted  from  such  injustice,  will  either 
seek  or  accept  a  situation  as  reporter  upoii  any  paper  whose  conductors  either  ex- 
pect, require,  or  (what  is  the  same)  allow  M.e  misrepresen  ation  of  a  speaker,  unlexs 
it  be  with  the  most  distinct  undemanding  that  he  is  not  himself  to  be  directly  con- 
cerned in  such  disreputable  business,  and  that  his  reports  are  not  to  be  altered  for 
the  purposes  of  misrepresentation.  Xo  thoroughly  honest  reporter  can  take  a  less 
sturdy  position  than  that;  for,  by  the  same  reasoning  that  a  man  has  a  right  to 
air  because  he  has  lungs,  he  has  a  right  to  think  freely,  and  to  utter  his  honest 
convictions,  because  he  has  a  xoul  ;  and  the  cause  of  Kverlas  tinu  Truth  and  every 
elementary  principle  of  human  rights  demand  that  if  a  paper  report  his  utterances, 
H  shall  do  it  fairly. 

•  upon  what.  —  £21,  K.  4. 

i»  that  I  having  passed.—  237,  E.  1,  6. 


96  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

himself  speaking.  You  say  that  is11  a  large  proposition;  it  is,  but  I 
assert  it  boldly,  with  perfect  confidence,  believing  it  as  firmly  as  my 
existence.  I  have  no  more  doubt  of  it  than  I  have  of  the  life,  death, 
or  resurrection  of  Christ.  I  shall  endeavor  to  fully  convince  you  of 
the  truth  of  this  proposition. 

I  commence  by  saying  that  Christ  ought  to  make  as  good  rules  for 
the  soul  as  His  Father  has  made  for  the  body.  You  say  Yes.  'ILe 
Father  has  established  all  the  laws  of  Nature,  and  I  want  to  know  if 
auy  of  them  have  ever  failed  ?  I  think  not.  The  sun  has  never  been 
one  second  too  late  in  his  brilliant  course  since  the  day  he  suid  ' '  Let 
there  be  light,"  and  there  was  light.  The  tides  have  never  ceased  to 
flow  since  that  time.  The  seasons  have  never  folli-d—  spring,  summer, 
autumn,  winter.  The  great  panorama  over  your  head  appears  to 
move  with  perfect  order  and  regularity.  All  the  plants  arise  in  their 
proper  time,  decay,  and  fall  into  their  autumnal  graves,  and  are  lost 
until  another  season  ;  and  the  yuung  baby  plant  makes  its  appearance 
the  next  spring,  and  perpetuates  the  memory  of  its  parents,  and  goes 
on  through  ages.  It  is  the  same  with  the  bird  and  the  fish  tribes. 
The  animal  tribes  still  carry  out  their1'2  instincts,  and  there  they  are, 
family  after  family, 13  and  so  it  will  be  through  ages  to  come.  The 
vast  variety  of  these  philosophical  phenomena  are  maintained  with 
perpetual  order  and  beauty.  Whether  this  country  were  Moham- 
medan, Catholic,  Christian,  or  Infidel,  these  laws  remain  the  same. 
Do  what  you  will,  you  can  not  cause  an  eclipse  of  the  sun.  By  hold- 
ing up  your  hand,  you  may  cast  a  shadow  on  yourself,  but  you  can 
not  do  away  with  the  light  of  the  great  luminary.  When  you  and  I 
have  discoursed  upon  this  subject— 

•j  O  a  favorite  topic  of  mine — I  say  to  you  :  These  are  the  laws  of 
•"•^  the  Father  over  nature.  Don't  you  think  there  ought  to  be  as 
good  a  set  of  laws  for  the  soul  instituted  by  Christ  as  these  laws  of  the 
Father  for  nature  ?  What  would  you  think  if  two  suns  were  made, 
when  only  one1  would  be  necessary  ?  I  say  No ;  it  can  not  be ;  it 
would  cause  confusion  One  sun  is  the  proper  plan ;  anything  else 
would  cause  disorder.  Everything  seems  to  have  been  established  to 
be  permanent — to  carry  out  his  great  philosophical  economy.  You 

11  you  say  that  Is  a.— p.  167,  R.  2;  p.  62,  xi.  of  this  Header. 
»  carry  oat  their.— See  p.  63,  xvi. ;  p.  62,  xiii.  of  this  Reader. 
»»  family  after  family.— 25  ',  3. 


18 


>  only  one.— p.  169,  R.  11. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  97 

agree  with  me  decidedly  that  these  laws  are  the  same,  whatever  may 
be  the  people  in  the  world  ;  these  laws  are  beyond  their  reach.  Now, 
if  the  laws  of  nature  are  not  dependent  on  the  flitting  opinions  of 
men,  how  can  it  be  believed  that  Christ  instituted  laws  for  the  soul  on 
any  such  basis,  when  the  interests  of  the  soul  are  so  much  more 
important  than  those  of  the  philosophical  economy?  One  soul  is 
worth  a  million  of  suns — yea,  worth  all  the  suns  that  could  ever 
escape  from  the  fingers  of  the  omnipotent  Creator,  because  the  soul 
has  on  it  His  own  image.  More — it  has  the  blood  of  Christ  upon  it ; 
and  one  drop  of  His  blood  is  infinite  in  value.2  As  compared  with  the 
infinite  value  of  the  soul,  all  that  He  can  ever  create  must  be  finite. 
I  place  that  programme  before  you,  and  say  that  if  you  do  not  believe 
what  I  am  going  to  say  to  you,  you  can  not  believe  one  word  of  Christ. 

Christ  addressing  His  Apostles  said,  "As  the  Father  sent  me,  so  I 
send  you." 

The  first  thing  that  strikes  me  is  this  sending.  Was  He  not  God, 
like  His  Father  ?  Why  does  He  acknowledge  the  inferiority  of  being 
sent  ?  Could  He  not  come  Himself  ?  This  is  the  language  of  the  Holy 
Ghost,  the  inbpiration  of  the  Holy  Ghost  through  the  pen  of  John, 
and  every  word  of  the  text  I  shall  read  borrows  omnipotent  importance 
from  the  source  whence  it  proceeds.  "  As  the  Father  sent  me."  The 
Father  gives  Him  a  command,  when  one  would  suppose  that  He 
requires  no  command.  He  receives  this  command  in  His  mediatorial 
office.  Mankind  having  sinned,  and  being  all  sinful  and  cast  out,  how 
could  they  recover  their  position  ?  How  could  finite  men  pay  an  infi- 
nite debt?  How  could  fallen  man  restore  himself?  He  had  sinned 
against  the  Father,  and  heaven  was  bolted  against  him,  and  he  was 
excluded,  a  rebel,  banished,  having  lost  all  his  position.  Being  in  sin, 
he  is  not  acceptable  in  the  sight  of  God.  But  the  Son  of  God — beau- 
tiful phrase — said :  Father,  I  know  that  the  blood  of  oxen  can  not 
please  you,  therefore  I  go.  I  will  take  man's  flesh,  his  chains,  his 
rags — all  but  his  sins,  on  my  bare  head  before  you,  and  I  shall 
pay  the  whole  debt.  I  go  at  the  command  from  my  Father  ;  I  give 
you  what  He  gave  me.  He  sent  me  into  the  world  to  preach  against 
sin,  to  advocate  sanctity,  to  publish  the  gospel.  I  send  you  in  the 
same  office.  Then  as  to  the  authority— so  far  as  that  goes,  you  have  it. 

No  man  can  preach  unless  he  has  got  a  command  from  God  the 
Father.  He  sent  Christ  to  discharge  this  duty,  and  He  snbdelegates 
the  power  He  receives  Himself.  That  is  what  I  call  the  commission. 
But  you  may  say,  where  did  these  men  who  preach  to  you  get  the 


*  lii  value. — 246, 1. 


98  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

knowledge  to  discharge  the  duty?  John  xv.  15  :3  "  All  things  what- 
soever I  have  heard  from  my  Father  I  have  made  known  to  you." 
Recollect,  every  word  of  this  must  be  weighed  in  its  atomic  value. 
I  do  not  like  to  be  speaking  Greek  to  you,  but  {he  Greek  is,  I  will 
make  it*  perfectly  known  to  you.  You  have  all  knowledge.  You 
know  that  warrant  is  from  God,  so  far  as  it  goes.  The  commission 
comes  from  the  Father  certainly,  and  the  knowledge  comes  from  the 
Father.  Was  this  knowledge  got  from  schoolmasters?  No.  From 
posture-masters?  Certainly  not.  From  elocutionists?  Not  at  all. 
They  may  advance  the  telling  of  the  knowledge,  but  the  whole  of  the 
knowledge  is  from  above.  I  send  you 

Wwith  my  own  office,  1  give  you  my  own  knowledge — exquisite 
warrant,  title. 

Mark  xvi.  15  :  "  Go  ye  into  the  whole  world,  and  preach  the  Gospel 
to  every  creature."  He  does  not  say,  "  I  hope  you  will  go."  Impera- 
tive mood — "Go."  Where?  Into  the  whole  world.  "I  command 
you  to  go  and  preach  !"  He  does  not  say,  "I  hope  you  will  preach — 
it  will  be  a  good  thing  to  preach;"  but  he  commands  to  preach. 
What  ?  The  Gospel  I  have  published.  To  whom  ?  To  every  creature. 
You  have  my  authority,  fully  given  me  by  my  Father.  You  have  all 
the  knowledge  you  want  for  the  purpose  given  from  my  Father.  The 
whole  world  is  your  diocese — the  field  for  your  labors ;  all  mankind 
your  congregation.  Go,  therefore, '  in  consequence  of  your  commission 
and  ycur  knowledge,  into  the  whole  world.  Do  not  leave  a  corner  of 
the  earth  which  shall  not  be  the  scene  of  your  labors.  The  boundless- 
ness0 of  the  whole  horizon  alone  is  the  terminus  of  your  exertions. 
Preach  the  Gospel  to  every  creature.  The  Church,  therefore,  is  com- 
manded to  send  missionaries  all  over  the  world.  All  mankind  are 
subjects  of  then*  official  duties,  and  all  mankind  are  clearly  called  upon 
to  listen.  The  man  who  stays  at  home  and  reads  does  not  discharge 
his  duty  ;  he  is  not  listening  to  the  official  man.  I  do  not  care  what 
he  reads.  He  is  not  in  the  order.  We  shall  presently  learn  that  it 
will  not  do.  We  have  now  gone  so  far  as  to  show  the  commission 

>  John  chapter  15  and  -verse  15.— 275. 

«  I  will  make  It.— I  usually  vocalize  Em  and  Tee,  when  shortened  for  mate 
it  and  take  it,  with  a ;  but  I  haTe  always  found  them  legible  when  the  vowel  hu 
been  omitted. 

1 Q  l  8°»  therefore— 264,  and  E.  5,  2. 

2  boundlessness.— 232,  7,  and  E.  1,  c.    This  mode  of  expressing  -lesanett, 
*nd  also  the  mode  of  expressing  -fuUne*s,  were  introduced  by  the  author. 


b. 

KEY    TO   THE   KEPOKTIXG   EXERCISES.  99 

granted  to  us,  and  the  knowledge  that  is  communicated.  "Go  ye, 
therefore,  and  teach  all  nations."  You  are  to  do  the  whole  command 
—you  are  to  teach  them.  Do  not  allow  any  one  to  teach  them  without 
your  control.  You  are  the  shepherds.  Allow  no  man  to  feed  your 
lambs  without  your  sanction.  Do  not  ask  leave  of  the  wolf  to  visit 
your  flock.  Do  not  ask  permission  of  the  wolf  to  go  into  your  fold. 
' '  Go  and  teach  all  nations,  teaching  them  to  observe  all  things  what- 
soever I  have  commanded  you."  By  this  time  I  think  everybody 
begins  to  see  that  these  men  have  the  Gospel  in  their  mouths,  and 
that  all  are  commanded  to  go  and  learn  of  them.  It  would  be  absurd 
to  go  and  teach  all  nations,  unless  they  were  called  upon  to  learn  from 
them,  so  that  the  command  to  go  and  teach  all  nations  is  the  same  as 
commanding  all  nations  to  learn  from  them,  for  there  can  not  be 
teachers  without  learners — they  are  correlative  words.  It  may,  per- 
haps, be  said  that  it  is  possible  for  me  to  go  astray.  No,  1  can  not  as 
long  as  I  hold  my  place  under  the  bishop,  and  he  is  in  communication 
with  the  Pope. 

Matt,  xxviii.  19  :  "Go  ye,  therefore,  and  teach  all  nations,  teaching 
them  to  observe  all  things  whatsoever  I  have  commanded  you,  and 
behold  I  am  with  you  all  days,  even  to  the  consummation  of  the 
world."  Go,  teach  them  ;  I  am  not  the  teacher,  but  I  am  with  you 
while  you  are  teaching.  He  does  not  say  I  am  with  you  in  the  present 
tense  ;  ''I  am  always  with  you,  not  a  year  or  two,  but  until  the  con- 
summation of  the  world."  This  language3  is  exceedingly  important. 
All  mankind  is  your  congregation,  and  the  tenure  of  your  office  until 
eternity  begins — until  my  Father  seizes  the  pendulum  of  time,  and 
stops  the  last  moment  of  time,  and  eternity  begins.  What  has  the 
Father  ever  done  like  that  ?  Compare  that  with  the  sun,  the  moon, 
and  the  tides.  I  expect  that  this  rule  will  be  as  far  beyond  the 
Father's  natural  philosophy  as  the  soul  is  beyond  the  body. 

Timothy  ii.  7.  St.  Paul  said  to  Timothy,  a  bishop,  "Timothy, 
I  am  appointed  a  preacher  and  an  apostle,  a  doctor  of  the  Gen- 
tiles in  faith  and  truth."  He  had  before  listened  to  Christ's  doc- 
trine. I  may  be  asked,  Did  the  Apostles  understand  Christ  as  speaking 
to  them  ?  Did  they  comprehend  him  perfectly  in  knowing  that  they 
were  appointed  to  this  office?  Yes.  St.  Paul  said  to  Timothy,  "I 
am  appointed  a  preacher  [to  the  whole  world,  of  course]  and  a  doctor 
in  the  faith  and  truth."  The  priests  may  make  a  mistake  in  politics. 
Probably  they  will, 

*  tills  language. — The  vowel  a  is  here  inserted  so  that  this  phrase  may  not 
be  read  for  what  this  outline  more  frequently  represents— this  thing. 


100         SECOND   STANDABD-rHONOGRAPlIIC   KEADEK. 

because  they  are  not  educated  in  politics.  But  they  can 
not  make  a  mistake  in  faith.  "  I  am  with  you."  He  stands 
by  our  side.  Now  I  come  with  double  force  to  you.  You  take  that 
Gospel  and  read  it  at  home,  and  you  have  no  guarantee  that  you  can 
not  go  astray  ;  but  there  is  guarantee  that  the  priest  from  whom  you 
arc  to  learn  can  not  go  astray.  He  is  with  him.  He  is  with  me  while 
I  am  talking.  You  come  here  to  learn,  and  you  have  a  guarantee  that  j 
I  can  not  make  a  mistake.  This  is  the  place  where  the  guarantee  is 
given,  and  nowhere  else.  "Timothy,  my  associate  bishop,  I  am 
appointed  a  preacher."  Paul  was  appointed  by  Christ,  of  course.  "  I 
am  appointed  a  doctor,  too,  but  I  am  limited  to  faith  and  truth  ;  I  am 
appointed  to  discharge  all  the  duties  that  concern  faith  aiul  truth. 
The  Gospel,  the  fountain  of  truth,  is  my  thesis."  Paul  appointed 
others,  and  they  others  again,  and  they  others  again,1  and  here  we  are. 
"Timothy,"  he  said  again,  "the  things  you  have  heard  from  me 
before  many  witnesses,  the  same  commend  to  faithful  men,  wno  wilJ 
teach  others  also."  The  Father  appointed  Christ,  two ;  Christ  ap- 
pointed Paul,  three  ;  Paul  appointed  Timothy,  four  ;  Timothy  appointed 
others,  five  ;  and  they  appointed  others,  six ;  and  so  in  succession 
down  to  us. 

2  Tun.  iv  1 :  "  Timothy,  I  charge  you  before  God  and  Jesus  Christ, 
who  shall  judge  the  living  and  the  dead,  and  I  charge  you  by  His 
coming  and  by  His  kingdom,  to  preach  the  Word."  "  Preach "- 
imperative  mood.  "  Be  constant,  hi  season  and  out  of  season,  reprove 
and  rebuke,  but  do  it  in  all  patience."  "  I  call  upon  you  in  the  name 
of  the  Trinity  to  recollect  your  primal  duty,  to  preach."  We  see  now 
the  original  power  communicated  from  the  Father,  communicated  all 
along  by  the  regular  links  of  a  chain. 

OA  '  and  they  others  ognlii.— There  la  furnished  here  an  example  of 
^"  progressive  degrees  of  phrase-writing.  A  number  o!  words  which  might 
be  written  without  lifting  the  pen  may  not  be  so  expressed  until  it  occurs  a  second 
time.  Then,  not  only  may  these  words  be  expressed  by  a  single  phrase-sign,  but 
contractions  may  take  place  in  the  sign  if  it  occurs  frequently.  This  can  not  be 
better  illustrated,  perhaps,  than  by  an  example  that  occurred  on  a  preceding 
page— the  phrase,  tt'extem  Roman  Empire.  The  first  time  this  occurred  it  would 
very  probably  be  written  \Vayss-Ren-Ar  Men:Emp  Kay  -  Emjiir<-  being  disjoined 
because  the  junction  might  heetn  somewhat  difficult.  The  next  time  it  occurred 
Emirire  would  probably  be  join ed.  Then,  the  next  time,  to  avoid  the  somewhat 
difficult  junction,  fttrman  would  be  contracted  to  Ar;  and  for  such  a  phrase,  occur- 
ring several  times,  such  a  contraction  would  not  impair  legibility.  But  suppose 
that  it  occurs  many  times  more— it  will  very  probably  be  contracted  (in  itccoi dance 
•with  the  principles  of  287,  E.  2.  b)  to  Way.for  Western)-A^for  Kumaii>Ei.ip(for 
Empire),  i. «.,  W.  E.  Emp. 


KEY   TO   THE   EEPOKTING   EXERCISES.  101 

2  Cor.,  v.  20:  "We  are,  therefore,  ambassadors  for  Christ."  We 
stand  in  His  shoes.  Paul  was  a  scholar  before  he  was  called.  He 
learned  how  to  write  well  before  the  pen  of  inspiration  was  put  into 
his  hands.  "For  Christ  we  are  ambassadors."  What  a  beautiful 
phrase  !  What  is  an  ambassador  ?  The  representative  of  the  queen  or 
king,  so  far  as  the  authority  is  communicated.  "  Go  to  America,"  the 
Queen  said  to  the  ambassador,  "and  represent  me.  You  can  not 
declare  war  and  make  peace,  but  so  far  as  I  give  you  power  plenipoten- 
tiary, you  have  the  power  of  the  Queen  there  pro  tanto.  '  '  As  ambassa- 
dors of  Christ,  we  hold  His  place.  We  are  all  ambassadors,  exhorting 
as  if  God  spoke  in  our  mouths.  So  we  hold  the  place  of  Christ,  and 
our  exhortation  is  the  language  and  speech  of  God  the  Father.  There 
is  no  more  presumption  for  the  bishop  to  say  that  he  occupies  such  a 
position  than  for  the  chancellor  to  say,  "I  am  chancellor;"  for  the 
general  of  the  army  to  say,  "  I  am  commander-in-chief  ;"  for  the  man 
in  the  navy  to  say,  "I  am  chief  admiral  aboard  this  fleet."  I  have 
the  power  ;  I  am  the  ambassador  of  Christ,  and  God  speaks  in  my 
mouth.  Turn  the  whole  Bible  through,  and  you  can  not  find  such 
another  document.  This  is  the  fullest  document  in  the  whole  Bible. 
Here  is  text  after  text,  title  after  title,  power  after  power*  —  an  accu- 
mulation of  titles  and  warrants  for  fear  this  great  case  should  lose  any 
importance  for  want  of  the  largest  amount  of  accumulative  evidence. 

Luke  x.  16  :  "He  that  heareth  you,  heareth  Me;  he  that  despiseth 
you,  despiseth  Me."  Now  the  Greek  is  better  than  the  English.  It 
says,  "  he  who  hears  you,  hears  Me."  It  is  not  "who  understands 
you,  understands  Me."  The  Greek  word,  akouo,  signifies  what  falls  on 
the  ear.  So  perfectly  are  you  identified  with  me  in  my  office. 

nThe  moment  your  words  fall  upon  the  ear  of  a  man,  he  is  to 
take  them  as  my  words.     Hearing  and  understanding  in  Greek 
are  two  words. 

'O  dxojwv  Cfiwv,  l(jiou  dxo^si*  xa«  6  d&ST&v  ufta::,  IJAJ  ddsTS?'  o  os 


2  text  after  text,  title  after  title,  and  power  after  power.  —  276; 

p.  63,  xix.  of  this  Reader. 

O1   J  Pronounced,  according  to  the  usual  modification  of  the  Erastnian  pro- 
™*  nunciation,  Ho  akuron  hu'mon,  em-ui  akurl;  kl  ho  ath'eton  hu'mas  cure 
atlreti  ;  hO'de  enve  ath'eton,  atlreti  ton  apgstllan-ta  me. 

No  system  of  stenography  can  enable  a  reporter  to  tnke  down  accurately  a  pas- 
sage as  long  as  this,  in  a  language  with  which  he  is  not  nearly  us  familiar  as  his 
own  ;  arid  hardly  then,  it'  the  reporter  has  not  accustomed  himself  to  writing  it,  espe- 


102         8ECOXD   STANDARD-PIIOXOGRAPHIC   READEB. 

The  moment  your  words  barely  fall  upon  the  ear  of  a  man,  that 
moment  he  hears  my  words.  He  who  despises  you  despises  me.  I  am 
so  identified  with  you  that  my  words  are  your  words,  and  a  contempt 
of  you  is  a  contempt  of  me. 

St.  Paul  uses  a  beautiful  text,  which  you  will  not  forget.  "Faith," 
he  says,  "  comes  by  hearing."  He  docs  not  say  faith  comes  by  under- 
standing. If  you  look  at  that  text,  there  will  be  found  more  than  at 
first  strikes  the  eye.  Faith  comes  by  hearing.  How  can  a  man  hear 
unless  somebody  speaks  to  him  ?  Faith  does  not  come  by  reading  nor 
by  reasoning.  No;  it  comes  from  the  speaking  of  the  accredited 
orator. 

Galatians  iv.  13:  "I  preached  the  Gospel  heretofore,  and  you 
received  me  as  the  angel  of  God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus."  That  answers 
all  the  objections  you  can  propose.  Did  the  Apostles  understand  what 
Christ  said?  Yes.  But  did  the  people  understand ?  Yes.  Gal.  iv.  13  : 
' '  I  preached  the  Gospel  heretofore,  and  you  received  me  as  the  angel 
of  God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus."2 

cially  if  it  should  bo  uttered  rapidly.  But  a  reporter  who  has  some  general  knowl- 
edge of  one  or  more  foreign  languages,  especially  if  he  has  a  quick  ear  for  discrim- 
inating sounds,  may  usually  take  a  few  words  at  the  beginning,  and  the  concluding 
word,  and  thus  be  able  to  complete  the  extract  by  referring  to  the  proper  books. 

In  this  case,  I  very  well  knew  ihat  the  spe»ker  gave  the  Greek  for  Luke  x.  16, 
which  be  had  just  before  quoted,  and  upon  referring  to  my  Greek  New  Testament, 
I  there  found  it;  and  the  Greek  letters  being  quite  familiar  to  both  eye  and  hand, 
it  was  easy  to  insert  the  quotation  in  my  transcript. 

The  student  will  naturally  ask,  What  would  have  been  done  if  you  had  not  been 
so  fortunate  as  to  get  a  clew  to  the  passage?  I  will  answer,  that  usually,  unless 
you  desire  and  are  able  to  be  very  accurate,  you  would  omit  such  passages;  and  in 
the  majority  of  cases,  such  omission  would  be  no  detriment  to  a  report ;  for,  often 
such  passages  are  thrown  in  more  for  a  display  of  learning  than  to  add  anything 
by  the  way  of  idea  or  illustration.  Take  this  very  case.  How  much  is  lost  of  real 
force  of  argument,  or  of  idea,  by  omitting  this  Greek  quotation,  and  the  sentences 
introducing  ii?  Thus— 

Luke  x.  16:  "lie  that  heareth  you  hearelh  me  ;  he  that  despiseth  you  despiseth 
me."  Now  the  Greek  is  better  than  the  English.  It  sa\s,  "lie  who  hears  you 
hears  me."  It  is  not  "  who  understands  you  understands  me."  The  Greek  word, 

ukouo,  signifl-  s  *  hat  falls  or  the  enr The  moment  your  words  barely  fall 

upcn  the  ear  of  a  man,  that  moment  he  hears  my  words. 

a  I  preached  the  Gospel— Christ  Jesus. — When  a  reporter  knows  that 
he  can  have  easy  access  to  a  work  from  which  quotations  are  made,  especially  if 
the  quotations  are  l»ng,  and  particular  reference  is  made,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  take 
the  beginning  and  concluding  words,  and,  of  course,  the  reference  to  chapter,  page, 
or  section,  if  such  a  reference  is  given.  The  extracts  can  be  afterward  found  and 
inserted  in  the  transcript.  (l.»  If  the  quotations  are  short,  and  the  reporter  wishes  to 
save  himself  the  trouble  of  reference,  he  may  take  the  complete  quotation,  (c)  But 
where  the  same  quotat'on  is  made  several  times,  it  would  not  only  be  unnecessary 


KEY   TO    THE    REPORTING   EXEKCISES.  103 

Now,  you  have  the  warrant  given  by  the  Father  and  by  the  Son  ; 
you  have  Paul's  assertion  that  the  people  of  Galatia  received  him  as 
if  Christ  spoke.  Now,  have  I  got  out  of  my  way  ?  Have  I  said  a 
word  too  much  when  I  said  you  were  called  upon  to  hear  me  ay 
if  Jesiis  Christ  addressed  you?  Not  from  any  importance  of  mino. 
but  from  the  office  I  hold.  What  the  people  of  Galatia  did,  the 
people  of  Brooklyn  ought  to  do.  We  have  here  the  Galatians  proving 
to  your  face  my  proposition.  They  received  Paul  as  the  angel  of 
God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus.  Would  they  not  receive  Timothy  in  the 
same  way,  and  the  men  appointed  by  Timothy,  wherever  that  Cross  i.s 
seen. 

Mark  xvi.  16:  "  Go,  and  preach  the  Gospel,  and  he  that  believetli 
and  is  baptized  shall  be  saved,  and  he  that  belicveth  not  shall  be  con- 
demned." 

Here  we  have  Christ  saying,  "  Go  and  preach" — two  commandments 
— "  and  he  that  belie veth  and  is  baptized  shall  be  saved,  and  he  that 
believeth  not  shall  be  damned."  "Do  you  say  that  if  the  people 
believe  the  Gospel  in  the  mouth  of  this  man,  that  they  are  saved,  and 
that  if  they  believe  not  they  shall  be  damned  ?"  Yes.  Can  there  be 
any  mistake  in  their  believing  ?  No.  How  could  God  attach  damna- 
tion as  a  penalty,  unless  they  were  wrong  in  rejecting  it  ?  Could  that 
j  faith  be  fallible  ?  No  ;  how  could  eternal  fire  be  attached  to  disbeliev- 
i  ing  it.  if  it  were  uncertain  or  erroneous  ?  Therefore,  it  is  a  clear  case 
that  since  Christ  attaches  eternal  damnation  to  the  man  who  does  not 
believe  my  words,  that  my  words  must  be  as  infallible  as  his  own 
existence.  How  could  He  punish  you  by  an  eternal  penalty,  if  my 

to  take  it  in  full,  1/nt  injwlicioux ;  for  the  oftener  the  quotation — as,  for  instance,  a 
text — is  rcpea'ed,  the  more  rapidly,  as  a  usual  thins,  is  it  uttered ;  and  it  may  easily 
happen  that  it  would  be  uttered  so  rapidly  that  the  reporter  would  fall  so  far  be- 
hind the  speaker  in  taking  ir  down,  that  he  might  lose  the  following  sentence, 
(f?)  It  is  no  discredit  to  a  reporter  that  he  can  not  take  down  a  long  and  rapidly- 
u  tiered  passage,  quoted  from  the  dUtinct  memory  or  read  from  a  book  :  for  it  may 
be  utt;.T;.-d  too  rapidly  to  be  reported.  A  practiced  speaker  can  read  with  tolerably 
good  articulation  from  400  to  45:)  or  500  words  in  a  minute — varying,  of  course,  with 
different  individuals  and  the  different  matter  spoken.  It  is  not  a  necessary 
part  of  the  business  of  a  reporter  to  insert  such  extracts,  though  it  is  usually  done, 
when  it  can  be  conveniently,  the  reporter  being  paid  for  them  at  the  same  rate  as 
for  other  matter. 

When  tbe  reporter  intends  to  insert  the  quotations,  if  they  are  long,  he  should 
usually  take  not  only  the  beginning  and  concluding  words,  but  a  number  of  words 
or  sentences  in  the  body  of  the  quotation,  for  the  purpose  of  more  readily  finding  or 
identifying  the  extract.  This  will  be  the  more  necessary  when  the  reference  to 
page,  etc.,  has  not  been  given;  and  it  is  sometimes  more  necessary  when  the  refer- 
ence lias  been  given ;  for  the  reference  is  not  unfrequently  wrong. 


104         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

words  could  possibly  lead  to  error?  How  could  He  attach  lasting 
punishment,  in  His  imperial  anger,  for  not  believing  my  words,  unless 
my  words  were  beyond  all  cavil,  perfectly,  constitutionally,  and  meta- 
physically infallible  ?  Eternal  damnation,  therefore,  being  the  penalty 
attached  to  any  one  not  believing  my  declaration, 

OO  proves  that  my  words  must  be  as  infallible  as  the  very  throne 
^^  on  which  the  Father  sits.  You  hear  it.  Argue  •,vith  me,  but 
do  not  reject  what  I  say.  Am  I  talking  anything  but  what  is  in  the 
Gospel  ? 

Matthew  xviii.  17  :  "He  that  will  not  hear  the  Church,  let  him  be 
as  the  heathen  and  the  publican."  If  he  will  not  hear  the  Church,  I 
command  you  to  look  upon  him  as  a  heathen  and  a  publican — a  man 
of  the  most  atrociously  bad  morals.  The  man  who  will  not  hear  the 
Church — that  sole  crime  constitutes  him  per  se  a  man  destitute  of  all 
religion,  a  man  of  the  most  degraded  character. 

Matthew  xvi.  19  :  "Peter,  who  do  men  say  that  I  am  ?  They  say 
that  you  are  Christ.  Blessed  art  thou,  Simon  Barjona,  because  neither 
flesh  nor  blood  told  you  that,  but  my  Father  who  is  in  heaven." 
Simon  was  his  name,  but  after  he  fell  everybody  doubted  him.  Oh, 
they  said,  Peter  can  never  be  depended  upon  ;  he  betrayed  his  Master. 
You  recollect  the  text.  Peter,  said  Christ,  Satan  attempted  to  take 
you  from  Me,  but  I  prayed  that  your  faith  shall  never  fail.  Your 
name  was  Simon  ;  I  now  call  you  Peter — Petros,  a  rock  within  a  rock. 
Peter,  you  will  yet  betray  me,  and  the  world  will  think  you  are  a 
coward,  and  not  to  be  depended  upon ;  but  I  want  to  show  you  that  I 
can  raise  a  man  of  the  most  despicable  character  into  the  most  exalted 
position  of  a  human  being.  I  will  now  satisfy  the  world  by  changing 
your  name.  I  will  lift  you  up  and  call  you  Petros,  a  rock  within  a 
rock.  You  can  never  be  touched  by  the  waves  that  beat  against  the 
rock.  You  are  in  the  rock.  I  am  the  rock.  Peter,  thou  art  Peter  ;  I 
give  you  the  keys  of  all  my  possessions.  I  give  the  whole  flock  into 
your  hands ;  feed  the  lambs,  the  little  children,  and  feed  my  sheep, 
the  parents,  secondly.  The  whole  flock,  the  sheep  and  the  Limbs,  are 
under  your  control,  and  lo !  I  am  with  you  all  the  days,  even  to  the 
consummation  of  the  world,  and  the  gates  of  hell  shall  not  prevail 
against  you. 

Peter,  I  have  given  that  statement  to  all  the  bishops  through  Paul. 
I  said  I  would  teach1  them.  I  am  now  with  you  particularly.  I  give 

c\c\  1 1  sold  I  would  teach.—  Won!/!  is  here  joined  as  a  book,  upon  the 
""  principle  of  joining  it  to  the  horizontal  <.7><i-tick.    See  *nl,  E.  6,  a,  which, 


KEY   TO    THE    REPORTING   EXERCISES.  105 

you  a  promise  by  yourself.  I  give  you  supreme  authority  over  the 
whole  Church.  Here  are  the  keys  of  the  whole  kingdom  of  heaven. 
You  have  all  the  keys  and  all  the  flock,  and  lo  !  I  am  with  you  always, 
to  the  consummation  of  the  world.  Peter,  there  shall  be  but  one  fold, 
.'.  iJ  <>ue  shepherd,  even  as  there  is  one  faith,  one  Lord,  one  baptism.2 
There  shall  be  but  one  fold  and  one  shepherd,  and  you  are  the  shepherd 
over  all  my  flock.  The  oneness  of  faith  is  the  same  as  the  oneness  of 
God.  There  is  no  change  in  God,  and  there  is  none  in  faith.  God 
iao  yesterday,  to-day,  and  forever  ;  the  same  in  faith.  God,  one  ; 
faith,  one.  No  other  idea  in  the  whole  universality  of  human  thought 
can  tell  you  what  the  oneness  of  faith  is  except  comparing  it  to  the 
oneness  and  unchangeableness  of  God  himself.  "  Lo  !  I  am  with  you 
always,  and  the  gales  of  hell  shall  not  prevail  against  you."  I  there- 
fore put  my  document  out  of  my  hand,  and  I  ask  you  is  the  death  of 
Christ  itself  put 

O  *>  in  stronger  language  than  that  ?    No.    Is  it  oftener  expressed  ? 

•*'  No.  Is  it  clearer?  No.  If  you  can  not  believe  that,  therefore, 
how  can  you  believe  in  the  death  of  Christ,  or  His  life,  or  resurrection  ? 
What  do  you  depend  on  for  salvation  ?  The  death  of  Christ.  Is  it 
clearer  than  the  document  I  have  read  ?  No.  Is  it  fuller  ?  No.  It 
is  one  plain,  legal,  constitutional,  didactic  document.  Do  you  believe 
it  as  firmly  as  the  cross?  I  certainly  do.  Therefore,  instructed 
according  to  all  this  testimony,  the  testimony  of  God  the  Father,  the 
Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost,  you  must  believe  me  or  any  man  in  my 
place.  It  is  a  plain  statement— clear,  constitutional  language.  I 
therefore  submit  to  you — Is  the  death  of  Christ,  or  His  resurrection, 
or  His  cress,  told  with  a  more  accumulated  evidence  than  the  clear 
infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church?  You  say,  certainly  not.  You 
believe,  then,  we  are  infallible?  I  do.  Now,  I  conclnde  my  argu- 
ment. I  call  the  Pope,  and  I  put  him  in  a  large  chair,  and  I  say, 
Sir,  you  will  please  take  the  presidency  of  this  meeting.  Then  I  call 
all  the  bishops,  and  I  put  them  in  one  large  congregation  before  the 

to  he  sufficiently  comprehensive,  should  read—"  The  reporter  joins  a  brief  Way 
like  an  En-hook  to  tlie  ticks  ami  dashes  in  the  direction  of  Pee,  Kay,  or  Ray  to  add 
viluit  or  iconlil ;  thus,  Pentoid',  of  whtit;  Pentoid-,  to  what;  Bendoid1,  all  woulil ; 
Kentoid1,  and  what;  Kentoid^,  and  would  (sometimes,  in  plirase-wriling,  Iicouhl); 
Rentoid'-',  he  would." 

2  bnpti.Mti — The  word  one  is  here  omitted  twice,  and  a  space  left  for  it.  As 
it  is  not  a  "  clause"  or  "  a  few  words"  omitted  •each  time,  neither  a  dash  nor  comma 
is  substituted ;  a  little  more  space  than  usual  between  words  serving  to  suggest  the 
omitted  word.  See  276. 


106          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Pope.  I  say  there  is  Peter,  and  here  are  Paul  and  the  apostles  and  all 
the  bishops  of  the  Church.  Then  recollect  the  promise  that  he  is  with 
them.  The  Father  has  given  a  particular  promise.  The  Father  has 
baid  it,  the  Sou  has  avowed  it,  and  the  Holy  Ghost  declares  it.  Now, 
I  call  upon  that  whole  assembly  to  tell  me  what  is  the  faith.  They 
do ;  and  when  they  have  got  up  a  document  and  signed  it,  I  believe 
that  is  infallible  as  surely  as  Christ  is  alive.  And  if  you  can  put  that 
out  of  my  head,  I  do  not  believe  one  word  of  the  Book. 


THE  AMERICAN  BIBLE  SOCIETY. 

[An  Address  by  the  Rev  Dr.  William  J.  Sassnett,  of  Alabama,  delivered  of  the 
Academy  of  Music,  at  the  celebration  of  the  Forty-fourth  Anniversary  (I860) 
of  the  American  Bible  Society.  Reported  in  full  by  Andrew  J.  Graham,  for 
the  Society.*} 

THE  Rev.  WILLIAM  J.  SASSNETT,  D.D.,  of  Alabama,  offered  the  fol- 
lowing resolution : 

"  Resolved,  That  this  Society  is  entitled  to  the  hearty  co-operation  of 
every  philanthropist  and  Christian,  because,  in  the  principles  upon 
which  it  is  based,  and  in  its  grand  design,  it  prominently*  represents 
those  great  central  ideas  which  most  concern  the  highest  and  best 
interests*  of  the  human  race." 

Sir,  I  offer*  this  resolution  because  I  believe  it  expresses  a  great  truth 
in  connection  with  the7  enterprise  which  it  is  the  object  of  this  occa- 
sion to  serve,  a  truth  which  ought  always  to  be"  clearly  set  forth*  and 
urged  whenever  we  attempt  to  announce  to  the  world  the  grounds 

8  The  officers  of  the  Society,  in  the  pamphlet  containing  the  Anniversary  ad- 
dresses, credit  the  reporting  in  the  following  words:  "We  are  indebted,  for  the 
excellent  repons'of  several  of  these  addresses  [all  the  unwritten  ones],  to  the  skill 
and  fidelity  of  the  reporter,  Mr.  Andrew  J.  Graham." 

•  prominently.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  ADMOSISH. 

4  and  best  Interests.— The  inconvenience  or  impossibility  of  joining  a  word 
to  a  preceding  loop  Is  frequently  obviated  by  the  application  of  the  principle  of  286) 
3,  as  in  this  case. 

•  I  offer. — Fer1  for  offer  is  here  vocalized,  to  distinguish  it  from  form  (Fer1*; 
though  there  is  no  special  need  of  its  being  vocalized. 

i  In  connection  tvlth  the.— 250,  3,  example  With. 

•  always  to  be.— p.  61,  v.  of  this  Reader. 

•  clearly  set  forth. — p.  63,  xvii.  of  this  Reader. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  107 

upon  which  this  enterprise  rests  its  claim  to  public  sympathy,  confi- 
dence, and  co-operation. 
Sir,  the  only  conflict10  in  the  world 

O^  is  between  ideas — good  ideas  and  bad1  ideas,  true  ideas  and 
^  *  false  ones; 

The  American  Bible  Society  is  based  upon8  and  represents  ideas — ideas 
vast,  all-comprehending  ;  as  wide  as  is  the  sphere  of  human  interest, 
us  enduring  as  human  destiny. 

It  is  because  it  does  represent  these  ideas,  and  for  their  vast  dynamic 
and  aggressive  operations,  that  I  shall  claim,  to-day,  that  this  Institu- 
tion is  one  of  the  grandest  agencies  of  usefulness  that  the  world  now 
affords  ;  that  it  is  an  honor  to  the  American  people  ;3  and  that  it  de- 
serves the  countenance  and  the  co-operation  of  every  man  arid  woman 
who  wishes  to  turn  his  or  her  influence  to  the  very  best  account  in  ad- 
vancing the  happiness  of  mankind. 

What,  now,  are  these  ideas  ?  To  some  of  them,  at  least,  I  propose 
to  call  the  attention  of  this  assembly  to-day.  The  first  great  idea 
upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society4  is  based  is  this,  that  if  the 


i»  only  conflict.— p.  112,  E.  7,  b.  Conflict  is  here  contracted  in  analogy  with 
the  contraction  for  effect.  See  these  words  in  the  Dictionary. 

ni   J  ami  bad — 259,  E.  1,  b. 

Abased  upon.— The  impossibility  of  joining  Pen  (upon)  to  the  loop  of 
based  (Beest)  is  obviated,  in  order  to  secure  a  desirable  phrase-sign,  by  omitting 
the*.  236,  S. 

8  American  people. — If  this  phrase  were  occurring  often,  I  should  omit  one 
of  the  hooks ;  that  of  American  (Em-Ken),  of  course,  rather  than  of  people;  for 
this  can,  on  account  of  its  larger  number  of  consonants,  best  suffer  contraction 
without  impairing  its  legibility. 

«  American  Bible  Society.— The  engraving  of  this  speech  will  illustrate 
flnely  progress! re  contractions.  "When  this  phrase  occurred  above,  it  was  written 
in  full,  with  the  exception  that  the  settled  contraction  (Em-Ken)  for  American  was 
used.  In  this  case  the  principle  of  237,  E.  2,  ft,  is  acted  upon  in  writing  Bee  for 
Bible,  and  Es  for  Society,  the  latter  being  written  through  Bee  to  secure  greater 
legibility.  Let  me  write  as  though  I  were  des'-ribing  the  actual,  the  wonderfully- 
rapid  and  marvelous  operations  of  the  mind  in  reporting.  "  This  phrase  will  prob- 
ably occur  ma"V  times  in  this  speech.  The  next  time  it  occurs  I  will  fully  apply 
the  principle  for  forming  special  contractions  (237,  E.  2,  1>),  writing  Em  for  Ameri- 
can, Bee  for  Bible  (to  be  expressed  by  widening  Em),  and  Es  for  Societr/."  Sup- 
pose that  the  form  EmbtEs  has  been  employed  one  or  more  times,  the  Es,  for  sake 
of  legibility,  being  written  through  Emv/;  the  practiced  reporter  will  next  seek 
to  save  the  lifting  of  the  pen,  and  will  join  Es  to  Emb,  trusting  that  memory  and 
the  context  will  enable  him  to  read  correctly  this  very  brief  contraction,  by  which 


108         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGBAPHIC   READEB. 

world  is  ever  redeemed  it  must  be  by  external,  supernatural  agencies. 
There  have*  always  been  two  leading  opinions  or  theories  in  the  world 
in  reference  to  religion.  The  one  is,  that  the  world  contains  or  em- 
braces within  itself*  all  needed  elements  for  its  own  development,  and 
progress,  and  salvation  ;  and  that  whatever  has  ever  been  achieved  of 
good,  and  whatever  has  pertained  to  the  world's  progress,  is  due  alone 
to  these  elements  embodied  within  its  own  organization.  The  other 
is,  that  the  world  has  within  itself,  that  man  has  within  himself,  no 
good,  and  that  all  that  is  redeeming  and  saving  must  come  from  a 
higher  and  supernatural  source  ;  and  that  whatever  exists,  that  what- 
ever may  exist,  whatever  may  have  the  appearance  of  improvement,  of 
growth  and  progress,  outside  of  these  agencies  and  elements,  but  leaves 
man  upon  the  same  dead  level  of  moral  depravity  and  alienation  from 
God.  These  two  theories,  we  say,  have  ever  been  in  conflict ;  and 
perhaps  this  conflict  was  never  waged  with  more  violence  than  in  the 
present  day.  The  activity  of  the  human  reason,  the  degree  in  which 
all  those  fields  of  thought  have  been  occupied  which  come  under  the 
supervision  of  the  mere  reason,  the  activity  which  is  given  to  human  I 
elements,  has  developed  a  vain  philosophy,  in  the  form  of  rationalism,  | 
naturalism,  and  secularism,  which  is  at  this  time  imperiling  the  faith 
of  God's  people,  antagonizing  the  divine  and  supernatural  as  regards 
our  faith,  and  as  regards  what  promotes  the  weal  of  our  race.  I;  there 
ever  was  a  time  when  God's  people  should  fall  back  upon  the  super- 
natural, and  should  express  their  faith  in  God  and  his  sovereignty  ;  if 
there  ever  was  a  time  when  they  should  bring  out  this  faith  in  a  spir- 
itual' and  personal  God,  and  rely  upon  agencies  that  are  alone  spiiitual 
and  supernatural  for  the  accomplishment  of  these  great  results,*  now 
is  that  time.  If  there  ever  was  a  time  when  we  should  cling  to  those 

he  will  save  as  much  as  the  writing  of  Bible  and  Society  every  time  the  phrase 
"American  Bible  Society"  occurs. 

*  There  Have.— Dherf "  is  a  word-sign  for  tliert  liare,  introduced  into  Stand- 
ard Phonography,  in  accordance  with  the  license  of  182,  R.  1,  ti. 

*  within  Itself. — See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  ITSELF. 

*  In  a  spiritual.— p.  16S,  E.  10. 

e  these  grent  results.— The  essential  principle  of  §  171,  1,  2,  3  and  4,  of  the 
Compendium  is  that  An  initial  circle  •implies  an  A  --hunk  irfien  written  differently 
from,  the,  simple  circle.  No  caso  of  joining  a  Spcr  sign  t"  a  preceding  curve  was 
there  specified,  because  there  is  no  instance  of  it  in  a  simple  word;  but  guch  join- 
ing is  sometimes  useful  in  phrase-writinir,  as  in  the  present  phrace-sign.  In  thi» 
sign,  las  must  be  understood  to  imply  un  Ar-hook  (\n  accordance  with  the  principle 
Just  mentioned);  for  otherwise  it  i-hmikl  have  been  on  the  upper  side  of  Get,  in 
accordance  with  tbe  rule  for  writing  the  circle  between  two  .-troki-s.  27,  4. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  109 

institutions  whose*  design  is  to  hold  up  the  supernatural  and  the  divine 
in  opposition  to  a  vain,  worldly  philosophy,  now  is  that  time.  I  glory 
in  the  American  Bible  Society  because  it  is  such  an  Institution,  and 
that,  as  far  as  it  speaks  at  all,  it  speaks  for  God  — a  personal  God — for 
the  bupeiiUvUiiai,  for  the  divine,  for  the  spiritual,  in  all  the  agencies 
which  look  to  the  growth  and  the  salvation  of  man.  Let  us  cleave  to 
it,  therefore.10  If  all  else  were  banished,  if  it  were  to  lose  all  other 
agencies,  still,  as  far  as  the  American  Bible  Society  lives,  and  speaks, 
and  has  influence  in  the  world  at  all,  it  is  for  the  truth,  for  evangelical 
truth,  for  a  spiritual  religion,  for  the  Bible  in  opposition  to  the  tide 
of  secularism  and  a  vain,  wicked  philosophy,  that  is  now  doing  so 
much  to  damage  the  faith  and  practice  of  God's  people. 

Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is  based  is, 
that  if  the  world  is  ever"  Christianized  it  must  be  by  the  active  instru- 
mentality of  those  among  whom  God's  oracles  are  deposited.  While 
the  Society  clings  to  the  supernatural,  while  it  recognizes  the  fact  that 
the  world  is  redeemed  and  saved  only  through  the  agency  of  God — a 
personal,  spiritual  God — yet  at  the  same  time  it  does  not  hold  that  it 
is  by  an  invisible,  miraculous  agency  that  the  world,  after  :ill,  is  to  be 
redeemed  and  saved,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  human  ;  but  that  God  ex- 
pects every  man  and  woman  to  contribute  to  the  great  work  of  redeem- 
ing the  human  race.  The  American  Bible  Society  looks  abroad  ;  and 
while  it  does  not  controvert  the12  question  or  the  position  as  to  whether 
the  heathen  are  to  be  saved  outside  of  religious  life,  the  advantages 
and  teachings  of  the  Bible,  or  not, 13  yet  it  proclaims  that  more  heathen 
will  be  saved,  under  any  and  all  circumstances, 

9  wliose. — In  the  Old  Phonography,  who,  icJione,  and  rchom  were  written  re- 
spectively, Jedoid2,  Zee3,  Em3.  In  Standard  Phonography  this  confusion  is  re- 
moved by  writing  who  and  whom  by  Jedoid-,  and  forming  a  sign  for  whose  by  the 
general  rule  f.>r  writing  derivative  sign-words.  Please  read  p.  142,  It.  5. 

>«  to  it,  tlu-rcf.irc — 264,  R.  5,  2.  This  instance  of  the  <idvant:igeous  com- 
l>i<>ation  <>f  two  <-f  the  pocnl.ar  principles  of  Standard  Phonography  ouulit  not,  to 
be  passed  ovtr  without  remark.  Compi.n-  it  with  the  Old-Phonographic  expres- 
sion, Petoid^-Tee  Dher--Ef.  See  Part  Y.  of  the  Hand-Book,  §  11. 

H  1.4  ever.— 246,  4. 

15  mid  while  it  tlocs  not  controvert  tkr.—  The  practiced  reporter  may 
imply  conti'ii-r),  etc.,  as  well  as  con-m,  by  writing  the  remainder  of  ihe  word  par- 
tially under  the  preceding,  as  in  this  phrase-sign. 

i3  or  ii  t. — The  defect  of  tiie  Old  Phonography  in  providing  only  a  compara- 
tively sl"w  expression  for  the  rapidly-spoken  phrases  Of  not,  Btt.  »../,  is  remove'' 
in  Standard  Phonography  by  adding  an  En-hook  (for  not)  to  Of  (IVjoid1)  sin  i  But 
(Tetoid2).  See  p.  71,  Noie  ifl,  of  this  Header,  as  to  the  liability  of  such  signs  (as 
Tentcid,  ett.,)  conflicting  with  other  signs. 


110          SECOND    STANDARD-niONOGKAPIIIC    READF.E. 

O  K  with  the  light  of  the  Bible  than  without  it.  It  claims  that 
'****  it  would  lead  them  to  a  higher  standard1  than  they  have  under 
heathenism.  It  claims,  too,  that  the  salvation  which  would  be  real- 
ized under  the  teachings  of  the  Bible  is  a  nobler  arid  broader  salvation, 
brought  about  under  the  full  development  of  God  Almighty's  agency 
for  the  world's  salvation.  It  claims,  too,  as  a  matter  of  some  conse- 
quence, to  banish  from  heathen  lands  the  cruelties,  the  immoralities, 
and  depravities  that  prevail,  and  to  let  in  among  them  the  light, 
knowledge,  and  happiness  which  flow  from  the  prevalence  of  a  lofty 
Christian  civilization.  Hence  it  is  that  they  are  eager  to  disseminate 
Christianity  in  heathen  lands.  The  Bible  Society  is  founded  upon  the 
idea  of  aggression  in  these  quarters;  and  the  Bible  Society  looks 
around  and  sees  these  dark  places  that  are  in  our  cities  and  towns, 
these  precincts  of  deadness  and  darkness  where  there  is  no  God  recog- 
nized, and  where  the  people  are  sunken  in  their  ignorance  and  de- 
pravity, and  feels  that  if  these  people  are  ever  enlightened  and  re- 
deemed, it  must  be  through  the  instrumentality  of  those  outside  of 
them  whom  God  has  enlightened,  and  with  whom  He  has  deposited 
his  Sacred  Oracles.  Hence  it  is  that  the  American  Bible  Society  is 
engaged  in  the  work  of  translating  the  Bible  into  all  languages  ;  and 
0  how  it  presents  itself  to  my  mind,  that  from  this  Society  a  Bible  is 
to  go  out  adapted  to  all  people  in  all  climes  and  all  circumstances — a 
Bible  translated  for  the  hordes  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  South  America, 
and  the  islands  of  the  sea — our  own  Bible  translated  so  as  to  be  acces- 
sible to  all  these  people.  The  Bible  Society  is  aggressive  in  its  rela- 
tions in  other  respects.  Look  at  its  system  of  colportage,  with  agents 
scattered  all  over  this  land  ;  and  that  is  one  reason  why  I  have  loved 
the2  Bible  Society  so  long.  I  have  seen*  those  agents  moving  about 
here  and  there,  over  those  plains  and  mountain  sides,  carrying  the 


or   i  standard — 286,  4. 

»  I  Have  lovctl  thc.-'When  the  Vee-hook  of  Teflokl1  (for  fhate^  will 
prevent  the  formation  of  a  desirable  phrase-sign,  the  h»ok  (for  have)  may  be  omit- 
ted, and  hare  be  supplied  by  the  context,  especially  if  it  be  made  a  rule  that  Tetoid1 
for  /  is  followed  by  have,  WHENEVER  SOME  OTHER  DIRECTION  OF  THE  I-TICK  MIGHT 
HAVE  BEEN  AS  CONVENIENTLY  EMPLOYED.  Hence,  Tetoid  in  this  phrase-sign  is  to  be 
read  I  hurt,  because  /  al  me  might  have  been  even  more  conveniently  ropresi-nt- 
e<l  liy  Petoid.  (1i)  But  observe  that  this  rule  does  not  apply  in  the  phrase-signs 
TotoidMVuh,  I  would-;  and  Tetoid'-Retoid,  1  shoubi. 

3  I  hnve  seen.— (<f)  Hurt  in  this  phrase  mnxt  and  may  readily  be  supplied 
to  comp'ete  the  sense,  and  is  omitted  under  the  principle  of  250,  9.  (I)  There  is  no 
difficulty  in  supplying  hare  preceding  ANY  past  participle  whose  outline  differs 
from  the  past  tense  (or  time),  as  do  the  following : 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  Ill 

Word  of  God,  and  scattering  it  among  the  destitute  of  the  land.  I 
love  the  Bible  Society  because  I  see  that  it  is  aggressive,  that  it  is  mis- 
sionary, and  that  it  has  planted  itself  upon  the  true  missionary  prin- 
ciple of  the  Gospel— that  of  carrying,  by  its  own  active  efforts,  the 
Bible  into  all  lands  and  countries. 

Again,  we  could  not  get4  along,  and  I  tell  our  people  so,  in  our  mis- 
sionary operations  without  the  Bible  Society.  We  send  our  mission- 
aries to  China,  to  Tuckey,  and  elsewhere  over  the  earth ;  and  what* 
can  we  accomplish  there,8  but  for  our7  reliance  upon  the  American 
Bible  Society  ?  It  is  our  strong  earthly  arm  of  support.  And  so  ha 
reference  to  our  missionary  fields  among  these  thinly-populated  sections 
of  our  country,  and  in  the  dark  places  of  the  land,  we  could  not 
achieve  anything  without  the  agencies  which  are  furnished  from  the 
American  Bible  Society.  Therefore  it  is,8  that  I  regard  this  Society  as 
based  upon  a  great  idea,  the  missionary  idea,  the  idea  of  aggression, 
the  idea  of  putting  into  the  hands  of  God's  people  a  Bible  to  be  carried 
anywhere  on  the  face  of  the  earth.  And  in  this  view,  how  the  import- 
ance of  the  American  Bible  Society  is  magnified ! 

Look  around.  For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  this  world,  the 
bars  of  intolerance  everywhere  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  are  broken 
down.  In  Europe,  by  reason  of  international  association  and  commer- 

Arisen  Driven  Laden  Stolen 

Awaked  Eaten  Lain  Striven 

Beaten  Fallen  Kisen  Sworn 

Been  Flown  Seen  Taken 

Bitten  Forsaken  Shaken  Thrown 

Blown  Frozen  Blain  Told 

Borne  Gone  Smitten  Torn 

Broken  Grown  Sown  "Woven 

Chosen  Hidden  Spoken  Written. 

Drawn  Known 

(cl  BUT  OBSERVE,  that  have  should  not  be  omitted  when  it  can  be  conve- 
niently expressed  by  a  hook,  as  in  writing  I  have  chosen,  Teftoid'-Chays-En;  1  have 
taken,  Teftoid'-Ten ;  I  have  known,  Teftoid'-Nen ;  I  have  gone,  Teftoid'-Gen. 
4  we  could  not  get.— p.  62,  xi.  of  this  Eeader. 
«  and  what.— See  p.  104,  221,  of  this  Eeader. 

•  can  we  accomplish  there. — p.  169,  K.  12.  See,  also,  p.  81,  94,  of  this 
Eeader. 

i  for  our. — The  general  rule  is  that  when  our  is  added  by  an  Ar-hook,  the 
word  to  which  it  is  added  should  retain  its  position;  thus,  Ber1,  by  our;  Ter3,  at 
onr;  Cher2,  which  our.  But  in  a  few  cases  the  new  sign  takes  the  position  cf  the 
added  word  for  the  sake  of  distinguishing  it  from  some  other  sign,  as  Fer3,  for  our, 
to  distinguish  it  from  Fer2,  from. 

»  therefore  It  Is.— p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Eeader. 


112          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

cial  communication  ;  in.  Asia,  China,  Japan,  the  islands  of  the  sea, 
anywhere  and  everywhere  over  the  face  of  the  earth,  the  Bible  and 
missionaries  may  now  have  access.  Why  should  not  this  excite 
within  us  a  desire  to  do  more  than  we  have  ever  done,  that  we  may 
make  our  labors  in  this  respect  commensurate  with  our  responsibili- 
ties! Oh!  if  there  ever  was  a  time  when  God's  people  should  be 
aroused,  it  is  now.  The  world  is  open  to  us ;  the  Protestant  nations 
of  the  world  have  acquired  an  ascendancy  over,  the  balance  of  man- 
kind, such  as  gives  us  unlimited  access  to  all  portions*  of  the  race. 
The  old,  effete,  worn-out  religions  are  actually  turning  loose  their 
millions  to  our  embrace,  and  they  are  ready  to  receive  the  Word  of 
God,  and  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  furnish  this  agency  with  the  means, 
and  soon  all  over  the  earth  the  Bible  of  God  will  circulate. 

O  /?  Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is  based 
^"  is,  that  if  the  Christian  religion  is  to  save  the  world,  the  Bible 
is  the  grand  instrumentality  by  which  this  work  is  to  be  accomplished. 
No  matter  what  other  means1  may  be  relied  upon,  and  there  should  be 
other  means,2  there  must  be  church  organization  ;  there  must  be  min- 
isters ;  there  must  be  prayer  and  faith  ;  yet,  after  all,  God  expects  us3 
to  employ  and  rely  upon  the  Bible,  as  one  of  the  chief  agencies  by 
which  this  great  work4  is  to  be  accomplished  ;  and  I  tell  you  that  we 
honor  God  most  when  we  honor  his  Bible  most ;  when  we  rely  upon 
his  Word  most,  when  we  bring  it  out,  and  give  prominence  to  it  in  all 
our  church  movements  and  evangelical  enterprises,  we  honor  God  most, 
and  put  ourselves  where  we  open  most  of  the  channels  through  which 
God's  grace,  and  love,  and  mercy  shall  flow  out  upon  the  world.  Now, 

•  to  all  portions. — This  phrase  is  constructed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  But  it  (Tetoid-'-Tee).  Pletoid2-Pee  is  distinguished  from  Pel3  by  the  fact 
that  the  El-ho"k  is  barely  above  the  line,  when-as  on  Pel3  it  would  be  considerably 
higher;  for  half  of  Pel3  would  be  above  the  line. 

o/*  i  what  other  means.— p.  62,  xiii.  of  this  Reader.     Here  this  rapid 
^"  means  of  expressing  attier  not  only  secures  speed  in  writing  this  rconl, 

but  avoids  two  liftings  or  else  inconvenient  junctions  that  would  otherwise  have 

been  required. 

a  and  there  should  lie  other  means.— In  this  phrase  otlte-  might  have 
been  joined  in  the  Old  Phonography  by  Dher ;  but  the  novel  Standard-Phonographic 
principle  of  lengthening  to  express  other  secures  a  great  gain.  See  DHB  in  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

»  God  expect*  US.-2J4,  K.  8, 1 ;  182,  K.  2. 

«  this  great  worlt.— See  p.  108,  24s,  of  this  Header. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  113 

I  believe  in  employing  all  other  instrumentalities  that  are  recognized 
as  right  and  proper.  I  believe  that  it  is  right  to  have*  a  religious 
literature.  I  believe  that  we  should  rely  upon  all  these  subordinate 
agencies  ;  but  I  am  not  sure  that,  in  our  reliance  upon  these,  we  have 
not  too  much  excluded  the  Bible  as  the  grand  instrumentality  in  the 
conversion  of  the  world.  I  am  not  so  sure  but  that  we  ignore  and 
disregard  this,  God's  own  light,  too  much  in  all  our  efforts  to  save  the 
world.  The  church  must  embody  it.  Not  that  it  should  rely  less 
upon  other  means6  and  agencies  which  it  employs,  but  that  it  should 
use  this  more.  I  would  to  God7  that  all  our  denominations  were  more 
active  in  the  circulation  of  the  Bible.  I  would  that  they  felt  more 
that  it  is  God's  Word,  and  that,  whatever  other  means  they  may  em- 
ploy, this  is  the  light  of  heaven,  and  the  instrumentality  which  God 
recognized  in  the  accomplishment  of  this  grand  design.8  Now,  the 
American  Bible  Society  is  based  upon  this  grand  idea.  Its  whole  effort 
is  to  circulate  God's  Word  ;  in  so  far  as  it  has  any  design,  any  efficiency 
at  all,  it  is  to  give  prominence  to  the  Bible  ;  it  is  to  give  it  a  world- 
wide circulation.  And  if  the  views  I  have  presented9  in  regard  to  it 
be  true,  then  is  the  American  Bible  Society  an  important  agency,  one 
that  we  should  all  love,  and  should  co-operate  with— one  which  we 
should  seek  to  develop,  and  make  more  efficient  th:m  it  ever  has  been 
in  all  the  past.  I  have  had  my  heart  often  glow  with  enthusiastic  de- 
light, when  traveling  up  and  down  the  country,  going  into  log  cabins10 
to  preach,  and  finding  a  Bible,  and  upon  opening  it,  seeing  the  imprint 
of  the  American  Bible  Society.  It  is  this  agency,  I  tell  you,  which 
gives  prominency  to  the  Bible  over  American  lands.  Depend  upon  it, 

s  that  It  Is  right  to  have.— ffuve  is  here  added  by  the  Vee-hook  (201, 
B.  4),  and  to  is  implied.  See  p.  61,  v.  of  this  Reader. 

6  upon  other  means.— p.  169,  E.  li.    See  Standard-Phonographic  Diction- 
ary, DHR. 

7  I  -would  to  God — This,  and  thousands  of  similar  phrases — exclamations, 
modifying  clauses,  etc.,  which  are  rarely  found  in  books,  but.  which  sire  frequently 
introduced  into  extemporaneous  discourses,  and  spoken  with  great  rapidity-  are 
expressed  in  Standard  Phonography  with   ease  and  rapidity,  which  in  the  Old 
Phonography  were  not  only  expressed  with  confusing  slowness,  but  not  unfre- 
quently  with  considerably  less  speed  than  other  portions  of  speech  le.-s  rapidly 
uttered. 

s  this  grand  design — See  p.  108,  24",  of  this  Eeader. 

8  I  have  presented.— See  p.  11",  N.  2,  of  this  Eeader. 

1°  lo^  cabins.— The  combination  Gay-Kay  or  Kay  Gay  is  comparatively  diffi- 
cult, and  in  phrase-writ  ng  the  n-porter  may  usually  obviate  the  dilliculty  by  omit- 
ting out.  of  tie  consonants;  writing,  for  instance,  E:-Gay-Bens  (('.  «.,  log-'abinz)  for 
Ivg  Kill/ins, 


SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

if  you  were11  to  shut  out  the  American  Bible  Society,  and  the  circulation 
which  it  gives  to  the  Bible,  and  banish  it  from  the  land,  awful  would 
be  the  vacuum.  It  does  more  to  give  prominence  to  the  Bible,  to 
bring  out  a  pure  evangelical  religion,  to  resist  the  tide  of  infidelity 
and  secularism,  I  verily  believe  before  God,  than  any  other  one  dis- 
tinct, isolated  agency  in  all  this  country.  I  love  the  Society,  because 
I  have  seen  its  fruits  away  off  yonder ;  I  have  seen  what  it  has  <lu  :e 
in  circulating  the  Bible  among  the  poor  and  destitute,  by  means  of  the 
efficient  agency  system  which  it  has  employed  in  those  dark  and  desti- 
tute places.  I  feel,  before  God,  that  if  you  have  money,  and  menus, 
and  influence,  and  want  to  do  good,  and  lay  up  treasure  in  heaven  ;  if 
you  want  to  make  an  impress  for  God,  in  your  day  and  generation, 
stand  nobly  by  the  American  Bible  Society. 

Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is  based  is  this, 
that  the  Christian  religion  is  the  world's  great  civilizer ;  and  the  great 
blunder  of  the  world  is  in  trying  to  find  cut  the  best  means  to  govern 
men,  whereas  the  true  idea  should  be  to  teach  men  to  govern  them- 
selves. We  look12  around  over  the  country ;  we  look  at  our  states- 
men, our  legislators,  and  political  philosophers,  and  we  see  them 
moving  heaven  and  earth  to  control  men;  but  the  American  Bible  So- 
ciety seeks  to  reverse  the  policy,  and  proceeds  upon  the  opposite  idea, 
that  of  training  and  teaching  men  to  govern  themselves — that  of  in- 
fusing the  elements  of  intelligence,  knowledge,  wisdom,  and  virtue, 
by  which  they  can  regulate  and  direct  themselves  and  their  own  con- 
duct in  life.  Now,  I  hold  that  this  is  a  great  idea,  important  to  be 
looked  to.  A  great  drawback 

07  upon  our  civilization,  in  these  dark  places,  these  precincts  of 

^  '    our  country,  is  that  they  are  made  up  of  men  so  depraved, 

so   wretched,    and   so   ignorant  as  to   be   incapable1   of  self-govern- 


11  If  you  were — A  distinction  might  be  made  between  you  were  and  you 
would,  by  writing  Yeh'weh  for  the  former  and  Yulrwuh  for  Hie  latter.  But  this 
distinction  is  of  little  consequence,  since  the  context  will  suffice  to  distinguish  them 
if  both  are  written  alike;  and  besides,  to  write  them  both  alike  (Yulrwuh  or  Yen'- 
well,  according  to  convenience)  is  following  the  analogy  of  Wayweh1  for  ice  were 
or  we  icould;  Wulrwuh1  for  what  icould,  what  were. 

>3  -we  look.— p.  168,  R.  3,  1>.  (//)  Rnuml  or  around  may  be  joined  to  Look  by 
writing  Lay-Krend.  See  LOOK  in  the  Stumlard-l'honographic  Dictionary. 

(yj  i  Incnpnble.— The  Corresponding  Style  contraction,  Kay-Bel3,  for  rapa- 
"  '   Ife,  may  itself  suffer  commotion  In  ihc  Reporting  Stylo,  being  written  Kay- 
Bee3,  the  affix-sign  for  -lie  being  used  because  more  rapid  than  Bel.    This  plan  of 


KEY   TO   THE   KEPOKTING   EXKKCISES.  115 

ment.2  Educate  and  elevate  the  mind,  so  that  they  can  judge  and  de- 
termine for  themselves,  and  all  is  well,  and  peaceful,  and  happy  in 
society.  Now  the  Christian  religion  we  hold  accomplishes  this  object. 
It  teaches  men  that  the  body  was  made  for  the  soul.  It  teaches  men 
t"'at  ths  doctrine  of  their  immortality,  and  that  the  great  end  of  life, 
is  to  subject  their  lower  nature  to  the  higher  nature.  The  Christian 
religion,  I  boldly  maintain,  is  the  author  of  all  that  is  truly  good  and 
benevolent  in  human  nature ;  that  outside  of  the  teachings  of  the 
Christian  religion  all  is  selfishness ;  that  our  ideas  of  charity,  and  true 
benevolence,  and  love  for  our  race,  we  get  pnly  in  the  Christian  re- 
ligion. It  infuses  in  its  ethics  the  true  idea,  regulates  the  conscience, 
the  interior  man,  and  so  enables  him  to  govern  himself.  Now  the 
American  Bible  Society  acts  upon  the  idea  that  the  great  honor  of  this 
country  is  the  schoolmaster  and  the  preacher ;  not  so  much  govern- 
ment, law,  and  legislation.  The  Bible  Society  holds  itself  aloof  from 
other  objects  and  plans ;  but  it  seeks  to  elevate  the  individual  man,  to 
give  the  Bible  a  wide  circulation  among  the  poor  and  the  ignorant,  to 
train  them  for  God  and  eternity.  Remember  that  when  you  are  help- 
ing the3  Bible  Society,  you  are  helping  on  your  race  in  the  true  way  of 
progress,  elevation,  and  salvation.  When  you  help  on  other  causes, 
it  may  or  may  not  have  this  effect ;  but,  depend  upon  it,  just  in  pro- 
portion as  you  sustain  the  American  Bible  Society,  you  sustain  those 
elements  and  agencies  which  look  toward  the  real,  positive  progress 
of  your  race  ;  you  are  doing  that  which  elevates  the  mind,  which  im- 
proves the  conscience,  which  makes  men  capable  of  self-government 
and  advancement  toward  true  civilization ;  for  there  is  no  political 
economy,  no  true  political  philosophy,  no  true  government,  or  system 
of  morals,  but  such  as  flows  immediately  out  of  the  teachings  of  the 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  Religion  is  not  merely  intended  to  save  the 
soul  in  heaven,  but  to  elevate  the  human  race,  and  give  it  a  loftier 
civilization  even  here,  and  we  should  look  upon  it  in  this  light ;  and 
because  the  Bible  Society,  without  hindrance,  without  modification, 
without  let,  without  restriction  or  qualification,  is  consecrated  to  this 
one  end,  I  love  it,  and  pray  for  it,  and  co-operate  with  it.4 

writing  -lie  by  the  affix-sign  may  be  adopted  by  the  reporter  in  many  cases  where, 
ill  the  Corresponding  Style,  Cel  would  be  and  could  be  conveniently  employed. 

2  self-government.— p.  113,  E.  14. 

3  \»  lieu  you  are  Helping  tile.— See  p.  61,  iv.,  4,  of  this  Ecader. 

«  with  It.— It  is  desirable  that  With  it  shall  be  written  Dhet1,  in  analogy 
with  For  it,  If  it,  etc.  To  more  readily  distinguish  it  from  that  (I)hot'),  it  may  be 
•written  with  the  bottom  of  the  Dhet  resting  on  the  upper  line,  or  Dhet0  (1.  «.,  Dhet 
wro),  as  ill  the  engraving. 


116          SECOND    STAXDAED-PHOXOGRAPHIC    EEADER. 

Allow  me,  as  I  have  never  had  the  pleasure  of  meeting  with  you  upon 
this  platform  before,  and  as  I  have  come  a  long  way,  to  present  one 
more  idea.  The  next  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is 
based,  and  which  it  repi'escnts  prominently,  is  that  of  Christian  unity 
—  the  entire  oneness  of  God's  people  everywhere.  Look  at  its  organ- 
ization. When  was  there  ever  a  time  when  I  met  my  brethren  as  I 
meet  them  here  to-day  —  brethren  of  all  the  glorious  old  communions 
that  I  have  been  hearing  about,  and  thinking  about,  and  praying 
about  so  long  ?  Oh,  brethren  !  my  heart  is  glad  to  meet  you  here  upon 
this  platform  to-day.  The  organization  embodies  representatives  from 
the  prominent  churches  of  our  land.  Its  basis  is  such  that  all  love  it, 
though  we  may  to  some  extent  put  different  constructions  upon  some 
parts  of  it  ;*  we  all  recognize  it  as  the  same  Holy  Book  —  as  coming 
from  God  —  the  grand  supernatural  light,  to  teach  a  benighted  world 
the  way  to  God  and  heaven.  Upon  that  platform  we  are  all  united. 
We  are  all  united  in  the  enjoyment  of  its  effects  ;  for  your  heart  glows; 
with  gratitude  and  enthusiasm,  as  mine  does,  whenever  I  see  the  dis- 
plays of  God's  work  anywhere.  We  glory  in  the  effects  wrought  by 
the  American  Bible  Society.  If  it  has  been  anywhere  the  instrument- 
ality of  bringing  some  poor  unlettered  man  or  woman  to  God,  we  re- 
joice in  it,  no  matter  where  it  is,  in  what  part  of  the  country  it  is. 
Whenever  we  hear  that  good  has  come  from  this  Society,  we  all  delight 
and  rejoice  in  it.  Brethren,  in  this  day  of  mutual  antagonism,  of 
strife,  of  divisions,  and  to  some  extent  sectarian  bitterness,  0  I  rejoice 

OO  that  there  is  a  platform  upon  which  we  can  all  stand;  I  rejoice 
^U  that  I  can  meet  my  brethren1  here  of  the  various  denomina- 
tions of  the  country  ;  that  here  we  are  all  one,  all  alike  standing  on 
the  same  common  foundation  ;  I  rejoice  in  this  platform.  Coming,  as 
I  do,  from  Alabama,  I  rejoice  to  meet  upon  this  platform  my  brethren 
from  the  great  State  of  New  York,  from  New  England,  and  the  North- 
west, and  to  feel-  that  here  we  are  one,  bound  by  the  same  love  to  God 
and  the  same  love  to  man,  and  destined  to  the  same  common  heaven, 
and  with  the  same  common  Bible.  I  rejoice  to  meet  them  where  I 

*  up  .11  some  pni  ts  of  It  —  p.  169,  K.  12.  The  shortest  expression  for  il.ii 
phrase  in  Hie  Old  Phonography  would  have  been  Pen2  Sein2  Pee'-'-E(Us  Petoid1- 
Tee. 


OO  i  my  brethren.  —  24G 
»ni.d  to  feel.—  Awl 


my  brethren.  —  24G,  1. 

iTetoid)  is  hrre  prefixed  to  Frl«  for  t.->  feel.  Tlie 
context  will  prevent  this  being  read  to  n-n  (Teloid4),  especially  when  the  reporter 
practices  wriving  to  <t-n  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  p.  til,  v.  of  this  Ueuder. 


KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  117 

l>elieve  there  is  a  cementing  and  uniting  power  in  the  American  Bible 
Society.  I  feel  it,  and  know  it ;  and  here,  my  brethren,  standing  upon 
the  same  common  platform,3  with  the  same  common  Bible,  and  destined 
to  the  same  common  heaven,  can  we  not  have,  and  will  we  not  have, 
the  same  common  country.  I  feel  and  believe  that  we  will  press  on- 
ward in  the  great  work  of  spreading  God's  religion  over  all  the  face  of 
the  earth.  These  are  aggressive  ideas  ;  they  are  wide,  all-comprehen- 
sive, dynamic  ideas,  and  we  should  adhere  to  the  American  Bible  Soci- 
ety, because  it  is  based  upon  and  represents  these  aggressive  ideas. 

Brethren,  I  love  to  feel,  when  I  am  engaged  in  any  cause,  that  it  is 
an  expansive  cause,  and  expanding  world-wide,  all-embracing ;  that  it 
has  love,  and  mercy,  and  hope.  I  love  to  think  that  it  has  a  platform, 
whereon  all  the  lovers  of  the  good  and  true  can  stand.  And  it  is  for 
these  reasons,  among  others,4  that  I  love  the  American  Bible  Society, 
and  I  shall  carry  home  with  me  a  strong  affinity*  and  love  for  it,  be- 

3  tipoii  tlie  same  common  platform.— p.  169,  R.  12.    Form,  is  usually 
contracted  in  t!ie  Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonography,  Em  being  omitted. 
See  INFORM,  UNIFORM,  REFORM,  MULTIFORM,  TRANSFORM,  DKFOEM,  PERTORM,  PLAT- 
JORM,  etc.,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.    These,  in  compliance  with 
the  great  principle  of  UNIFORMITY  observed  throughout  Standard  Phonography, 
have  analogous  contractions. 

4  r.moit  ;  others. — See  DHR,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

8  affinlly.—  The  cases  in  which  contraction  is  resorted  to  in  the  Reporting 
Style  of  Standard  Phonography,  in  writing  words  ending  with  ty,  may  be  specified 
as  follows 

1.  In  many  words  the  consonant  (t)  of  the  termination  tij  is  expressed  by  shorten- 
ing a  letter;  thus,  Ent--Gret,  integrity;  Pet-Blet,  compatibility;  Tee'-'-Telt,  total- 


Flet1,  faulty  ;  Tiiret1,  authority ;  Met1,  mighty;  Si  ns-Ket,  sincerity ;  Mct-Ret3,  ma- 
turity ;  Em-Jert1,  majority;  Em'-Nert,  minoriU  ;  Slay-Bret,  celebrity;  Ef-Kelt, 
faculty ;  Pers2-Pret,  prosperity ;  Emter2-Let,  materiality  ;  Fer'-Let,  formality  ;  Lay-- 
Kelt, locality. 

2.  The  termination  ty  is  frequenlly  omitted  when  the  preceding  part  of  the  word 
is  sufficient  to  characterize  it,  especially  when  a  rather  difficult  junction  would  be 
avoided;  thus.  Veld1  (i.e.,  valid),  validity;  Ray3-Ped  (i.  «.,  rapid),  rapidity;  Kay- 
Ped1  (i.  «.,  cupid),  cupidity:  Tee'-Med,  timid-ity ;  Emtern3  (i.  e.,  matern),  mater- 
nity ;  Fertern2  (t.  e.,  fratern),  fraternity ;  Ner^Em  (i.  f.,  enorm),  enormity ;  Lay1- 
Brel  if.  f.,  liberal)  liberality;  Rel1,  real-ity;  Mori2,  morality. 

S.  When  ty  forms  a  part  of  the  termination  -l-ti/or  -/•-<;/,  (1)  these  terminations  are 

(a)  either  implied,  by  disjoining  the  preceding  lett>  r,  ac  in  the  Corresponding  Style 

(232,  8),  (!/}  or,  what  is  more  usual  in  ihe  Reporting  Style,  absolutely  omitted,  the 

prei-ec/iiif/ litter  not  being  diyainfd ;  time,  Efs^Bee,  feasibility ;  Sens-Bee,  sens  - 

i   hility;  Fels2-Bce,  flexibility;   Per--Bee,  probability ;   Per'-Pee.  property;   Pet-sQ- 

••  Toe,  posterity ;  (2)  or,  if  more  convenient,  the  principle  of  specification  1  or  2  is  em- 


118          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

cause,  since  coming  up  here,  I  see  elements  of  development,  of  prog- 
ress, of  love,  of  expansive  benevolence,  such  as  enlist  me,  more  than 
ever,  in  this  glorious  cause.  May  God  help  you,  and  the  groat  city  of 
New  York,  to  stand  by  this,  your  glorious  institution,  that  reflects  so 
much  honor  upon  you*  all  over  this  laud.  May  God  help  you  to  sus- 
tain it,  that  its  influence  may  go  out  all  over  this  land,  and  that  it 
may  go  onward,  extending  further  and  further,7  until,  in  its  benevo- 
lent embrace,  it  covers  the  whole  earth. 


POLITICS. 

SPEECH  OF  MR.  GAULDEN,  OF  GEORGIA. 
Delivered  in  the  Baltimore  Democratic  Convention,  in  I860. 

MR.  PRESIDENT*  AND  GENTLEMEN  OF  TIIE  CONVENTION — I  come  here  from 
the  State  of  Georgia,  indorsed  by  that  State  Convention  and  by  the 
Convention  at  Charleston.9  This  ought  surely  to  give  me  ti  right  to  be 
heard  before  you  ;M  and  though  I  have  not  joined  my  fortune"  in  the 
State  of  Georgia  either  to  the  House  of  York  or  to  the  House  of  Lan- 
caster, '- 1  feel  that  I  have  a  right  here  to  speak  to  the  great  Democratic 
party  of  thela  United  States.  I  have  been  pained,  as  a  citizen  of  these 

ployed,  as  in  writing  prosperity,  majority,  minority,  locality,  faculty,  mattri* 
ality. 

•  upon  yon.— p.  169,  R.  12. 

7  further  ami  farther.— 276,  c. 

8  Mr.  Prrttldfiit — The  word  president  is  here  contracted  topres.,  under  the 
principle  of23T,  E.  2. 

»  at  Chnrlfstoii.— Cherlst  is  a  special  contraction  for  Charleston.    237,  R.  8. 

>»  before  you.- p.  60,  iv.  4. 

"  my  fortune.— 246,  1. 

ij  I.aix  a.-:tf  .—236,  4.  Kay  or  Gay  may  very  frequently  be  omitted  when 
coming  between  Ing  and  other  letters ;  as,  Linguist,  El-Ingst ;  sanguine,  Sirg'en2 ; 
links.  El-Ing(-Kay>-Iss. 

—  Ucuicx-rntir  party.— This  phrase  will  occur  several  times  :n  the  course 
of  this  speech  ;  and  it  will  fa'rly  be  entitled  to  a  special  contraction.  But  I  hare 
given  it  h-  re  as  it  would  probably  be  written  when  first  occurring.  ('/)  The  re- 
porter who  seeks  to  save  himself  unnecessary  labor  will  very  shortly  afttr  com- 
mencing to  report  a  convention,  a  law  case,  a  debate,  and  even  shoriei  matltrs.  de- 
vise special  contractions  for  phrases  which  he  perceives  will  be  of  frequent  occur- 
rence, units*  the  ordinary  expression  should  be  sufficiently  short.  See  237,  11.  t. 


KEY    TO   THE   REPORTING    EXERCISKS.  119 

United  States,  to  see  the  elements  of  disruption  and  disorganization 
which  seeni  to  prevail  in  the  midst  of  this  most  intelligent  assembly. 
I  have  fult14  that  the  experiment  of  the  capability  of  man  for  self- 
government  was  about  to  prove  a  failure  here,  and  that  the  Genius  of 
Liberty  was  about,  shrieking,  to  leave  the  world.  But  I  trust  that  this 
may  be  the  darkest  hour  just  before  the  day  ;  and  th-».t  from  these  ele- 
ments of  discord  the  representatives  of  the  intelligent  American  people1* 
1  >:re  assembled  may  be  able  to  devise  a  plan  upon  which  the  great 
Democratic  party  of  the  United  States1*  may  be  united,  and  that  we 
will  yet  add  another"  victory 

OA  to  the  many  we  have  already  achieved. 

^  v  I  am  an  advocate  for  maintaining  the  integrity  of  the  Na- 
tional Democratic  party  ;  I  belong  to  the  extreme  South  ;  I  am  a  pro- 
slavery  man1  in  every  sense  of  the  word — aye,2  and  an  African  slave- 
trade  man.3  [Applause4  and  laughter.]  The  institution  of  slavery,  as 

i*  I  have  felt  that  the — rave  is  implied  here  in  accordance  with  the 
principle  of  p.  110,  252,  of  this  Eeader. 

i5  intelligent  American  people.— The  Em-hook  of  both  intelligent  and 
American  is  omitted  here  for  the  sake  of  a  desirable  phrase  sign.  p.  169,  B.  12,  b. 

i«  Democratic  parly  of  the  United  Stales — In  this  phrase-sign,  the 
Em  of  Dee-Em  (for  Democratic)  is  widened  to  add  I'  for  part//.  Of  is  implied  by 
joining,  p.  61,  vi.  of  this  Eeader. 

^  add  another — See,  in  the  Standard  Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHR,  2, 
and  3,  c. 


29 


I  nm  a  pro-slavery  man. — The  reporter  of  a  political  convention, 
*•*}  or  debate,  or  any  legislative  body,  of  the  present  day,  will  find  that  the 
word  ulavery  will  be  of  such  frequent  occurrence  as  to  deserve  a  special  contrac- 
tion. It  may  be  written  Slay,  as  in  pro-slavtry,  Per2-Slay;  anti-slavery.  En-Tee2- 
Slay  ;  slave  States,  Slay2-Stets ;  slavery  in  the  Territories,  S!ay2-En-Ter-Ters ; 
slave-breeding,  Slay2-Bred:(' iny') ;  slave-trading,  Slay2-Tred:('ing');  slaveholder, 
Slay2-Layder;  slave  State,  Slay2-Stct;  slavery  extension  Slay2-Sten. 

2  aye — 102,  E.  3;  98;  102. 

3  African   slave-trade  man. — African,  in  accordance  with  the  principle 
of  special  contraction  (23T,  E.  2,  I),  is  here  contracted  to  Fer. 

*  applause.— This  sign  for  applause  is  distinct  from  Phonoaraphy,  and  hr.s 
the  advantage  of  being  quite  rapid,  and  at  the  same  lime  constructed  upon  a  plan 
which  may  be  followed  in  indicating  cheers,  /</**««,  etc.,  th<>  first  longhand  letter  of 
the  word  being  written,  and  the  pen  swept  around  it,  as  in  the  case  of  a  in  the  i  n- 
graving.  (b)  The  modifiers,  "great,"  '•immense,"  "tremendous,"  " prolonged," 
etc..  may  be  sufficiently  indicated  by  writing  the  letter  large,  "great  applause,"  for 
Instance,  by  a  made  quite  large — and,  of  course,  with  the  line  around  it.  (c)  111 
transcribing,  the  words  appluune,  etc.,  should  be  treated  as  independent  sentence*, 


120          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

I  have  said*  elsewhere,  has  done  more  to  advance  the  prosperity8  and 
intelligence  of  the  white  race,7  and  of  the  human  race,  than  all  else 
together.  I  believe  it  to  be  founded  upon  the  law  of  Nature,  and  upon 
the  law  of  God  ;*  I  believe  it  to  be  a  blessing  to  all  races.  I  believe  that 
liberty  would  not  truly  exist  in  this  Western  world9  except  by  main- 
taining the  integrity  of  the  great  National  Democratic  party.10  [Ap- 
plause.] As  for  this  "  Irrepressible  Conflict"  party,"  with  their  serried 
ranks  now  ready  to  march  down  upon  us,12 1  have  no  faith  in  it,  be- 
cause it  is  founded  in  anarchy,  in  everything  anti-republican,  in  every- 
thing that  is  opposed  to  human  progress;  while  I  understand  the  idea 
of  the  great  National  Democratic  party  to  be  non-intervention  in  its 
broadest  sense.13  [Applause.]  Now,  my  Northern  friends,14 1  do  not 
know  that  I  can  do  anything  in  Georgia  to  reconcile  these  matters ; 
but  whatever  I  can  do,"  I  will  do.  [Applause.] 

I  say  that  our  friends  in  Georgia,  who  are  crying  out  for  protection 
to  slavery  in  the  Territories,  are  advocating  a  mere  theory,  a  mere  ab- 
straction, a  thing  that  is  not  and  can  not  be.  They  would  do  much 
better  if  they  would  demand  protection  from  the  General  Govern- 

and  inclosed  in  brackets  to  distinguish  them  from  the  words  of  the  speaker;  thus, 
•'  [Applause.],"  but  without  the  period  if  introduced  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence. 
Generally,  for  the  better  appearance'  of  typography,  and  because  the  "case"  is  not 
fuily  supplied  with  brackets,  the  curves  are  used  instead. 

6  I  have  sa.d.— Have  is  implied  here.    See  p.  1 10,  252,  of  this  Reader. 

«  prosperity. -This  word  might  be  written  Pers-Pee;  but,  to  distinguish  it 
from  prospect,  Pers2-Pee,  it  is  better  to  write  it  in  this  manner. 

'  -white  race.— 188,  K.  1 ;  148,  E.  1,  b. 

s  law  of  God.— 182,  E.  1,  6. 

8  Western  world.— The  En-hook  is  omitted  to  secure  a  desirable  phrase- 
sign,  p.  169,  K.  12,6. 

lo^rcat  national  Democratic  party. — En  is  here  used  for  national. 
The  whole  phrase-sign  transferred  to  the  common  print  is  "  Great  N.  Dem.  P." 
237,  E.  2,  b. 

11  Irrepressible  conflict  party. — This  is  a  special  contraction.     If  very 
frequent,  Ar  simply  would  be  written  for  irrepressible. 

12  upon  us — p.  IS  ',  E.  3. 
is  brca;lest  s-.'iise.— 236,  3. 

n  my  Northern  friends.— Ner  is  here  used  for  "Northern,"  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principle  of  special  contraction.  237,  E.  2. 

n  net  whatever  I  can  do — Tef  for  what  ver  is  here  Joined  to  Tetoid2  (foi 
but),  iee  p.  74,  i.1*,  of  this  Reader,  wh>re  it  is  shown  that  the  plan  of  joining  Tee 
tn  but  was  originated  by  the  author,  (ti)  I  is  omitted  here,  as  it  m;iy  be  in  many 
other  cases  where  some  pronoun  must  be  supplied,  nnd  wh<-re  ihe  context  directs 
what  one.  Bee  under  I  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictiouary. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  121 

ment,18  and  have  a  line  of  police  established  along  the  border  of  the 
Slave  States,  to  catch  and  hang  the  thieving  Abolitionists  who  are 
stealing  our  niggers.  [Laughter  and  applause.]  This  is  a  means  of 
protection.  Why  ?  Because  it  is  practical.  [Renewed  laughter  and 
applause.]  Here  is  my  old  native  State  of  Virginia" — the  slave-trading 
aud  slave-breeding  State  of  Virginia1* —  [Laughter.] 

DELEGATE  FROM  VIRGINIA" — I  call  the  gentleman  to  order.  He  casts 
an  imputation  upon  Virginia  by  calling  her  the  "slave-breeding  State 
of  Virginia. ' ' 

MR.  GAULDEN** — Well,  I  will  say  the  slave-breeding  State  of  Georgia, 
then.  1  glory  in  being  a  slave-breeder21  myself.  [Loud  laughter.]2-' 
I  will  face  the  music  myself,  and  I  have  got  as  many  negroes  as  any 
man  from  the  State  of  Virginia.  And  as  I  invited  the  gentlemen  of 
this  Convention  at  Charleston  to  visit  my  plantation,  I  will  say  again, 
that  if  they  will  come  to  see  me,  I  will  show  them  as  fine  a  lot  of 
negroes,  and  the  pure  African,  too,  as  they  can  find  anywhere.  And  I 
will  show  them  as  handsome  a  set  of  little  children  there  as  can  be  seen 
[laughter],  and  any  quantity  of  them,  too.  [Renewed  laughter.]'-3 
And  I  wish  that  Virginia  may  be  as  good  a  slave-trading  and  slave- 


»«  from  the  general  government.— Jay  here  stands  for  general,  under 
the  principle  of  special  contraction.  237,  E.  2. 

'7  State  of  Virginia — In  some  cases,  as  in  this,  it  is  better  to  express  Of  by 
a  hook  than  to  imply  it. 

'8  slave-breeding  State  of  Virginia.— 237,  E.  1,  6.  See  p.  94,  IT1,  of 
this  Header. 

i>  Delegate  from  Virginia. — It  seems  natural  to  commence  the  words  of 
a  speaker  with  a  paragraph  ;  but  for  the  reporter  such  a  practice  is  not  best,  espe- 
cially in  the  case  of  one  speaker  interrupting  another ;  for  too  much  time  would  be 
«onsumed  in  carrying  the  pen  back  to  commence  a  paragraph.  (6)  It  is  best  usu- 
ally, in  the  case  of  a  change  of  speakers,  to  phonograph  the  name  of  the  speaker, 
inclosing  it  in  a  circle ;  (e)  or,  if  there  could  be  no  confusion— as  there  might  be  if 
two  speakers  had  the  same  initial— write  the  first  longhand  letter  of  the  speaker's 
name,  usually  inclosing  it.  In  this  phrase-sign  from  is  omitted,  under  the  prin- 
ciple of  250,  3. 

20  G.-  G.  is  here  written  for  Gaulden.  Of  course,  in  transcribing,  "  Mr."  should 
be  prefixed.  See  preceding  note. 

s»  sSnve-breeder.— The  formative  of  an  'actor'  may  frequently  be  omitted. 
p.  142,  E.  5;  p.  194,  E.  T. 

"  Loud  laughter. — The  modification  of  loud  is  indicated  by  making  the  sign 
of  pleasantry  or  laughter  larger  than  usual.  See  p.  119,  294,  of  this  Eeader. 

••>3  Rrntwed  lau^htc' .— I  see  no  particular  necessity  of  inserting  renewed 
here.  It  was  probably  done  by  the  reporter  to  avoid  the  monotony  of  the  repetition 
of  the  word  laug/tter. 


122         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   EEADEB. 

breeding  State  as  Georgia ;  and  in  saying  that  I  do  not  mean  to  be 
disrespectful  to  Virginia,  but  I  do  not  mean  to  dodge  the  question 
at  all. 

Now,  I  want  no  office  ;  I  never  asked  any  ;  I  did  not  ask  the  State 
Convention  to  send  me  here  ;  but  I  am  here  to  tell  the  truth  to  you 
all,  and  this  is  my  idea  of  non-intervention.  I  want  the  State  of  Vir- 
ginia, if  she  has  negroes,  to  have  as  many  as  she  pleases.  If  you  want 
slavery  in  the  State  of  Massachusetts,  I  want  you  to  have  it.  If  you 
want  slavery  in  Indiana,  and  Ohio,  and  Wisconsin,  and  Minnesota,  in 
God's  name  have  it.  It  is  your  right  to  have9*  slaves,  and  just  as 
many  or  as  few  as  you  please  ;  I  will  never  join  any  party  which  de- 
sires to  force  slavery  anywh'ere,  or  to  keep  it  from  any  place.  [Ap- 
plause.] I  believe  that  is  regulated  by  the  law  of  God,  of  nature's 
God,  and  all  history  proves  that  to  be  so,  and  all  that  I  ask  is  "  hands 
off ;"  leave  it  to  the  people  of  the  States  and  of  the  Territories  to  settle 
that  matter  for  themselves  under  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States.28  [Applause.] 

And  now,  while  I  am  up,  I  want  to  put  my  veto  upon  one  thing. " 
I  know  that  I  am  not  going  to  be  applauded"  in  what  I  say  ;™  but  seed 
sown  in  good  time  will  bring  forth  fruit ;  and  though  you  may  say  now 
that  I  am  wrong,  yet  I  think  I  shall  live  to  see  the  day  when  the  doc- 
trines which  I  advocate  to-night  will  be  the 

O  A  doctrines  of  Massachusetts  and  of  the  North  ;  for, 

"  Truth  crashed  to  earth  will  rise  again ; 

The  eternal  years  of  God  are  hers ; 
While  Error,  wounded,  writhes  in  pain, 
And  dies  amid  her  worshipers." 

a«  It  Is  your  right  to  have. — ffave  is  added  here  by  the  Vee-hook,  in 
accordance  with  the  method  of  writing  hope  to  have,  Pef 3.  To  must  be  supplied  to 
complete  the  construction. 

"  under  tin-  Constitution  of  the  United  States.— One  of  the  Tees  of 
Constitution  is  here  omitted  to  secure  this  sign.  236,  8.  See  p.  106,  23s,  of  thU 
Reader. 

'•"  upon  one  thing. — p.  169,  R.  12,  b. 

27  I  know  that  I  am  not.  going  to  be  applauded. — The  affix-sign 
*  ing'  is  omitted  in  writing  going  (237,  R.  1,  i),  to  secure  the  advantage  of  phrase- 
writing.  This  phrase  would  have  been  written  in  the  Old  Phonography,  Rctoid1- 
En-Dhet  Petoid]-Ment»Gay:' ing'  Bee3  PeP-Ded.  Compare  the  two  expressions. 

a8  In  what  I  say.— p.  68,  xvi.  of  this  Reader.  This  phrase,  so  easily  and 
beautifully  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography,  would  have  been  written  in  the 
Old  Phonography,  En1  Wuh1  Retoid»-Eg. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  123 

I  say  I  go  for  non-intervention  in  the  broadest  sense  of  the  term.  I 
say  that  this  whole  thing  should  be  taken  out  of  the  hands  of  the 
General  Government.  I  say  it  is1  all  wrong  to  be  spending  two  or 
three  millions  of  dollars3  annually  from  our  pockets,  and  sacrificing 
thousands  of  lives  upon  the  coast  of  Africa,3  in  that  terrible  clime,4  to 
prevent  our  going  there  to  get  a  few  negroes.  If  it  is  right  for  us  to 
go  to  Virginia  and  buy  a  negro,  and  pay  $2,000*  for  him,  it  is  legally 
right  for  us  to  go  to  Africa,  where  we  can  get  them  for  $50.  [Applause 
and  laughter.]*  Here  is  the  condition  we  are  placed  in,  and  you  may 
as  well  come  to  your  senses  and  face  the  music. 

There  are  2,000  of  our  negroes  now  down  at  Key  West,  begging  and 
pleading  not  to  be  sent  back.  If  they  should  be  sent  back,  what  would 
be  the  result  ?  One  half  of  them  would  die  before  they  got  there,  and 
the  other  half  would  be  turned  upon  the  coast  of  Africa,  upon  the 
coast  of  Liberia,  among  strangers,  to  be  eaten  up  by  cannibals,  or  be 
caught  and  sold  again,  or  die  of  starvation  ;  and  this  you  call  human- 
ity. I  say  it  is  piracy.  I  say  that  our  Government  is  acting  against 
right  and  reason  in  this  matter.  And  if  the  Southern  men  had  the 
spunk  and  spirit  to  come  right  up  and  face  the  North,  I  believe  the 
Northern  Democracy7  at  least  would  come  to  the  true  doctrine  of 
popular  sovereignty  and  non-intervention.  [Applause  and  laughter.] 

Think  of  it !  Two  thousand  of  these  poor  barbarians  from  Africa, 
caught  within  the  last  four  weeks,  and  kept  upon  that  miserable  island 
of  Key  West,  dying  there  from  disease  and  starvation,  and  what  do  not 
die*  are  to  be  sent  back  by  our  Government  at  an  expense  of  one  or  two 
millions,  though  they  are  pleading  and  begging  not  to  be  sent  back  and 

0  A  »  I  say  It  is. — p.  63,  xvi. 

2  two  or  three  millions  of  dollars.— See  p.  74,  62,  of  this  Beader. 
250,  3.  The  word  millions  is  here  represented  by  Ems,  under  the  principle  of 
special  contraction.  23T,  E.  2. 

s  upon  tlie  coast  of  Africa.— 286,  3.    See  p.  106,  23s,  of  this  Reader. 

•  In  that  terrible  clime.— A  slight  saving  is  here  effected  over  the  Corre- 
sponding Style  by  writing  'ble'  by  the  affix-sign  (Bee)  instead  of  Bel.    See  p.  92, 
163,  of  this  Header. 

s  $3,OOO — 2T4. 

•  Applause  and  laughter.— The  signs  for  applause  and  laughter  are  here 
written  without  lifting  the  pen,  constituting  a  sort  of  phrase-sign.    It  illustrates  a 
reporter's  care  to  effect  every  possible  saving  of  labor. 

1  Northern  Democracy. — Northern  is  here  contracted  to  Ner,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principle  of  special  contraction.    The  phrase-sign,  transferred  to  'he 
common  priiit,  is  "Nor.  Dem." 

•  and  what  do  not  die.— p.  104,  221,  of  this  Eeader. 


124:         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

landed  npon  the  coast  of  Africa.  It  is  cruel,  inhuman,  wrong,  and  I 
appeal  to  the  good  sense  of  the  American  nation  against  it.  Look  at 
John  Bull.*  He  has  bound  us  to  catch  all  we  can  and  send  them  back 
at  an  expense  of  $25  per  head.  We  send  them  hack.  But  what  does 
John  Bull  do  ?  When  he  gets  them  he  apprentices  them  out  again,  and 
makes  slaves  of  them.  That  is  the  hypocritical  treaty  that  you  are 
hound  by.  And  yet  I  hear  no  Southern  voice  or  Northern  voice  raised 
against  this  aggression  upon  the  law  of  nature  and  of  nature's  God. 
But  I  intend  to  raise  my  voice  against  it,  humble  as  it  is. 

Now  this  may  be  a  secondary  question  before  us  to-night.  The  great 
point  is  harmony  and  union  in  the  great  Democratic  party.  Let  us 
whip  the  Black  Republicans  ;10  let  us  win  the  fight ;  and  when  we  have 
settled  these  things,  let  us  act  together,  and  all  will  be  right.  [Ap- 
plause.] 


NO  LAW  FOR  SLAVERY. 

[Speech  of  Gerrit  Smith  at  the  State  Anti-Slavery  Convention,  in  Milwaukie, 
June  17,  1857.] 

I  HAVE  not  come  here  to  denounce  slaveholders,  nor  to  say  that  they 
are  worse  than  other  men.  If  they  are  worse,  it  is  owing  to  the  mis- 
fortune of  their  circumstances.  If,  as  many  suppose,  they  are  the  very 
worst  of  men,  it  is  because  they  are  the  subjects  aad  victims  of  the  very 
worst  education. 

That  the  slaveholder  is  to  a  large  extent  unconscious"  of  the  wick- 
edness12 of  his  relation  is  beyond  controversy.  Deplorable,  however, 
as  is  this  unconsciousness,  it  happily  leaves  room  in  him  for  goodness. 

»  John  Bull.— This  is  a  special  contraction.  The  sign,  transferred,  la  "J. 
Bull."  28T,  K.  2. 

i»  Black  Republicans.— Bel3  is  here  written  for  Slack,  in  accordance  with 
the  principle  of  general  contraction  (287,  K.  2).  If  the  phrase  were  occurring  fre- 
quently, in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  237,  E.  2,  b,  it  would  be  wriiten  Eel3- 
Eays ;  f .  «.,  "  Bl.  Es." 

11  unconscious.— The  preflx-sign  for  tmcon-  is  here  Joined,  and  the  final  «  is 
omitted,  as  in  many  other  words  ending  with  the  sound  shim.  See  p.  "u,  43,  of  this 
Header. 

i*  wickedness.— 237,  £.  1. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  125 

Virtues  the  slaveholder  can  certainly  have.13     "Washington1*  was  a 
slaveholder,  and  strikingly  were  the  nobler  virtues  grouped 

O1  in  him.  \Ve  must  dismiss1  our  prejudices  against  the  slave- 
*-J  *•  holder  and  do  him  full  justice.  In  innumerable  instances  is 
he  graced  with  beautiful  traits  of  character.2  Of  course  this  could  not 
be,  did  he  know  the  wickedness  of  his  relation.3  Were  he  to  know 
that,  and  yet  to  continue  in  the  relation,4  to  see  his  sin  and  yet  to  cling 
to  it,  his  whole  soul  would  be  so  debased  that  nothing*  virtuous,  nothing 
generous  could  spring  up  or  live  in  it.  Unconsciousness  of  his  wrong 
explains  the*  possibility  of  his  goodness. 

That  the  slaveholder  should  persist  in  remaining  a  slaveholder  ought 
not  to  surprise  us ;  nor  ought  we  to  regard  him  as  pre-eminently  wicked 
for  such  persistence.  Think  how  rarely,7  even  among  ourselves,  a  man 
becomes,"  in  the  full  and  emphatic  sense  of  the  word,  an  Abolitionist. 
All  over  the  world  a  new  education  is  needed — an  education  into  a 
simple,  honest  love  of  manhood,  and  into  a  deep  and  abiding  reverence 


is  ran  certainly  have.— p.  169,  R.  12.  This  phrase,  in  the  Old  Phonog- 
raphy, would  have  heen  written  Ken2  Iss  Ret2  En-El  Vee'2. 

n  Washington.— This  word  is  too  long  to  write  in  full,  and  the  best  contrac- 
tion is  IshJ-Ten. 

O1   l  we  must  dismiss.— 236,  8.    p.  106,  23s,  of  this  Reader. 

2  beautiful  traits  of  character.— 171,  8.  This  phrase,  in  the  Re- 
porting Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  would  have  been  written  Bet2-fel  Treta2 
Petoid'-Ker-Kay. 

3  wickedness  of  his  relation. —  Wickedness  is  here  contracted,  as  a  few 
lines  before ;  his  is  added  by  a  circle,  of  being  implied. 

*  in  the  relation.— In  relation  is  distinguished  from  In  real-ity  by  the  En 
in  the  former  being  brought  down  so  that  Rel  may  rest  on  the  line,  while  in  the 
other  phrase  Rel  is  above  the  line.    246, 1. 

*  that  nothing.— A  needless  fear  on  the  part  of  the  Old-Phonographic  pub- 
lishers caused  them  to  prohibit  the  joining  ol  letters  in  many  cases,  where  they 
might  have  been  joined  with  ease,  and  with  advantage  in  respect  of  speed. 

8  explains  the.— (a)  The  plan  of  omitting  initial  Kay  in  many  such  words  as 
exist  (Scs-Tee2),  experience  (Sprens2),  explain  (Splen2)—  an  omission  correspond- 
ing to  the  rapid  and  defective  utierance  of  these  words,  i.  e.,  almost  'ais*,  '*pei-iencr, 
>«p£«f»i— was  first  presented  in  the  Hand-Book.  It  is  no  valid  objection  to  such 
contractions  that  they  do  not  save  much ;  it  is  conceding  that  they  save  something, 
and  that,  without  gome  countervailing  disadvantage,  they  are  useful.  Their  advan- 
tage is  that  they  save  time  in  the  omission  of  a  letter,  and  aleo  by  facilitating  phrase- 
writing.  (&)  As  to  joining  the  in  this  case,  see  187,  R.  1. 

»  how  rarely.— See  p.  60,  iv.,  2,  of  this  Reader. 

*  a.  man  becomes. — 244,  R.  3,  (1). 


126         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   HEADER. 

for  it.  Hitherto,  at  the  North*  as  well  as  at  the  South,  our  schools  and 
churches  have  not  been  such  as  to  impress  men  with  the  dignity  and 
grandeur  of  their10  common  nature.11  In  every  part  of  our  country  the 
work  is  still  undone  of  bringing  men  to  believe 

"  That  the  one  sole  sacred  thing  beneath  the  cope  of  Hearen  is  man."12 

Open  the  eyes  of  the  slaveholder  to  the  greatness  and  glory  of  man — 
even  of  the  most  bruised  and  battered  specimen  of  man — and  he  is  at 
once  an  Abolitionist.  The  like  discovery  can  alone  transform  the13 
non-slaveholder  into  an  Abolitionist.  All  those  before  whose  heaven- 
anointed  vision  stand  revealed  the  divine  image  and  the  moral  sub- 
limity of  man — all  those,  and  none  others,14  are  Abolitionists.  As  im- 
possible would  it  be  for  him  who  is  blessed  with  this  revelation  to 
oppress  or  despise  his  brother,  as  to  pour  contempt  upon  the  pyramids 
among  the  works  of  men,  or  upon  Mount  Blanc1*  among  the  works  of 
God. 

Nor  have  I  come  here  to  oppose  the  doctrine  of  "  compensation" — a 
doctrine  so  unwelcome  to  the  mass  of  Anti-Slavery  men.  On  the  con- 
trary, were  the  slaveholders  to  emancipate  their  slaves,  I  should  be 
glad  to  have  the  nation  give  five  hundred  millions  of  dollars  to  the 
emancipators,18  and  bestow  something  on  the  emancipated  also.  In- 

•  nt  the  North.- 23T,  K.  2. 

»o  of  their.-  See  p.  T4,  6',  of  this  Reader. 

11  common  nature.— (a)  The  word-sign  for  common  was  first  presented  in 
the  Hand-Book.  (b)  Common  was  previously  written  'com':En. 

i"  man."— The  quotation  marks  ('")  are  placed  at  the  end  of  this  quotation, 
but  not  at  the  beginning,  where  it  is  sufficiently  indicated  by  the  words  introducing 
the  quotation. 

is  transform  the. — Standard  Phonography  beautifully  exemplifies  the  great 
law  of  UNIFORMITY  in  accordance  with  which  it  was  constructed,  in  the  con- 
tractions for  words  ending  in  form-ed;  thus,  Form-ed,  Fer1 ;  Conform-ed,  'Con': 
Fer1;  Deform-ed,  Deei-Fer ;  Inform-cd,  En-Fer1 ;  Perform-ed,  Per2-Fer;  Reform- 
ed, Kay'-Fer;  Transtorm-ed,  Ters'^-Fer ;  Uniform,  En-Fer3;  Multiform,  Melt-Fer. 

i«  and  none  others — In  a  few  cases  the  Dher-tick  is  written  upward,  as  in 
thin  phrase-sign.  "With  a  pencil  it  will  be  easy  to  make  it,  and  even  with  a  pen  it 
will  not  be  so  difficult  that  its  use  will  not  be  advantageous. 

is  Mont  Blanc. — The  foreign  pronunciation  of  this  word  is  Mo,  Bla,— (()  sig- 
nifying the  nasalization  of  the  preceding  vowel  (p.  2;  3, 11  and  13).  For  the  method 
of  ttenographically  indicating  nasalization,  see  p.  2i>3, 12.  These  words  might  have 
been  written  Ment1  Bel2-Ing-Kay,  as  if  pronounced  Mont  Blank,  the  letters  being 
interpreted  by  general  English  analogy,  as  is  usually  done  in  phonographing  foreign 
words  and  names.  See  p.  90,  153,  of  this  Reader. 

'•  cmn  >:<•!]>»  tor* — (//)  In  many  cases,  when  a  verb,  as  emancipate  (Em-Ens- 
Pet),  ends  with  a  shortened  straight-line,  and  tue  actor,  as  emancipator,  is  formed 


KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXEECISKS.  127 

deed,  inasmuch  as  the  North  has  sought  her  own  commercial  gains  and 
her  own  political  and  ecclesiastical  advantages,  in  allowing,  not  to  say 
encouraging,  the  South  to  extend  the  area  of  slavery  and  multiply  her 
investments17  in  slaves,"  I  do  not  see  how  she  could  be  honest,  and  yet 
leave  the  South  to  bear  alone  the  whole  pecuniary  loss  of  emancipa- 
tion. Such  loss  there  would  be.  I  admit  that  time  would  turn  it" 
into  great  gain.  But,  for  the  present,  it  certainly  would  be  loss. 

To  my  enumeration  of  the  things  for  which  I  have  not  come  here  I 
will  add  but  one  more.  I  have  not  come  to  oppose  the  dissolution20  of 
the  Union.  Nay,  I  am  free  to  declare  that  if  the  South  or  the  North, 
the  East  or  the  West,  desire  to  secede51  from  it,'"  I  would23  have  no 
force  employed  to  prevent  the  secession.24  Let  the  seceder  go  in  peace, 

by  the  addition  of  the  consonant  r  tae  reporter  may  write  for  the  'actor'  the  form 
for  the  verb,  (b)  But  if,  in  order  to  avoid  confusion,  as  of  emancipated  and  rman* 
cipatoi;  some  other  mode  of  writing  the  actor  must  be  adopted,  the  reporter  may 
lengthen  the  stroke,  as  in  writing  emancipator,  Em-Ens-Peeter.  p.  62,  xii. 

IT  investments— 237,  E.  t,  b. 

is  in  slaves.— p.  168,  E.  10. 

i»  would  turn  it.— p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

20  dissolution  of  the  Union. — Dissolution  is  written  Dees-Elshon,  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  Desolation,  Dees2-Layshon. 

2'  desire  to  secede. — The  word  Secede  and  its  derivatives  may  be  advan- 
tageously written  in  accordance  with  the  navel,  Standard-Phonographic  principle 
of  using  an  initial  large  circle.  In  this  case,  in  connection  with  the  principle  of 
implying  to  by  joining,  a  phrase-sign  is  secured  which  is  considerably  shorter  than 
the  Old  expression  of  this  phrase— I)ces-Ar  Petoid2  Es2-Sdee. 

22  from  it. — p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Eeader.    The  Old-Phonographic  expression  of 
this  phrase  was  Fer2  Tee2. 

23  I  would. — The  advantage  of  a  stenographic  device  may  not,  when  con- 
sidered alone,  be  very  apparon1.     It  might,  for  instance,  be  objected  that  Tetoid  for 
/was  but  little  briefer  than  Petoid-Retoid.     But  it  might  be  replied  that  the  aggre- 
gate saving  of  a  number  ot  little  contrivances  of  frequent  use  would  be  consider- 
able.   And  if  these  devices,  in  addition  to  securing  a  briefer  expression  for  certain 
words,  obviate  frequently  the  loss  of  time  in  lifting  the  pen,  their  value  is  greatly 
enhanced.    This  phrase-sign  is  a  good  illustration  of  this  idea.     First,  Tetoid  for  I 
is  nctrly  twice  as  rapid  as  Petoul-Eetoid.    Secondly,  the  lifting  of  the  pen  which 
would  have  been  required  if  the  latter  form  for  /  had  been  employed,  is  obviated 
by  Tetoid.     So  that  there  s  effected  a  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography  of  more  than 
Wu  per  cent. 

24  employed  to  prevent  the  secession.— («)  To  is  implied  here  by  join- 
ing.    The  is  omitted,  and  to  be  supplied.    (&)  I  have  found  it  very  useful  in  various 
kinds  of  reporting,  especially  legislative,  to  write  Se**ion  by  Isseslron,  or  by  en- 
larging the  final  circle  of  a  prc-ci-ding  wonl,  and  adding  the  E»hvm-hook;  thug, 
End  of  the  session,  Endseslron2  ;  at  the  tension  Teescsh-on3  ;  this  sesti'U,  Dheeses2- 


128         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

followed  with  our  blessings  and  not  with  our  curses.  At  the  same 
time,  let  me  declare  that  I  am  the  friend  of  the  Union  ;  would  not  have 
it  dissolved,  hut  would  have  it  endure  forever.  What  is  more,  I  should 
he  glad  if,  with  the  consent  of  all  parties  concerned,3*  it  could  spread 
over  all  North  America,2*  and  carry  its  superior  vigor,  intelligence,  and 
civilization  to  peoples  who  are  perishing  for  need  of  them. 

Having  now  said  for  what  I  did  not27  come,  I  will  proceed  to  say  for 
what  I  did  come  here.  It  was  for  only  one  thing  ;  and  that  is,  to  be- 
seech you  to  know  nolawfor  slavery, **  and  to  trample  underfoot  whatever  claims 
to  be  a  law  for  slavery.  Possibly,  however,  there  are  persons  in  this 
assembly  who  would  stop  me  on  the  very  threshold  of  my  argument 
by  telling  me29  that  the  Constitution  is  for  slavery.  But  what  if  it 
is  ?  What  if,  from  beginning  to  end,  it  is  all  for  slavery  ?  That  does 
not  make  slavery  a  law.  That  does  not  make  the  Constitution30  a  law 

Eshon ;  next  session,  Enses2-Eshon ;  at  the  last  session,  Tee3-Layses-Eshon.  Seces- 
tion  may  be  added  to  a  preceding  word  (without  a  final  circle),  as  in  this  case,  in 
an  analogous  manner. 

as  of  all  parties  concerned. — Three  novel,  Standard-Phonographic  prin- 
ciples and  devices  combine  in  this  case  to  produce  a  remarkably  condensed  expres- 
sion of  these  four  words :— 1.  The  addition  of  all  by  an  El-hook  to  Petoid1  (of). 
2.  The  formation  of  phrase-signs,  even  in  case  of  necessary  disjoining,  commencing 
the  disjoined  letter  near  the  preceding;  overlapping  them.  (See  p.  94,  IT1,  of  this 
Eeader.)  3.  The  use  of  a  new  word  sign  for  party  (Pee).  Compare  this  expression 
•with  the  Old-Phonographic  expression — Petoid1  Bedoid1  Pee3-Eay-Tees  Sarned2. 

2«  over  all  North  America.— The  Old-Phonographic  expression  of  this 
phrase  would  be  Ver*  Bedoid1  Ncr-Ith  Em-Bay-Kay. 

27  for  what  I  did  not.— (ti)  What  is  here  added  by  shortening  the  sign 
(Ef  2)  for  For.  See  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Eeader.  (&)  The  practiced  reporter  may,  in 
some  phrases,  omit  /,  BATHEB  THAN  DISJOIN  THE  LETTEB  FOLLOWING  IT,  writing, 
for  instance,  Fet2-Dent,  instead  of  Feta-Tetoid:Dent>,  for  "For  ichat  I  did  not." 
(See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  the  word  /.)  There  is  an  in- 
stance of  the  application  of  this  plan  in  the  following  phrase-sign  for  "For  what  1 
did  come." 

as  no  law  for  slavery. — Slay  being  used  as  a  (special)  word-sign  fur 
flowery,  this  phrase-sign  falls  under  the  general  principles  of  phrase-wri  ing — even 
as  to  using,  for  sake  of  convenience,  Sel  instead  of  Slay  ;  for  it  is  allowable  and  not 
unfrequent  to  change  the  direction  of  a  letter  having  two  directions,  or  to  change 
the  outline  of  a  word  (sometimes  even  of  a  sign-word),  in  order  to  secure  a  plirase- 
sign.  For  instance,  in  Tees2-El-En-Ef,  it  is  a  ^ctU-^cnmcnf<lc•t,  not  only  is  the  hook 
of  the  word-sign  of  icM  (Wels)  omitted,  but  the  stroke  is  written  downward.  The 
hook  of  knovm  is  also  omitted  so  that/uc<  (Ef)  may  be  joined. 

29  by  telling  me.— 23T,  R.  1,  o. 

so  a  law <lie  Constitution. — In  this  case  a  long  dasli  is  substitute  I  for 

the  repeated  words,  "  That  does  not  make."  276,  a.  This  is  a  novel  and  valuable 
characteristic  of  Standard  Phonography. 


KEY   TO   TUB   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  129 

for  slavery.    That  but  proves  that  the  Constitution  itself  is  no  law. 
The  first  thing  in  regard  to  any 

f)  O  statute,  constitution,  or  decree  is  not  to  determine  by  means 
''^  of  it  what  other  things  are  or  are  not  law,  but  whether  itself 
is  or  is  not  law.     Preliminary  to  applying  the1  yard-stick2  to  the  meas- 
urement of  the  cloth  is  the  inquiry  whether  it  is  a  yard-stick — whether 
it  is  a  true  measure. 

Yii,  (  institution  can  not  be  a  law  for  slavery.  It  can  not  be,  if  for 
no  other  reason  than  that,  so  far  as  it  may  be  for  slavery,  it  is  void. 
Just  so  far3  it  is  void  for  absurdity.  Not  less,  but  infinitely  more,  ab- 
surd would  the  Constitution  be  in  declaring  man  a  chattel  than  in  de- 
claring wood  stone,  or  stone  wood.  But  surely4  you  would  not6  regard 
as  law  the  declaration  that  wood  is  stone  or  stone  wood.  How  much 
less,  then,  should  you  suffer  the  declaration  that  man  is  a  chattel  to 
command  your  respect  and  obedience  !8  We  are  surprised  and  amused 

OO  1  to  applying  the.— The  Old-Phonographic  expression  of  this  phrase 
Y*1  would  be  Petoid*  Pel3:' ing'  e1 — i.  «.,  two  strokes,  two  dots,  and  three  lift- 
ings, while  the  Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires  but  two  strokes  and  one 
lifting,  and  has  the  merit  of  greater  legibility. 

»  yard-stick — In  this  contraction  stick  is  represented  by  the  Steh-loop  (•#)• 
The  character  of  the  discourse  here  hardly  justinVs  ihe  use  of  this  sign  as  a  special 
contraction.  It  is  rather  an  instance  of  the  use  for  general  purposes,  by  the  expe- 
rienced reporter,  of  contractions  which  would  be  employed  by  the  beginner  for 
special  purposes  only.  The  experienced  reporter,  in  the  course  of  his  practice,  will 
so  thoroughly  memorize  many  contractions  invented  for  special  purpose?,  that  he 
may  safely  introduce  them  into  any  kind  of  reporting,  especially  if  they  are  suffi- 
ciently suggestive  not  to  depend  much  upon  the  context  for  legibility. 

3  just  so  far.— The  principle  of  236,  8 — allowing  the  omis-ion  of  t  when  it 
occurs  between  s  and  another  consonant — is  almost  as  applicable  and  serviceable  in 
phrr.se-writing  as  in  the  writing  of  single  words.    See  phrases  commencing  with 
JUST  in  the  Standard-Phonograplrc  Dictionary. 

4  but  surely — The  Standard-Phonographic  principle  of  enlarging  a  small 
Ar-hook  to  add  I  may  be  advantageously  employed  to  add  the  termination  ly  to 
ture,  Slier2;  Slier]2,  surely  ;  and  near,  Ner1 ;  Nerl1,  nearly;— but  never  when  the 
s:gn  thus  produced  would  have  some  other  and  conflicting  value;  and  hence  MerlJ 
should  not  be  used  for  merely  ;  for  this  use  might  conflict  with  the  use  of  that  sign 
for  ininwrally. 

6  you  -would  i>ot.— See  p.  61,  x.  of  this  Reader. 

«  and  obedience. — (a)  The  general  rule  which  I  have  observed  in  devising 
a  contraction  for  a  word  and  as  many  of  its  derivatives  as  can  safely  be  represented 
by  one  comraction,  is,  to  po  only  so  far  in  their  expression  as  they  coincide,  and 
sometimes  to  stop  short  of  that  if  the  words  are  very  Ion:.',  and  a  suggestive  contrac- 
tion can  be  secured  without.  To  illustrate,  Disobedient,  Disi>letlienily,  and  Diso* 
beJience,  being  of  different  parts  of  speech,  can  safely  be  represented  by  one  con- 


130         8EOOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

by  the  historical  fact  that  a  Roman  challenged  for  his  favorite  horse 
the  honors  due  only  to  a  man.  But  wherein  is  it  more  absurd  to  count 
a  horse  for  a  man,  as  did  the  Roman,  than  to  count  a  man  for  a  horse, 
as  docs  the  slaveholder  ? 

Is  it  claimed  that  the  Constitution  is  a  law  for  slavery  on  the  ground 
that  it  is  a  bargain  between  the  whites  and  blacks  for  making  one  the 
slaves  of  the  other  ?  But  such  a  bargain  would  be  void  for  lack  of 
mutuality  and  consideration.  It  is  not  credible  that  the  blacks7  came 
into  it ;  and  if  they  did,  it  is  not  possible  that  they  received  an  equiva- 
lent, or,  indeed,  any  return  whatever  for  consenting*  to  be  reduced  to 
slavery.  Such  a  reduction  does  of  itself  incapacitate  for  receiving  any, 
even  the  least  measure  of  compensation.  In  the  very  selling  of  his 
manhood,  the  seller  puts  it  out  of  his  power  to  receive  the*  purchase- 
money.  He  can  not  be  paid  for  making  himself  a  chattel.  Eveiy 
attempted  bargain  for  unmanning  himself  is  necessarily  void.  Per- 
haps it  will  be  said  that  the  bargain  in  question  was  not  between  the 
whites  and  blacks,  but  between  the  whites  and  the  whites — the  whites 

traction;  for,  the  context  will  determine  whether  the  contraction  should  be  read  as 
an  adjective,  an  adverb,  or  a  noun.  These  three  words  coincide  in  the  syllables 
(linol/ed,  which  is  all  that  is  necessary  to  express  to  suggest  Uu-se  words.  Those 
syllables  are  expressed  by  Di-es'-Bed.  (//)  It  sometimes  happens  that,  while  a  word 
which  is  formed  by  prefixes  (as  din-obedient  from  obedient)  can  be  contracted,  the 
primitive  word  can  not,  because  the  expression  of  the  common  part  of  the  primi- 
tive and  its  derivatives  (as  Bed  for  OBEDient-ly-ce)  is  not  sufficiently  suggestive, 
and  may  have  some  other  and  conflicting  use.  (c)  Vocalization,  however,  as 
Bed(e)1  for  Obedient,  may  render  the  contraction  sufficiently  suggestive,  and  there- 
fore allowable. 

7  blacks.— This  is  a  special  contraction,  formed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  -J8T,  K.  2. 

«  for  consenting.— p.  112,  B.  7,  6. 

•  pats  It  out  of  Ms  power  to  receive  the. — (a)  The  sign  for  It  is  short- 
ened to  tidd  Out  (see  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Reader) ;  Of  is  implied,  as  is  very  frequently 
the  case  before  hi*;  Hi*  is  added  by  the  small  circle  (Iss) ;  and  To  between  Power 
and  Receive  is  implied  by  joining,  (b)  It  may  be  observed  here  that  To,  in  such  a 
c:i»e,  is  not  implied  without  any  reference  to  the  context;  for  a  junction  in  one  case 
may  imply  nothing,  in  another  case  Of,  and  in  another  case  To.  The  tame  prin- 
ciple of  legibility  and  distinction  applies  here  that  was  defined  on  p.  72,  413,  c, 
namely— When  the  same  thing  (letter,  word,  or  principle,  no  matter  what)  has 
different  uses  (as  the  joining  has,  as  just  mentioned),  the  uses  must  be  so  different 
that  one  could  not  reasonably  be  substituted  for  the  other  in  any  case,  (c)  This 
phrase— Puts  it  out  of  Ms  power  to  receive— would  very  probably  have  been  written 
it  the  Reporting  Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  Pets3  Tee*  Tee3  Petsoid'-Pee-Ar 
Petoid'-Iiays-Vee— i.  e.,  nine  strokes  and  four  liftings;  while  the  Standard-Phono- 
graphic expression  requires  but  five  strokes  and  not  one  lifting,  i.  e.,  gains  100  per 
cent,  over  the  Old  expr  jssion. 


KEY   TO    THE   KEPOETOiTG   EXERCISES.  131 

of  the  North  and  the  whites  of  the  South.  But  quite  as  emphatically, 
in  such  case  as  in  the  other,  would  the  bargain  lack  validity.  For  cer- 
tainly it  is  not  competent  for  two  parties  to  annul  the  rights  of  a  third. 
They  may  enter  into  a  compact  to  confirm,  but  not  to  destroy,  his 
rights.  To  say  that  the  Constitution  is  a  bargain  between  two  descrip- 
tions10 of  persons  to  take  away  all  the  rights,  ay,  even  all  the  man- 
hood, of  a  third,  is  to  say  that  the  Constitution  is  the  guiltiest  and 
foulest  of  all  conspiracies,  and  at  the  very  furthest  remove  from  all 
possibility  of  being  law. 

But  to  return  to  my  declaration,  that  even  if  the  Constitution  were 
from  beginning  to  end  in  favor  of  slavery,"  it  nevertheless  could  not 
be  a  law  for  slavery.  Do  not  understand  me'2  to  admit  that  it  is  in 


i"  between  two  descriptions.— This  same  sign  might  in  some  other  case 
be  written  for  "  between  all  descriptions ;"  but  the  context  here  makes  the  use  of  it 
for  "  between  two  descriptions'*  safe  and  allowable.  The  following  words — "  all  tbn 
manhood  of  a  third" — would  not  accord  with  reading  this  sign  "between  all  de- 
scriptions." That  "  between  two  descriptions"  is  the  proper  reading  is  also  infer- 
rible from  the  fact  that  the  preceding  sentence  is  speaking  of  ttco  parties  annulling 
the  rights  of  a  tldi-d.  The  words,  "7b  say  that  tlie  Constitution  is  a  bargain,"  etc., 
commencing  this  sentence,  show  that  Ihe  speaker  is  continuing  the  discussion  of  the 
question  of  "a  bargain  between  the  whites  of  the  North  and  the  •whites  of  the 
South,"  mentioned  in  the  fourth  sentence  preceding;  and  mentioned  or  adverted  to 
in  every  sentence  following  that  up  to  the  word  in  which  this  phrase-sign  (Bet1- 
\Wn-Bedoid-Skershons)  occurs.  I  give  the  few  preceding  sentences  as  a  specimen 
of  the  discriminating  criticism  which  is  now  and  then  required  in  reading  notes— 
not  that  it  takes  the  practiced  reporter  a  hundredth  part  of  the  time  to  settle  such  a 
question  as  I  have  consumed  in  setting  forth  the  reasons  in  favor  of  the  correct 
reading  of  the  phrase-si^n  which  is  the  subject  of  this  note.  The  exercise  of  dis- 
crimination which  will  be  demanded  through  a  few  years'  practice  of  reporting  is 
beiter  calculated,  in  my  opinion,  to  develop  a  fine  critical  sense,  a  minute  knowl- 
edge of  language,  an  ability  to  determine  from  what  a  speaker  has  said  what  he 
thould  say,  than  any  other  study,  not  even  excepting  that  of  the  Classics.  There 
is  a  close  similarity  between  the  mental  exercise  required  by  the  study  of  the 
Classics  and  that  demanded  by  the  study  and  practice  of  reporting ;  bat  the  re- 
porter's profession  (which  calls  for  constant  study)  more  imperatively  requires  that 
beneficial  mental  exercise  which  is  induced  by  classical  study;  and  his  reputation 
as  a  reporter  and  his  income  depending  upon  the  earnestness  and  carefulness  with 
which  he  pursues  his  profession,  he  has  greater  inducements  to  call  forth  his  utmost 
power  than  are  usually  afforded  to  classical  students.  There  is  the  additional  ad- 
vantage that  the  constant  and  varied  accumulation  of  knowledge  necessitated  by 
the  pursuit  of  his  profession  sustains  and  adds  to  his  native  and  acquired  intellectual 
'  power ;  while  the  modicum  of  valuable  knowledge  secured  by  the  many  months 
of  study  required  for  the  attainment  of  a  barely  tolerable  knowledge  of  the  classical 
languages  is  a  meager  compensation  for  the  toil. 

»i  In  favor  of  slavery.— 246, 1. 

n  do  not  understand  me.— p.  169,  B  12,  b. 


132         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

favor  of  it.  Most  emphatically  do  I  deny  that  it  is.  Such  denial  w 
due  to  truth  and  to  the  memory  of  the  men  who  adopted  the  Consti- 
tution. 

The  Constitution  is  not  for  slavery,13  unless  they  who  adopted  it 
meant  it  to  be  for  slavery.  But  there  can  be  no  evidence  that  they  so 
meant,  unless  there  is  evidence  that  they  saw  slavery  in  the  Constitu- 
tion.1* When  the  masses  vote  for  a  paper,  it  is  never  to  be  alleged 
that  they  vote  for  crime  in  it,  unless  the  crime  is  on  the  face  of  it,  and 
they  are  thereby  certainly  apprised  of  what  they  are  doing.  Hence  we 
do  our  ancestors  great  and  cruel  wrong  when  we  charge  them  with 
having  established  the  superlative  injustice  of  slavery  in  a  paper  which, 
at  the  most,  but  covertly  alludes  to  it.  If  slavery  is  openly  there,  then 
blame  them  ;  but  not  if  it  only  lurks  there.  It  is  worthy  of  mention 
that  the  courts  concur  with  common  sense  in  holding  that  no  law  is  to 
be  interpreted  in  behalf  of  palpable1*  injustice,  unless  such  injustice  is 
expressed"  in  irresistibly  clear  terms.  Says  the  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States  :  ' '  Where  rights  are  infringed,  where  fundamental  prin- 
ciples are  overthrown,  where  the  general  system"  of  the  laws  is  depart- 
ed from,  the  legislative  intention  must  be  expressed  with  irresistible 
clearness  to  induce  a  court  of  justice 

O9  to  suppose  a  design  to  effect  such  objects." — 2  Cranch,  390. 

*^*-^  Surely  he  must  be  quite«ignorant  of  the  spirit  which  prevailed 
among  the  American  masses  at  the  close  of  the  Eevolutionary  War, 
who  believes  that  a  Constitution  expressly  and  clearly  for  slavery 
would  have  been  adopted  by  them. 

is  Constitution  Is  not  for  slavery.— The  frequent  occurrence  of  this  word 
brings  it  under  the  phrase-writing  principle  of  244,  E.  3,  1— namely,  "  A  common 
substitute,  or  a  noun  of  frequent  occurrence,  ia  frequently  joined  to  a  following 
verb." 

i«  In  tile  Constitution.— The  first  t  of  Constitution  is  omitted  here  (In 
accordance  with  236,  8,  ft),  in  order  to  secure  the  advantage  of  phrase-writing.  The 
same  principle  is  followed  in  writing  wii-onntitntionti/.  See  this  woid  in  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary;  also  the  Compendium,  p.  113,  K.  15. 

i»  palpable — See  p.  92, 163,  of  this  Reader.  The  form  given  for  this  word  in 
Isaac  Pitman's  Vocabulary  is  Pee-Lay-Pee-Bel.  Standard  Phonography  makes  a 
considerable  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography  by  its  improved  outlines  in  many  cases 
where  no  new  principles  are  involved  except  the  principles  of  analogy,  uniformi'y, 
and  speed,  which  for  the  first  are  fully  developed  (or  applied)  in  Staidard  Phonog- 
raphy. 

»«  Is  expressed.— p.  1S2,  E.  4;  246,  1. 

"  general  system.— p.  169,  E.  12,  b ;  237,  E.  2. 


33 


KEY   TO  THE    REPORTING   EXERCISES.  133 

But  it  is  said  that  they  who  framed  the  Constitution  intended  it  to 
be  for  slavery.  What  if  they  did  ?  The  Constitution  is  not  what  the 
handful1  who  framed  it,  but  what  the  masses  who  adopted  it,  intended 
it  to  be.  A  deed  of  land  is  not  what  the  scrivener,  but  what  the 
grantor  auu  grantee  meant  to  have  it.2 

I  am  not  willing,  however,  that  the  framers  of  the  Constitution 
should  be  misrepresented  or  dishonored.  I  see  not  one  particle  of  evi- 
dence that  they  meant  to  establish  slavery,  or  even  to  spare  it  for 
another  generation.  They  put  into  the  Constitution*  many  powers, 
any  one  of  which  is  capable  of  being4  wielded  for  the  immediate  and 
entire*  overthrow*  of  the  whole  system  of  American  slavery.7  Did  they 
qualify  them  so  as  to  exempt  slavery  from  their  operation  ?  This  they 
certainly  would  have  done  had  they  been  intent  to  establish  slavery, 
or  even  to  prolong  its  life  beyond  a  few  years.*  But  they  did  it  not.* 

handful.— p.  194,  K.  9. 

meant  to  Have  It..—  To  is  implied  here  by  Joining,  and  it  is  added  to 
hare  by  shortening  its  sign.  The  best  expression  in  the  Old  Phonography  for  this 
easily  and  rapidly  uttered  phrase  would  be  Ment2  Pet"id2-Vee-Tee ;  i.  e.,  four 
strokes  and  one  lifting;  while  the  Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires  but 
two  strokes  and  no  lifting ;  i.  e.,  is  more  than  twice  as  fast  as  the  Old  expression, 
and  yet  probably  not  faster  than  the  utterance  would  be. 

3  isito  the  Constitution.—  The  is  omitted  here  under  the  principle  of  250, 3, 
and  the  flrst  t  of  Constitution  is  omitted  (in  accordance  with  236,  3, 1),  to  secure  a 
desirable  phrase-sign. 

«  Is  capab'.c  of  beliijj.— See  p.  92, 163,  of  this  Header.  If  the  usual  form  for 
being  were  Bee-Ing,  the  Ing  would  be  omitted  in  such  a  combination  as  this,  be- 
cause of  its  difficulty.  If  the  usual  form  were  Bee:ing  (i.  e.,  with  the  dot '  ing'),  the 
dot  might  be  omitted  in  such  a  phrase,  under  the  principle  of  237,  R.  1,  b. 

s  cut  Ire. — Enter1  .is  a  word-sign  for  entire,  and  Enter'-EI  for  entirely,  were 
flrst  presented  by  the  author.  The  Old-Phonographic  outlines  were  En-Tee-Ray, 
entire;  En-Tee-Kay-Lay,  entirely.  "  Entirety"  will  be  written  by  the  derivative 
word-sign,  Enter'-Tee.  p.  142,  E.  5.  The  Old-Phonographic  form  for  this  word 
was  En-Tee-Ray-Tee. 

•  overthrew.— 229,  R.  1,  a. 

7  American  slavery. — This  is  a  special  contraction,  formed  in  accordance 
With  the  principle  of  23T,  R.  2,  b. 

8  beyond  a  few  years.— 246,  1. 

»  but  they  did  It  not.— The  best  Old-Phonoaraphic  expression  for  this 
phrase  would  have  been  Tetoid2-Dhee-Dee-Dee  (or  -Ded)  Tee2  Net1.  The  Old  Pho- 
nography would  have  done  better  with  the  more  usual  form  of  expression — Bn  t'i(>/ 
did  not  do  it  (or  do  no).  But  Standard  Phonography  is  us.  well  adapted  to  extempo- 
raneous speech  as  to  the  studied  compositions  of  books.  It  not  in  Standard  Phonog- 
raphy is  represented  by  Tent.  It  could  not  be  joined  to  Dud  ;  yet  to  avoid  the  loss  j 

i 


134         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

They  did  not  say,  "No  person  except  a  slave,"  but  "  No  person  shall 
be  deprived  of  life,  liberty,  or  property  without  due  process  of  law." 
They  did  not  say,  "The  right  of  the  people  except  slaves,"  but  "The 
right  of  the  people  to  keep  and  bear  arms  shall  not  be  infringed."  It 
is  superfluous  to  remark  that  the  masters  will  throw  down  their  whips 
•whenever  Government  shall  obey  the  Constitution  and  protect  the 
slaves  in  taking  up  their10  muskets.  The  framers  of  the  Constitution11 
did  not  say,  "The  right  of  the  people  except  the  slaves,"  but  "The 
right  of  the  people  to  be  secure  in  their  persons,"  etc.,12  "  shall  not  be 
violated."  Nor  did  they  confine  Congress  to  color  or  condition  in  ob- 
taining recruits  for  the  army  and  navy.  I  need  not  say  that  slavery 
would  come  to  a  speedy  end  were  Congress  to  go  among  the  blacks  as 
freely  as  among  the  whites  to  supply  the  army  and  navy  with  officers 
and  privates.  It  is  only  by  observing  in  every  direction  the  policy  of 
proscribing,  degrading,  and  outraging  the  black  man13  that  slavery  can 
be  maintained.  Again,  in  forbidding  attainder,  the  framers  of  the 
Constitution  did  not  except  slavery,  which  is  the  worst  possible14  form 

of  time  of  •writing  it  in  its  proper  position  when  standing  alone  (i.  e.,  on  the  line), 
U  is  made  to  overlap  the  Ded  as  a  substitute  for  joining. 
»«  In  taking  up  their.— 237,  E.  1,  6;  264.   - 

11  the  framers  of  the  Constitution.— 164.    To  secure  a  desirable  sign 
for  this  phrase,  which  it  now  appears  will  probably  occur  frequently  in  this  part  of 
the  speech,  the  «  of  Framers  is  omitted,  and  the  first  t  of  Constitution,  in  accordance 
with  236,  8, 1. 

12  etc. — (a)  The  common  "<fc"  is  a  contraction  for  the  Latin  ET  (and),  the 
left-hand  portion  being  E  and  the  right-hand  portion  being  intended  for  the  upright 
portion  of  T,  which  is  made  into  T  by  tbe  concluding  stroke;  I  say  concluding 

\  stroke,  for  the  proper  and  easiest  way  of  making  this  sign  is  to  commence  with  the 

I  right-hand  stroke,  as  though  making  a  v  backward,  and  making  a  circle  at  the  top 

i  of  the  left-hand  side  of  ttie  V,  to  run  a  line  across  the  two  strokes;  which  line  may 

!   be  joined,  in  rapid  writing,  with  the  following  word,  or  with  the  fo'lowing  letter  as 

j  in  writing  "  ere."    (&)  The  expedient  "  <fc"  may  properly  be  written  (if  written  cor- 

(  rectly)  for  and  in  all  cases  in  transcribing,  except,  of  course,  at  the  beginning  of  a 

1   sentence,    (c)  The  contraction  "  &c."  or  "  etc."  (which  last  is  the  form  now  usually 

'  adopted  in  books)  is  a  contraction  of  the  Latin  ft  cet-era.     (See  Webster's  Un- 

i  abridged  Dictionary,  under  ET  CETERA.)    It  is  sometimes  pronounced  "  et  sctera," 

'   or  (being  translated)  "  and  so  forth."    In  either  case  the  reporter  may  write  Tees-- 

Ter  ('.  #.,  et  si-t-era).    (d)  If  any  person  should  wish  a  greaier  disiinction  between 

the  phrase  Et  c,tera  (Tees2-Ter)  and  It  in  true  (also  TeesVTer)  than  the  1:011- 

conflicting  uxes  of  the  sign,  it  may  be  secured  by  writing  the  more  frequent  et  cetera 

with  Tees'-'-Ter.  with  the  Ar-hook  implied  (171,  2),  and  Jt  is  true  with  TeeMss-Tor. 

i.  6.,  with  a  distinct  Ar  hook. 

«  blacfe  mnn.— Bel3  for  'black  is  a  special  contraction.    237,  R.  2. 
i«  worst  possible — The  t  of  icot-xt  is  omitted  here,  in  accordance  with  200,8, 
in  order  to  sec  ire  the  advantage  of  a  phrase-sign. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  135 

of  attainder.  Nor  did  they  provide  for  the  defeating  of  the  writ  of 
habeas  corpmu  by  allowing  the  plea — the  entirely  effectual  plea — of 
property  in  man.  They  provided  for  the  suspension"  of  the  writ  in 
certain  specified  cases ;  but  slavery  is  not  one  of  those  cases.  Well  did 
Professor  Christian  say,  "  It  is  this  writ  which  makes  slavery  impossible 
in  England." 

When  I  said  that  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  put  many  powers 
into  it  that  could  be  used  effectually  for  the  destruction  of  slavery,  I 
hope  you  did  not  understand  me  to  claim  that  such  use  of  them  was 
their  purpose.  All  I  claim  at  this  point  is,  that  inasmuch  as  it  was 
understood  on  all  hands  that  slavery  was  to  cease  in  a  few  years,  no 
care  was  taken,  and  no  disposition  was  felt,  to  protect  it  from  being 
swept  away  by  the  principles  and  provisions  of  the  Constitution. 

Am  I  asked  why  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  did  not  in  terms 
provide  for  the  abolition  of  slavery,  I  answer  that,  in  the  first  place,17 
inasmuch  as  slavery  was  dying18  and  doomed,  this  was  not  thought  to 
be  necessary  ;  and  that,  in  the  second  place,19  they  were  not  willing  to 


is  habeas  corpus.— This  is  a  contraction  formed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  237,  R.  2, 1,  Hay  standing  for  Habeas  and  Ker  for  Corpus.  But  it  may  be 
used  as  a  general  contraction. 

'•  suspension. — The  publisher  of  Standard  Phonography,  in  devising  con- 
tractions, has  constantly  kept  ia  view  the  principle  of  making  ANALOGOUS 
CONTRACTIONS  FOR  ANALOGOUS  WORDS;  so  tliat  one  contraction  famil- 
iarized unually  indicates  or  mtggexts  Vie  contractions  for  analogous  words.  Many 
contractions,  for  instance,  are  formed  in  analogy  with  the  contractions  for  appre- 
henxiV'-sionCPri-ii3);  apprehensible (Prens3) ;  as  Ses-Pen2,  suspension-sive ;  Sten", 
extension-give;  Stens5,  extensible ;  Spen2,  expensive-ness ;  Spen3,  expansive-sion; 
Spens3.  expansible;  Dee-Klen,  declension;  Rays-Pen,  responsive;  Rays-Pens, 
responsible  bility ;  i.  «.,  contractions  of  words  ending  with  -nsion-sive-niveness, 
terminate  with  an  En-hook;  while  the  contractions  of  words  ending  with  -nftible- 
ility,  terminale  with  the  "Ens-circle.  1ST,  R.  2,  a.  Compare  the  Old-Phonographic 
Kays  Pens,  expensive;  Bays-Pens,  responsible.  If  you  make  a  contraction  for 
rexponsive  (Rays-Pens)  in  analogy  with  that  for  expensive  (Kays-Pens),  it  conflicts 
with  responsible.  Kays-Pens3,  expansive  (in  analogy  with  expensive),  would  con- 
flict with  Kays-Pens3,  expansible  (in  analogy  with  rexpunxible).  So  Analogy,  Uni- 
formity, Consistency,  being  sacrificed  at  the  outset,  had  to  be  sacrificed  to  the  end. 

i'  in  the  first  plnci^. — This  phrase-sign,  though  employed  in  any  kind  of 
reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  237.  JR.  2,  6 — Ef  standing 
tor  fii-st  and  Pel  for  place. 

is  slavery  -was  dying.— The  frequent  use  of  the  word  slavery  in  this 
speech  brings  it  under  the  principle  of  phrase-writing  expressed  in  244,  R.  8, 1. 

10  In  the  second  plnce. — This  phrase-sign,  though  properly  used  in  all 
kinds  of  reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  237,  R.  2,  b— Skay 


136         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

let  posterity  learn  from  the  pag  ;s  of  the  Constitution  that  their  country 
had  ever  been  disgraced  with  slavery.  The  silence  of  the  Constitution 
respecting  slavery  shows  far  more  loathing  and  shame  of  it  than  could 
any  express  condemnation  of  it,  however  emphatic. 

But  it  is  said  that  there  is  history  to  prove  that  the  framers  of  the 
Constitution  were  willing  to  let  slavery  continue.  I  admit  it.  What 
is  more,  I  admit  that  there  are  clauses  in  the  Constitution  which  con- 
tribute proof  of  the  truth  of  this  history.  Nevertheless,  to  go  into 
history  for  the  sake  of  interpreting  these  clauses  in  behalf  of  crime  is, 
as  we  have  already  seen,  wholly  unwarranted  by  the  rules  of  interpret- 
ation. It  is  its  letter,  and  not  its  history,  that  is  the  Constitution. 
For  the  sake  of  the  argument,  however,  I  will  admit  that  these  clauses 
refer  to  slavery. 

But  for  how  long  was  slavery90  to  continue  ?  Only  for  some  twenty 
years  were  they  willing  to  let  it 

O  A    continue.     And  what  is1  more,  the  mass  of  it  was  reasonably 
«-*  *  expected  to  be  of  the  comparatively  mild  type  of  house  and 
farm  slavery,  and  not  of  the  severe  type  of  plantation-  slavery. 

(i.  e.,  sec.)  standing  for  second  and  Pel  for  plicf,  (>>)  Other  signs  for  correspond- 
ing phrases  may  be  formed  in  like  manner,  as  Kn-lth-Pel,  in  the  third  place— Ith 
standing  for  third ;  En'-EfMth-Pel,  in  the  fourth  pliice— with  Ilh  to  distinguish  it 
from  In  Vie  flrxt  place;  En  EP-Ef-Pel,  in  the  fifth  place;  En-En  Pel,  in  the  next 
place ;  En-El2(fi>r  £««<)-PeI  (or  Nels-Pels2),  in  the  last  place. 

20  was  slavery.— 244,  R.  8,  4. 

OJ    *  and  ivltat  is — p.  104,  22',  of  this  Reader. 

3  plantation. — This  may  be  regarded  as  a  special  contraction.  The  full 
form  would  be  Plen-Teeshon.  (//)  Generally,  in  Standard  Phonography,  when  the 
same  sign  stands  for  a  primitive  word  and  one  or  more  derivatives,  some  or  nil  of 
them  being  contracted,  that  sign  is  written  in  the  proper  or  assigned  pr«ition  «.f  the 
primitive,  whatever  may  be  the  accented  vowel  (i.  e.,  the  proper  position)  of  the  de- 
rivatives; thus,  Es'-Km,  assimilate-d-ion;  Picnt3,  plant-ed  (er)-ation;  Kay-PeeJ, 
cs~~ 

II 

i 

Kret,  hypocrite-iciil ;  En-Dren1,  iii'ioctrinate-d-ion ;  En-Sper1,  inspire-ation  ;  Ent1- 
Ket,  intellfCt-nal-U'ility  ;  Ent'-Med,  intimidate-d-ion  ;  Kn-Vet',  invit.-d-ation;  Em- 
Jay3,  majesty-ic ;  Ein-Thed",  mcthod-i<--ical.  Methodism;  Em  Thedst2,  Metlmdist- 
ic-ical ;  Fet'-Ger,  photography-ic  ist-er;  Pers'-Pet,  precipitate-d  ion  ;  Ray'-'-Fet, 
refute-d-ation ;  Ray'-Pet,  repea>ud,  repetition;  Ila>3-Pet,  repute-d-ation'  Raya- 
Ped,  rapid-ity-ly.  (c)  This  general  principle  correspond*  to  the  general  rule  of 
position  applying  to  lerivative  word  signs.  See  261,  R.  2.  It  serves  to  distinguish 
many  contracted  outlines,  which  by  the  general  rule  of  position  would  occupy  the 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  137 

I  said  that  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  expected  slavery  to  con- 
tinue for  only  some  twenty  years.  The  historical  truth  that,  in  this 
country3  as  well  as  in  England,4  the  cessation  of  the  African  slave- 
trade  was  looked  to  as  the  cessation  of  slavery  itself,  is  undisputed.  Now 
history  is6  confirmed  at  this  point  by  the  migration  and  importation 
clause  of  the  Constitution — that  clause  protecting  the  trade  for  only 
twenty  years.  But  that  slavery  itself  was  expected  to  continue  only  so 
lung  is  manifest  from  the  fact  that  this  protection,  brief  as  it  was,  was 
to  be  enjoyed  only  by  the  then  existing  States."  But  if  the  new  States 
(and  remember  that  the  Constitution  expressly  provides  for  their  ad- 
mission)' were  not  to  be  allowed  to  participate  in  the  African  slave- 
trade,  it  was  because  they  were  not  to  be  allowed  to  have  slavery. 
Having  slavery  without  recruiting  it  from  Africa  was  a  thing  not  then 
thought  of.  If,  however,  the  new  States  were  denied  the  right  to 
have  slavery,  it  follows  that  the  old  States  were  not  to  be  allowed  to 
establish  it,  since  that  would  be  to  allow  an  inequality  of  rights  he- 
same  position,  and  hence  be  undistinguished  except  by  meaning  (or  the  context). 
(d)  The  suggest! veness  (i.  e  ,  legibility)  of  contractions  for  derivative  words  is 
favored  by  placing  them  in  the  position  of  the  primitive;  for.  the  primitive  word 
being  first  read  or  suggested,  that  and  the  context  will  at  once  indicate  what  deriva 
live  is  to  be  employed.  For  instance,  Em-Tbed2  will  easily  be  read  as,  or  suggest, 
>ii<-t/ii)if,  and  Hint,  if  it  be  not  the  required  word,  will  suggest,  in  connection  with 
the  context,  the  proper  word  for  the  place,  namely,  methodic,  method  toil,  method* 
it-till;/,  or  Methodism,  (e)  When  the  proper  position  of  a  primitive  w»rd  and  that 
of  the  derivative  words  would  be  different,  as  of  Jieftitf{3)  and  RefuttitionC*),  and 
the  corresponding  position  of  the  two  words  would  be  the  same,  they  are  both 
placed  in  that  position  (as  Bay'-'-Fet,  Refute-d-ation),  units*  a.  different  position  is 
required  for  distinction's  sake;  as  Ray3-Pet,  Eepute-d-ation,  to  distinguish  these 
words  from  Eay--Ped,  rapid-ly,  rapidity  (which  is  in  conformity  with  the  rule),  aud 
Kay'-Pet,  repeat-ed,  repetition. 

s  i-i  tUis  counti  y.— The  word-sign  Kay2  for  country  was  flrst  introduced  by 
the  Hand  Book. 

*  In  E  up;!  a  ucT.— Ing-end1  (/.*.,  Eng'nd),  as  a  word-sign  for  England,  was 
introduced  by  the  Hand- Rook.     It  is  distinct  from  the  fign  for  Englixh  and  thing 
(Ing1),  and  is  more  suggestive  in  phrase- writing,  especially  when  brought  out  of  its 
proper  position,  than  the  Old  sign  (Ing1). 

*  history  Is — 244,  K.  3  (1). 

«  existing  Statcs._237,  K.  1,  1) 

1  (  ).— The  reporter  should  endeavor  to  indicate  parentheses  as  often  as  pos- 
sible. If  not  indicated,  they  are  apt  frequently  to  cause  difficulty  in  reading;  for. 
if  the  reader  should  not  at  once  observe  the  parenthesis,  and  read  it  with  suitable 
inflsctious,  the  idea  not  being  received,  the  sentence  would  appear  confused,  and 
tuach  time  would  be  lost  in  arriving  at  the  correct  reading. 


138          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

tween  the  new  and  the  ol  i  States.*  No  one  claims  that  such  inequal- 
ity exists  in  the  contemplation*  of  the  Constitution. 

Another  proof  that  slavery1*  was  allowed  only  a  brief  duration  is  to 
be  found  in  the  Ordinance  for  the  Northwest  Territory. ' '  That  and 
the  Constitution  were  framed  at  nearly  the  same  time,12  and  to  some 
extent13  by  the  same  men.  The  Ordinance  provides  for  the  recapture 
of  fugitive  servants ;  and,  inasmuch  as  it  speaks  expressly  of  slavery, 
we  will  assume  that  fugitive  slaves  are  included.  But  the  Ordinance, 
like  the  migration  and  importation  clause  in  the  Constitution,  conlir.as 
its  benefits  at  this  point  (if  benefits  they  may  be  called)  to  the  old 
States.  It  was  only  those  who  had  escaped  from  "any  one  of  the 
original  States"  that  might  be  recaptured.  Hence,  like  that  clause, 
the  Ordinance  also  shows  that  the  new  States  were  not  to  have  slavery 
at  all,  and  that  the  old  States  were  not  to  have  it  after  the  few  years 
allowed  them  in  which  to  bring  it  to  a  peaceful  and  gradual  close. 

But  I  may  be  asked  why,  since  the  Ordinance  and  the  migration  and 
importation  clause  both  prove  so  clearly  the  policy  and  purpose  of 
abolishing  slavery,  there  is  nothing  in  the  fugitive  servant  clause  of 
the  Constitution  to  prove  the  like  policy  and  purpose.  Why  does  not 
this  clause,  like  that  in  the  Ordinance,  limit  the  right  of  recapture  to 

8  and  the  old  States.—  The,  is  omitted  here,  and  and  is  adapted  to  the  posi- 
tion of  old.  (6)  The  practiced  reporter  may  thus  usually  dispose  of  the  phrase  and 
t/if,  thus  saving  many  a  lifting  of  the  pen,  without  at  all  impairing  legibility. 

•  In  the  contemplation.— 250,  3.  This  phrase-sign  might  be  read  in  con- 
tfmplation;  instead  of  "in  the  contemplation."  In  all  such  cases  of  omissions  and 
possible  double  readings,  either  the  intended  sense  is  not  affected  by  the  omission 
of  a  word,  or  the  context,  carefully  considered,  will  show  that  a  word  needs  to  be 
supplied. 

i»  that  slavery.— 244,  E.  3,  (6). 

"  Northwest  Territory.— The  principle  of  special  contraction  is  partially 
employed  in  writing  this  phrase-sign.  If  ttiis  phrase  were  occurring  frequently,  it 
might  be  written  tin  accordance  with  237,  R.  2, 1)  Ner-Way-Ter,  i.  e.,  transferred  to 
common  print,  "Nor.  W.  Ter." 

12  at  licnrly  the  same  time. — This  phrase  would  very  probably  have  been 
written,  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  Tee3  Ner>-Kl  61  (i.  e.,  a 
dot  above  the  line)  Hem"  Tee1 ;  i.  e.,  with  five  strokes,  one  dot,  and  four  liftings; 
vhile  the  Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires  but  four  strokes  and  no  dots 
and  no  liftings ;  i.  e.,  is  nearly  100  per  cent,  faster  than  the  Old  expression,  (b)  tiime 
time  may  usuully  l>e  written  fcfemt,  without  vocalization  (with  ii),  and  be  di.'tin- 
guished  from  some  time  ^Semt>,  provided  the  preceding  the  is  expressed,  as  in  this 
phrase-sign. 

i*  and  to  some  extent. — And  (Ketoid)  is  here  prefixed  to  Sem4,  to  some. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  139 

"the  original  States?"14     The  simple  and  sole  explanation  is  that  this  clause 
in  the  Constitution  does  not  refer1*  to  slaves. 

The  fact  that  this  clause  does  not  limit  its  uses  to  the  old  States 
utterly  forbids  the  putting  of  a  pro-slavery  interpretation  upon  it.     If 
the  Convention  intended  to  have  it  apply  to  slaves,  why  did  they  not 
qualify  it  so  as  to  make  it  correspond  with  the  Ordinance  and  the  I 
migration  and  importation  clause  ? 

Again,  the  language  of  the  fugitive  servant  clause  in  the  Constitu- 
tion makes  it  wholly  inapplicable  to  slaves.  The  persons  referred  to  in 
this  clause  are  debtors.  Service  is  due  from  them.  But  the  slave, 
being  a  mere  chattel,  and.  therefore,  incapable  of  making  a  contract, 
can  owe  nothing.  Says  Justice  Best:  " A  slave  is  incapable  of  com- 
pact." The  slave  codes"  all  declare  that  he  can  own  nothing."  But 
manifestly,  he  who  can  own  nothing  can  owe  nothing. 

And  there  is  still  one  other  reason  \vhy  we  should  believe  that  the 
framers  of  the  Constitution  did  not  intend  to  help  slavery  live,  and 
why  we  should  believe  that  they  committed  themselves  to  no  guiltier 
policy — guilty  I  admit  it  was — than  that  of  allowing  the  dying  demon 
a  few  years  in  which  to  die.  It  is,  that  to  believe  the  contrary  involves 
them  in  the  grossest  hypocrisy.  They  began  the  Constitution  with  the 
solemn  declaration  that  they  intended  it  to  "secure  the  blessings  of 
liberty  ;"  and  when  they  had  finished  it,  and  were  about  to  submit  it 
to  the  people,  they  unanimously  struck  from  it  the  word  "  servitude," 
and  supplied  its  place  with  "service,"  for  the  avowed  reason  that 
servitude  denotes  the  condition  of  slaves,  and  service  the  obligations 
of  freemen.  For  one,  I  am  not  prepared  to  call  them  hypocrites,  as 
all  virtually  do  who  impute  to  them  pro-slavery  purposes. 


35 


I  will,  at  this  stage1  of  my  remarks,  speak  of  the  pro-slavery 
interpretations    of   the    Constitution    by    anti-slavery   men. 


i«  to  the  original  States.— p.  169,  E.  12,  &. 

>8does  not  refer. — 25. 

i«  slave  codes.— 182,  R.  1,  7>. 

i7  nothing.  — Isaac  Pitman  has  sometimes  written  this  word  En3  Ing,  and  to 
prevent  clashing  with  Anything,  the  latter  word  (or  phrase)  was  written  Kn-Ith- 
Iri;r.  This  plan  did  not  produce  satisfaction,  and  no  other  mode  of  remedying  an 
obvious  difficulty  having  presented  itself,  he  wrote  En'-Ing,  anything,  and  En-Ith- 
Ing.  nothing.  This  trouble  is  easily  disposed  of  by  providing  Nothing  with  a  needed 
contraction,  En-lth2. 

O~   *  at  tills  stas;e. — This  common  phrase  n^eds  a  phrase-sign,  -which  is 
*}''  secured  by  changing  for  the  purpose  the  usual  form  of  stage  (Steh- Jay),  as 
In  the  engraving. 


140          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

Coming  from  such  a  source,  they  are  peculiarly  pernicious.  The  mass 
of  the  American  people2  are  worshipers3  of  the  Constitution.  They 
recognize  no  higher  authority.  For  anti-slavery  men,  therefore,  to  tell 
them  it  is  pro-slavery,  is  to  bring  them  under  a  mighty  influence  to 
uphold  slavery.4  Most  lamentable,  therefore,  is  it  that  so  many  of 
these  sincere  lovers  of  freedom  should  be  taxing  their*  ingenuity*  to 
prove  that  the  Constitution  is7  pro-slavery. 

Freedom  can  bear  any  other  opposition  better  than8  this,  which  she 
encounters  in  the  house  of  her  friends.  She  can  bear  to  be  opposed  by 
the  current  religion  of  the  country,  for  the  people  are  fast  losing  all 
respect  for  a  conventional  and  spurious  religion,  which  mixes  itself  up 
with  slavery,*  instead  of  sternly  demanding  its  extinction  10  She  can 
bear  to  be  opposed  by  the  Democratic  party,  which,  Ahab-like,  has 
sold  itself  to  work  evil,  or  by  such  Republicans  as  use  freedom  to 
serve  party.  But  the  one  thing  that  freedom  can  not  bear"  is  to  have 
anti-slavery  men,  anti-slavery  leaders,  the  most  distinguished12  and 
influential  anti-slavery  newspapers,  at  work  to  rob  the  poor  and  power- 
less slave  of  the  Constitution,  and  give  it  to  the  proud  and  powerful 
slaveholder.  Oh  !  if  there  is  anything  that  belongs  to  the  slave,13  it  is 
this  paper,  which  our  fathers14  would  not  consent16  to  stain  with  the 
word  "slavery,"  and  which  they  were1' determined  should  go  down 
to  posterity  with  a  clean  and  fair  face  for  liberty. 

»  American  people. — p.  169,  R.  12,  6. 

3  worshipers. — p.  194,  E.  7.  • 

4  to  uphold  slavery.— 244,  E.  8,  (4). 

•  taxing  their.— See  the  Standard  Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHB,  5. 

•  Ingenuity.— p.  11T,  2S5, 1,  of  this  Eeader. 
i  Constitution  Is.— 244,  E.  3,  (1). 

s  better  than—See  this  Eeader,  p.  63,  xiii. 

•  with  slavery.— 244,  E.  3,  (5). 

i«  extinction.— See  this  and  the  related  words  in  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary. 

u  freedom  can  not  bear.— 244,  E.  3,  (1). 
11  most  distinguished.— 236,  8. 

13  to  the  slave.—  To  is  implied  before  the  by  writing  the  tick  (.Petoid)  for  the 
latter  in  the  fourth  position. 

14  which  our  fathers. — See  this  Eeader,  p.  62,  xr. 
18  -would   not  consent.—  p.  112,  E.  7,  l>. 

'•  and  which  tliey  were — See  DHR  in  the  Standard- Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary ;  and  also  p.  62,  xii.  of  this  Eeader. 


KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXKECISE8.  141 

I  have  said"  much  to  you  in  praise  of  the  Constitution.  Let  it  not 
be18  inferred,  however,  that  I  claim  for  it  the  first  place  in  your  hearts. 
Among  all  state  papers,  such  pre-eminence18  belongs  to  the  Declaration 
of  Independence.  They  greatly  exaggerate  the20  merits  of  the  Consti- 
tution who  see  in  it  the  origin  of  the  Union.  As  it  does  itself  declare, 
it  was  made  "in  order  to  form21  a  more  perfect  Union."  The  Union 
already  existed.  It  had  heen  entered  into  even  before  1776. -a  It  was, 
however,  the  Paper  of  that  memorable  year — the  noblest  political 
paper  ever  sent  over  the  world — that  was  the  first  to  set  forth,  formally 
and  authoritatively,  the  reason  why  the  American  Colonies"3  should 
become  one  nation,  and  the  first24  thus  to  set  forth  the  sublime  and 
mighty  principles  which  were25  to  vitalize  and  forever  govern  that  na- 
tion. This  is  the  paper  which  deserves  to  be  called  the  first  Constitution 
of  our  country ;  for  it  is  the  first  in  the  order  of  time  and  the  first  in  tbe 
degree  of  authority.  One  of  the  eminent  statesmen  (General  Hoot)  of 
my  State  pronounced  it  "the26  fundamental  law  of  the  land;"  and 
another  (John  C.  Spencer)  declared  it  to  be  "above  all27  constitutions 
and  all  laws."  The  Federal  Constitution  should  be  interpreted  in  the 
light  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence.28  But,  alas !  in  these  de- 
generate days,  that  Constitution,  Tvith  all  its  pro-slavery  interpreta- 
tions, is  blindly  worshiped,  and  the  great  and  heavenly  principles  of 


1"  I  liave  saitl.— See  this  Reader,  p.  110,  25",  and  '. 

19  liet  it  not  be.— Tent5,  -it  not,  is  a  valuable  word-sign,  first  presented  by 
the  Hand-Book.    See  phrases  beginning  with  LET  IT  NOT  in  the  Standard  Phono- 
graphic Dictionary. 

i»  such  pre-eminence — Pre-eminence  is  written  in  full,  as  in  the  engrav- 
ing, and  thus  distinguished  from  P/ominence-y  and  Permnnence-y,  which  are 
contracted.  See  these  words  and  EMINENCE  in  the  Dictionary. 

20  exaggerate  the — Isaac  Pitman  gave  Kays-Jay-Ret  as  the  outline  of  this 
word.    See  this  Reader,  p.  125,  3 18. 

«i  in  order  to  form— See  this  Reader,  p.  68,  333. 

22  '76 — See  this  Reader,  p.  76,  73. 

23  American  colonies — p.  169,  R.  12. 

a«  and  the  first.-  See  this  Reader,  p.  138,  848. 

25  which  were.— See  this  Reader,  p.  66,  311. 

*•  pronounced  it  the.— 236,  3. 

••»*  nb»ve  all. — See  this  Reader,  p.  62,  xiv.  The  principle  of  adding  all  and 
will  by  an  El-hook,  or  of  are,  were,  or  our  by  an  Ar-hook,  is,  of  course,  as  applica- 
l>le  within  a  word,  as  in  this  case,  as  in  ihose  words  to  which  an  El-hook  or  Ar-hook 
is  prefixed,  as  Bel1,  by  all;  thus,  Bee2-Vel,  above  all;  Schel2,  such  will;  Bee--Ver, 
above  our ;  Sober11,  such  are. 

28  Declaration  of  Imlependence.— This,  like  any  other  similar  phrase,  as 
•oon  as  it  appears  likely  to  occur  often,  is  contracted  under  the  principle  of  237,  R.  2.  I 

f 


14:2          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

the  Declaration  of  Independence  are  ridiculed  as  "a  fanfaronade  of 
nonsense,"  and  as  "glittering  generalities."  The  Constitution,  instead 
of  being  used  to  disparage  and  make  void  the  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence, should  rather  he  viewed  as  supplemental  to  it,  and  as  serv- 
ing to  carry  out  into29  detail  the  broad  and  precious  principles  of  that 
first  and  greatest  Constitution.  Our  fathers  could  have  had**  no  pos- 
sible right  to  contravene  or  slight  those  principles.  Had  they,  when 
making  and  adopting  the31  Constitution,  been  guilty  of  overlooking  or 
in  any  wise  dishonoring  them,  they  would  therein  have  been  guilty 
of  the  most  infamous  treason  toward  all  their  countrymen  who  had 
expended  treasure  or  periled  life  to  establish  them,  and  also  toward 
the  good  Lafayette  and  the  other  gallant  foreigners  whom  those  prin- 
ciples had  attracted  to  our  shores. 

I  spoke  of  the  principles  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence.  Prom- 
inent among  them  is  that  which  asserts  that  "  all  men  are  created 
equal."  This  principle  is  the  very  soul  of  the  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence ;  and  being  therefore  the  very  soul  of  the  Constitution,  it 
instantly  annihilates  all  possible  pro-slavery  interpretations  of  that 
instrument.  I  do  not  forget  that,  according  to  Chief  Justice  Taney's 
recent  discovery,  black  men  did  not  come  within  the  scope  of  this  prin- 
ciple, and  were  not  a  part  of  "all  men." 

O  £?  Nevertheless,  they  were  men,  and  they  voted  and  fought  by 
*^"  the  side  of  those  who  affirmed  that  "all  men  are  created 
equal."  Why,  then,  does  the  Chief  Justice  exclude  them  1  The  words 
of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  do  not  intimate  their  exclusion. 
What  rules  of  interpretation  are  there  to  authorize  him  to  go  away 
from  the  plain  meaning  of  these  plain  words  for  the  purpose1  of  fasten- 
ing the  crudest  wrong  upon  the  black  man,  and  of  involving  the 
fathers  in  the  deepest  and  basest  and  most  hypocritical  injustice? 
There  are  none.8  In  gross  violation  of  the  rules  of  legal  interpreta- 

«•  carry  out  Into.— See  this  Reader,  p.  63,  xvL 
so  could  Have  Had.— p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 
'-'•  when  malting  and  adopting  the.— See  this  Reader,  p.  72,  54. 

9/»  i  for  the  purpose.— This  phrase  sign,  though  properly  employed  in  any 
*-'"  kind  of  reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  special 
contraction  (287,  R.  2,  &),  the  being  omitted  under  the  principle  of  250,  3. 

11  there  are  none. — Are,  in  phrase-writing,  is  frequently  expressed  by  Ray; 
but  when  written  alone,  and  generally  when  commencing  phrase-signs,  the  most 
convenient  sign  is  Ar.  It  is  the  most  convenient  also  because  of  allowing  shorten- 
ing for  the  derivative  sign-word  art,  and  lengthening  for  the  addition  of  cihr.  See 


KEY    TO    THE    KEPOKTKSTG-   EXERCISES.  143 

tion,  at  the  expense  of  blackening  the  fame  of  the  fathers,  and  at  the 
expense  of  outraging  all  the  rights  and  murdering  all  the  manhood  of 
his  equal  brothers,3  has  the  Chief  Justice  undertaken  to  show  that  our 
fathers,  when  speaking  of  "  all  men,"  did  not  mean  all  men.  And  all 
this  has  he  done,  notwithstanding  the  fathers  spoke  so  evidently  with 
philosophical  precision,  and  notwithstanding,  too,  that  they  spoke  with 
religious  solemnity,4  and  called  God  to  witness  their*  sincerity.  But 
our  fathers  knew  as  well  as  we  do  that  all  parts  of  the  human  brother- 
hood are  equally  dear  to  the  great  heart  of  their  common  Maker. 
Were  they,  then,  such  brazen-faced  hypocrites  as  to  dare  appeal  to  His 
knowledge  of  their  conscious  rectitude,  when  all  the  while  they  were 
guilty  of  the  mental  reservation  which  the  Chief  Justice  imputes  to 
them  ? — guilty  of  deliberately  excluding  a  portion  of  their  fellow-men 
from  the  equal  rights  of  all  men  ? — nay,  guilty  of  denying  that  God  has 
sent"  that  portion  into  the  world  with  rights7  equal  to  those  of  other 
men? 

The  Chief  Justice  admits  that8  "  All  men"  "  would  seem  to  embrace 
the9  whole  human  family."10  "Seems,  Madam!  Nay,  .it  is."  He 
also  admits  that  the  words  "  would  be  so  understood  if  used  in  a  simi- 
lar11 instrument  at  this  day."  Important  admission  !  Entirely  fatal, 
as  we  shall  see,  to  his  attempt  to  pervert  their  significance  !  For  that 
the  statesmen  of  this  day  have  a  broader,  juster,  and  more  fraternal 

DHK  in  the  Dictionary.  It  would  not  be  allowable  to  shorten  Bay  for  art;  and  if 
allowable,  the  sign  would  not  be  suggestive.  In  Standard  Phonography  it  would 
be  allowable  to  lengthen  Ray  for  are  tkr,  but  Eaydher,  though  allowably  used  after 
another  word  for  these  words,  would  not,  when  alone,  be  so  suggestive  as  Ardher, 
nor  so  convenient  for  joining  with  a  following  word.  Therefore,  the  general  use  of 
Eay  for  are,  when  standing  alone,  can  not  be  approved.  27,  B.  2,  0. 

3  equal  brothers. — 246, 1. 

•  solemnity.— See  this  Eeader,  p.  lit,  28§. 

•  to  -witness  their.— See  this  Eeader,  p.  62,  xiil. 

•  God  has  sent.— 244,  B.  3,  (1). 

i  with  rights. —  With  as  well  as  We  may  be  joined  to  Em,  En,  Eay,  Lay,  by 
the  Way-hook,  as  in  this  case.  p.  163,  E.  3. 

s  admits  that.— The  rule  of  27,  4,  of  turning  the  circle  between  two  strokes 
in  the  most  convenient  manner,  is  complied  with  in  this  case  by  writing  it  as  in  the 
engraving— though  it  might  be  nearly  as  easy  to  write  the  circle  on  the  back  of 
Dhet ;  which  method  some  writers  may  prefer. 

»  would  seem  to  embrace  the. — See  this  Eeader,  p.  71,  413. 

10  human  family.— p.  169,  B.  12,  Z>. 

11  In  a  similar.— p.  168,  E.  10,  a. 


144:         SECOND   BTANDAKD-FHONOGKAPIIIC    READER. 

sense  of  human  rights  than  had  the12  statesmen  of  that  day,  is  a  deep 
delusion.  All  false  is  it  that  the  statesmen  of  that  day  were  BO  bigot- 
ed as  to  forget,  and  that  the  statesmen  of  this  day  are  so  catholic  as  to 
remember,  that  Africans  are  men. 

Who  was  the  first  President  of  the  United  States  ?  An  open  Aboli- 
tionist. For  Washington  not  only  emancipated  his  own  slaves,  but 
confessed  his13  anxiety  to  vote  for  the  emancipation  of  other  men's 
slaves. 

Who  was  the  most  intellectual  among  the  great  men  of  the  Revolu- 
tion ?  This  honor  would  probably  be  accorded  to  Alexander  Hamilton, 
who  said  :  "  The  sacred  rights  of  mankind  are  not  to  be  rummaged  for 
among  old  parchments  or  musty  records.  They  are  written  as  with  a" 
sunbeam  in  the  whole  volume"  of  human  nature,  by  the  hand  of  the 
Divinity  itself,  and  can  never  be  erased  or  obscured  by  mortal  power. 
All  men  are  by  nature  entitled  to  equal  privileges.  Natural  liberty  is 
the  gift  of  the  beneficent  Creator18  to  the  whole  human  race." 

Who  was  the  pre-eminently  practical  and  common-sense"  man  of 
the  Revolution  ?  Perhaps  Benjamin  Franklin.1*  Nevertheless,  scarcely 
was  the  Constitution,  of  which  he  himself  was  a  framer,  adopted,  ere, 
as  President  of  the  Pennsylvania  Abolition  Society,  he  petitioned1* 
Congress  to  abolish  slavery.  His  petition  said  that  the  power  of 
Congress  should  be  exercised  impartially  in  behalf  of  "  all  descriptions 
of  people,  without  distinction  of  color." 

Who  was  the  first  Chief  Justice  of  the  United  States  ?  John  Jay, 
the  President  of  the  New  York  Abolition  Society — the  m;in  who  said  : 

ia  than  had  the.— See  this  Reader,  p.  63,  xvi. 

is  confessed  his.— 244,  E.  8,  (4). 

i«  as  with,  a.— 245. 

i*  whole  volume. — 164. 

"  beneficent  Creator.— See  BENEFICENT  In  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary. 

17  and  common-sense. — Though  in  moat  cases  of  joining  Teloid1  for  either 
or  or  and,  the  context  would  make  the  necessary  distinction,  yet,  for  distinction's 
sake,  it  is  well  not  to  join  or  to  a  following  stroke,  when  and  would  necessarily  be 
Joined  in  the  same  way.  Or  can  be  safely  joined,  of  course,  in  all  cases  where  and 
might  be  joined  by  Ketoid. 

>*  Benjamin  Franklin.— Franklin  is  contracted  to  Fer-Klen,  In  accord- 
ance with  a  general  principle  (236,4);  but  Benjamin  is  represented  by  Bee,  in 
accordance  with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  R.  2).  Of  course,  such  a 
contraction  for  such  a  familiar  name  may  be  used  in  any  kind  of  reporting. 

»  he  petitioned.— Sec  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary  under  AXCIEMT. 


KEY    TO    THE    KEPOBTING   EXERCISES.  145 

"Till  America  comes  into  this  measure  (the  abolition  of  slavery),  her 
prayers  to  Heaven  will  be  impious."80  Moreover,  it  was  he  who  said 
that  one  reason  why  the  word  "slaves"  was  not  put  into  the  Constitu- 
tion was,  that21  slavery  is  "  repugnant"  to  that  part  of  the  Declaration 
of  Independence  which  says,  "All  men  are  created,  equal."  In  other 
words,  John  Jay  said  that  "all  men,"  in  that  instrument,  includes 
Africans.  Roger  B.  Taney  says  it  does  not.22  Which  is  the  better 
authority  ? 

Chief  Justice  Taney  has  four  reasons  for  his  conclusion  that,  in  the 
days  of  the  Revolution,  "all  men"  did  not  mean  all  men.  1st.  The 
Constitution  is  for  slavery.*3 

O  'J  But,  as  we  have  seen, '  it  is  full  of  powers  for  killing,  and  has 
*-*  *  none  for  saving,  slavery.  It  is  ashamed  to  mention,  the  hate- 
ful2 word.  His  three  other  reasons  are  :  1st.  The  whites  of  that  period 
would  not  intermarry  with  the  blacks.  2d.  Nor  consent  to  serve  with  them  in  the 
mUitia,.  3d.  Nor  consent  to  the  naturalization  of  alien  blacks.  But  will  the 
whites  of  this  period  ?  Oh,  no — no  more  than  the  whites  of  that. 
Poor  Chief  Justice !  Greatly  do  you  need  to  improve  your  logic ! 
1st.  You  admit  that,3  in  our  day,  "all  men"  includes  Africans.  2d. 
You  admit  it  because  of  our  greater  respect  for  their  rights.  But  this 
respect  is,  in  fact,  immeasurably  less  than  it  was4  in  the  Revolution  ; 
and  hence,  in  the  Revolution,  far  more  emphatically  than  it  does  now, 
did  ' '  all  men' '  include  Africans. 

What,  however,  have  these  prejudices,  or,  indeed,  any  other  of  the 
prejudices  of  the  whites  against  the  blacks,  to  do  with  the  question  of 
citizenship  ?  The  mutual  prejudices  of  Catholics  and  Protestants  are 

20  impious. — This  word  is  written  Emp-Es,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
imponsilile.  Both  words  being  of  the  same  part  of  speech,  one  would  be  liable  to 
be  read  for  the  other,  if  written  alike. 

«  -was  tHnt.— 217.    It  should  be  observed  that  the  joined  ends  of  Zee  and 
Dhet  are  not  tapered.    To  taper  them,  would  lose  the  advantage  of  joining. 
*»  It  does  not — 28 ;  244,  K.  3,  (1). 
"  Constitution  Is  for  slavery.— 244,  B.  3,  (1)  and  (5). 

07  '  as  we  have  seen. — 245. 

^'   »  hatcfal.-p.  119,  E.  8. 

•  you  admit  that.— p.  62,  xi.  of  this  Header. 

«  less  than  It  was.—  The  direction  of  even  word-signs  whose  stroke  is  El  or 
Lay  is  sometimes  changed  for  convenience  of  phrase-writing,  as  Layshon  is  changed 
to  Elshon  in  the  very  next  phrase,  ft  is  added  to  than  by  halving.  See  p.  68,  xvi. 
of  this  Eeader.  Bee  LESB  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


146         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   KEADEB. 

strong.  Nevertheless  they  let  each  other  vote  and  be  citizens.  So, 
too,  the  whites,  notwithstanding  their  prejudices  against  the  blacks, 
let  them  vote  and  be  citizens.  This  is  true  now.  More  emphatically 
true  was  it  in  the  times  of  the  Revolution.  The  articles  of  Confedera- 
tion betrayed  this  prejudice  in  the  use  of  the  word  "  white."  Never- 
theless they  accorded  citizenship  to  the  blacks — South  Carolina  and 
Georgia  alone  voting  against  it.*  How  absurd  to  doubt  that  it  is 
accorded'  in  the  Constitution,  which  contains  not  the  word  "white !" 

But  I  must  hasten  to  the  end  of  my  words.  I  said  that  I  came  here 
to  beseech  you  to  know  no  law  for  slavery,  but  to  trample  under  foot 
whatever  claims  to  be  a  law  for  slavery.  I  honor  your  intelligent 
Judiciary  for  declaring  the  Fugitive  Slave  Act  unconstitutional.  I 
honor  Wisconsin  for  standing  bravely  by  her  brave  Judiciary.  A  good 
and  glorious  example  is  all  this.  But  I  am  here  to  call  on  you  for  a 
still  better  and  more  glorious  example.  Wisconsin — both  her  people 
and  her  judges — must  know  no  law,  nor  admit  the  possibility  of  any 
law,  for  slavery.  A  statute  may  be  in  favor  of  slavery  ;  a  constitution 
— even  the  idolized  Federal  Constitution — may  be  in  favor  of  slavery  ; 
but  the  voice  of  all  Wisconsin  must  be,  that  slavery  is  too  repugnant 
to  justice  and  humanity,  to  reason  and  religion,  to  be  capable  of  wear- 
ing any,  even  the  least,  semblance  of  law. 

A  blessed  result  of  your  disowning  the  lawfulness  of  slavery  will  be 
releasing  your  conscience  from  all  obligation  to  re-plunge  into  the  hell 
of  slavery  your  poor  brothers  and  sisters,  who  have  come  up  out  of  it 
with  their  scarred  bodies,  and,  by  the  help  of  the  friendly  North  star,7 
worked  their  danger-crowded  way  as  far  as  your  borders.  Wherever 
the  conscience  is  so  perverted  as  to  admit  this  obligation,  alas !  how 
baleful  must  be  its  influence  upon  the  whole  character !  How  such  a 
conscious  obligation  must  shackle  all  manly  freedom !  How  it  must 
debase  and  sink  the  nature  that  has  fallen  under  it !  So  long  as  this 
soul-shriveling  obligation  remains  in  the  public  conscience  of  Wiscon- 
sin, so  long  the  religion  of  Wisconsin  can  not  be  the  generous  and  en- 
nobling religion  of  Jesus  Christ ;  can  not  be  characterized  by  the  bold- 
ness, honesty,  and  impartial  love  of  the  true  religion.  Young  as  your 
State  is,  you  nevertheless  have  a  University  at  your  seat  of  govern. 

»  against  it. — See  phrases  beginning  with  AGAINST  In  the  Standard-Phono- 
graphic Dictionary. 

«  that  It  Is  accorded.— Kred  for  accorded  is  here  vocalized  with  &  for  the 
sake  of  greater  legibility. 

7  North  star. — In  this  special  contraction,  North  is  expressed  by  Ner,  and 
the  consonants  of  star  by  the  Ster-loop. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  147 

ment,  well  endowed,  prosperous,  and  with  a  ripe  scholar  at  its  head. 
It  was  my  good  fortune  to  spend  a  day  with  him  during  the  past  week. 
I  know  the  great  worth  of  this  cherished  friend  of  my  youth  and  man- 
hood. But  I  also  know  that  if  the  Fugitive  Slave  Act,  or  any  pro- 
slavery  interpretations  of  duty,  shall  be  allowed  to  continue  to  exert 
their  withering  influence  upon  the  moral  sense  and  public  sentiment 
of  your  State,  this  Institution,  notwithstanding  its  great  advantages, 
can  not  fail  to  suffer  immensely 

O  O  in  common  with  all  your  educational  and  religious  interests  ; 
*-KJ  ay,  and  with  your  material  interests  also.  The  highest  cul- 
ture of  the  understanding  can  not  be  reached  where  the  people  receive 
the  behests  of  slavery  as  law.  Wisconsin  manhood  can  never  realize 
the  beau  ideal  of  manhood  until  it  shall  have  been  aroused  to  throw  off 
from  its  conscience,  indignantly  and  forever,  all  obligation  to  do  what 
is  mean  and  cruel  and  wicked.  And  when,  I  ask,  is  a  man  doing  what 
is  mean  and  cruel  and  wicked,  if  it  is  not  when  he  permits  himself  to 
be  transformed  into  a  bloodhound, '  to  bay  upon  the  track  of  innocent 
human  prey  ? 

Among  the  most  valuable  results  of  your  ignoring  all  law  for  slavery 
will  be  the  preparation  of  your  way  to  grow  in  the  knowledge  of  true 
law — a  knowledge  inferior  to  no  other  in  its  happy  influence  upon  the 
character.  To  whatever  extent  you  are  now  guilty  of  recognizing  in 
slavery  the  name  and  obligations  of  law,  and  of  thus  according  to  the 
very  worst  thing  the  name  and  obligations  due  to  the  very  best,  to 
that  extent  do  you  now  trifle  with,  and  twist,  and  blunt  your  moral 
nature.  But  when  you  shall  have  come  to  identify  law  with  right,  and 
to  acknowledge  nothing  to  be  law  which  is  not  right— though  I  readily 
admit  that  there  are  many  violations  of  right,  and  therefore  many  ille- 
galities,2 which  it  is  better  to  bear  with  than  resist — then  you  will  have 
entered  a  law-school3  in  which  wisdom  and  goodness  grow  as  constantly 
as  do  folly  and  wickedness  outside  of  it  ;4  a  law-school  in  which,  under 

OO  l  bloodhound.— 25. 

2  Illegalities — See  this  Reader,  p.  117,  28s. 

'  a  law-school. — In  many  compound  words,  the  elements  of  which  it  is  de- 
sirable shall  be  united  in  their  forms  as  they  are  joined  by  the  voice,  the  form  of 
one  or  the  other  of  the  elements  is  changed  so  as  to  admit  of  their  being  joined,  as 
in  this  word,  Laic-school ;  in  writing  which,  school  is  changed  from  its  usual  out- 
line (Skel),  which  would  not  join  with  Lay  (law). 

*  outside  of  It.— It  is  here  added  by  halving,  of  being  implied.    250,  3. 


148         SECOND   STAND ARD-PHCMSTOG  RAPIIIC   READER. 

the  teachings  of  true  law,  the  mind  expands  as  rapidly  as  it  bccomt-a 
dwarfed  when  under  the  influence  of  those  conventional  legalities 
which  lack  all  the  great  elements  and  all  the  soul  of  true  law. 

I  have  done.  I  came  here,  as  I  have  repeatedly  told  you,  to  ask 
you  to  know  no  law  for  slavery.  There  is  no  remedy  for  slavery  but 
to  deny  its  legality.  Do  what  you  will  against  slavery,  you  will  only 
be  helping  it,  so  long  as  you  acknowledge  it  to  be  law.  In  vain  will  a 
man  talk,  and  pray,  and  labor  for  the  prevention  of  forgery,  perjury, 
theft,  and  murder,  if  nevertheless  he  admits  in  their  behalf  the  plea 
that  they  are  sacred,  obligatory  law.  Once,  however,  declare  it  an 
outlaw,  and  make  your  declaration  sincere  and  effective  by  refusing  to 
vote  for  any  man  who  recognizes  its  legality,  and  then  slavery  will 
have  nothing  to  do  but  to  die. 

The  abolition  of  all  American  slavery  !*  How  joyful*  the  anticipation 
of  an  event  which  shall  terminate  wrongs  so  sad,  miseries  so  unutter- 
able !  Thrice  blessed,  then,  the  slave,  whose  weary  bondage  will  at 
last  be  ended !  Even  still  more  blessed  the  liberation  of  the  slave- 
holder ;  for  the  sorrows  in  which  slavery  binds  the7  slave  are  as  nothing 
compared  with  the  sins  in  which  slavery  binds  the  slaveholder !  Thrice 
blessed,  then,  our  nation,  when  delivered  from  its  great  curse  and 
peril !  Thrice  blessed,  then,  and  no  longer  thrice  cursed,  its  influence 
upon  the  other*  nations  of  the  earth  !  Safe,  then,  the  Union  purchased 
with  precious  blood !  Indivisible,  then,  our  beloved  country,  when 
slavery  shall  be  blotted  out,  and  when  all  the  great  beneficial*  inter- 
ests, no  longer  hindered  by  that  one  terrible,10  destructive,  and  dis- 
uniting interest,  shall  be  left  free  to  work  harmoniously  and  mightily 
in  binding  North,  and  South,  and  East,  and  West  in  a  peaceful  aud 
loving  fellowship,  never  more  to  be  broken  ! 

«  of  all  American  slavery.— American  xlavery,  \n  accordance  with  the 
principle  of  special  contraction,  is  represented  here  by  Em  for  American  and  Slay 
for  slavery. 

«  Joyful — p.  119,  E.  8. 
'  binds  the.— 187,  R.  1. 

»  upon  the  other.— 264,  R.  4.  See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Diet  onarjr, 
under  DHL 

•  beneficial.— See  this  word  in  the  Dictionary. 
»•  terrible — See  thw  Reader,  p.  82, 16s. 


KEY   TO   THE  BEPOKTING   EXEECISE8.  149 


LAW    REPORTING.1 

MR.  EDWIN  SMITH  SWORN. 
Direct  Examination. 

OQ  Q.2  What  is  your  occupation.3 

^^  A.2  Civil  surveyor;  have  been  so  since  1831.4 

Q.  In  this  city.5 

A.  Yes,  sir.* 


OQ  1  Law  Reporting.— See  an  article  on  the  subject  of  "Phonography  in 
*'•'  Law  Courts,"  in  the  Phonographic  Intelligencer,  p.  181. 
s  Q,  ami  A.— It  is  best  to  begin  every  question  -with  the  letter  Q,  written  small, 
as  in  the  engraving,  for  the  sake  of  speed.    Close  at  the  end  of  the  question  write 
a — for  the  double  purpose  of  denoting  the  termination  of  the  question  (i.  e.,  as  a 
period)  and  the  beginning  of  the  Anxicer.    A  small  q  at  the  end  of  the  Answer  has 
a  corresponding  use.    There  is  thus  saved  the  necessity  and  the  loss  of  time  of 
making  a  period,  or  of  commencing  a  new  paragraph  with  every  question  and 
answer. 

(I/)  In  transcribing  testimony,  place  Q.  and  A.  just  at  the  left  of  a  line  (either  ruled, 
as  in  "  Legal  Cap,"  or  formed  by  folding  the  paper,  as  lawyers  sometimes  do)  about 
one  inch  from  the  left-hand  side  of  the  page,  or  perhaps  H  little  more  in  case  the 
manuscript  is  to  be  stitched  or  bound  at  the  side.  This  margin  should  be  consider- 
able, so  as  to  allow  of  annotations  at  the  side.  However,  in  case  of  the  report  being 
bound  (as  other  books  usually  are)  at  the  side,  room  in  the  margin  need  not  be  left 
for  annotations ;  for,  they  can  then  be  placed  on  the  opposite  page,  which  should 
be  blank. 

(c)  Ease  of  reference  to  testimony  is  favored  by  leaving  an  extra  blank  line  be- 
tween an  Amswer  and  the  following  Question. 

(d)  The  letter  Q  is  to  be  placed  before  every  sentence  to  which  the  witness  re- 
sponds as  to  a  question ;  i.  e.,  before  every  real  question,  even  though  it  should  not 
have  the  form  of  one. 

(<?)  In  transcription,  it  is  unnecessary  to  write  th6  interrogation  point  (1),  for  it 
would  be  superfluous,  the  sign  of  a  question  (Q)  having  already  been  written  at  the 
beginning. 

3  Whnt  Is  your  occupation.— The  word  your  is  omitted  here,  under  the 
principle  of  250,  8,  in  order  to  secure  the  advantage  of  a  phrase-sign.  See  this 
Ecwler,  p.  71,  413. 

<  1831.— See  this  Header,  p.  78,  8".  In  law-reporting  there  is  no  need  of 
placing  an  apostrophe  or  stroke  before  the  last  figures  of  dates. 

*  In  this  city. — The  circle  of  Dhees  might  have  been  enlarged  to  express 
the  flret  sound  of  city;  but  one  «  may  be  omitted  safely,  and  with  an  advantage  as 
to  speed,  in  accordance  with  p.  194,  K.  8. 

6  Yes,  sir. — This  very  valuable  word-sign,  especially  for  the  reporting  of  tes-  J 
timony,  was  first  presented  by  the  Hand-Book. 


150         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

Q.  Have  you  made  a  map  showing  where  a  line  48  feet  west  of  the 

westerly  line  of  West-st. T  will  come. 
A.  I  have. 
Q.  Is  that  it. 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

The  diagram  here  shown  to  the  witness  was  marked  "  Exhibit 

No.  4."8 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Smith  make  this. 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Cra  ss- Examination* 

Q.  At  whose  request  did  you  make  the  map  in  question. 

A.  At  the  request  of  the  plaintiffs  in  the  suit.10 

Q.  What  data  did  you  make  your  estimates  upon. 

A.  There  is  no11  estimate  made  about  the  map  ;  it  is  a  simple  survey 

showing  where  a  line  48  feet  west  of  the  westerly  line  of  West-st. 

would  cross  these  premises — what  portion  would  be  taken  in ; 

showing  an  absolute  fact.     I  can  go  on  and  describe  the  process 

if  that  is  what  is  wanted. 


i  West-st.— The  t  of  West  is  omitted,  in  accordance  with  236,  8 ;  and  then  one 
of  the  Es-sounds  is  omitted  under  the  license  of  p.  194,  R.  8. 

*  Exhibit  No.  4.— It  is  well  for  the  reporter  of  testimony  to  insert  in  the 
margin  of  his  notes  the  number  of  the  Exhibits,  as  in  the  engraving,  so  that  he  can 
readily  refer  to  the  testimony  concerning  them  ;  and  also  in  the  margin  of  the  tran- 
script, for  the  ready  reference  to  them  by  the  lawyers,  or  other  persons,  making  use 
of  the  report. 

»  Cross-Exumlnntlon.— It  is  well,  if  there  is  sufficient  time,  to  write  "  C.  E." 
for  Crosx-Esramination,  as  in  the  engraving,  at  the  beginning  of  the  notes  of  the 
cross-examination.  But  if  there  is  not  time,  go  on,  even  without  any  break,  pimply 
writing  "trq"  before  the  first  cross-question;  as"./?<ty"  is  written  before  the  first 
question  on  the  Re-direct  Examination,  imd  u  Bxqn  before  the  first  question  on 
the  Re-cross  Examination.  (6)  Before  every  question  by  the  Court  write  "qc;n 
and  "  yj"  before  every  question  by  a  Juror. 

10  plaintiffs  In  the  suit— 1ST,  B.  1. 

11  there  Is  no,  etc. — The  distinct  affirmations  of  a  witness,  which  in  ordinary 
matter  would  be  regarded  as  separate  sentences,  are  usually  in  reports  of  testimony 
separated  by  semicolons  (;)  instead  of  periods ;  though,  if  these  sentences  were  quite 
independent,  I  should  conform  to  the  ordinary  rules  of  punctuation,  and  separate 
them  by  periods.    It  is  advisable  to  punctuate  quite  freely  in  taking  the  words  of  a 
witness,  because  there  is  more  difficulty  frequently  than  in  most  other  kinds  of  re- 
porting in  determining  the  correct  punctut.tion;  upon  which,  perhaps,  in  testimony 
very  much  may  depend. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  151 

Q.  Are  tL-?re  any  estimates  of  distances  in  the  map. 

A.  There  are  measurements  in  the  map. 

Q.  Upon  what  data  did  you  make  your  measurements. 

A.  On  the  known  fact  that  West-st.  is  70  feet  wide  at  right  angles  . 

and  I  was  instructed  to  ascertain  where  a  line  48  feet  from  the 

westerly  side  of  West-st.  would  intercept  these  stalls  as  they  arc 

called. 

Q.  And  that  is  the  line  in  red. 
A.  One  red  line  shows  the  westerly  line  of  West-st.  ;  the  other,  the 

48  feet. 
Q.  And  the  first  red  line  looking  westerly  shows  the  westerly  line 

of  West-st.  as  it  is  at  present. 
A.  Yes,  sir. 
Q.  And  the  other  red  line  parallel  with  it  shows  where  48  feet  west 

of  the  westerly  line  of  West-st.  would  come. 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Re-direct  Examination. 

Q.  Did  you  at  any  time  make  a  map  showing  the  amount  of  surface 

filled  in  between  Vesey  and  Dey-sts.,  west  of  West-st. 
A.  I  did. 

Q.  Have  you  that  map. 
A.  I  have  it  here. 

The  map  was  here  marked  by  "the  Referees  "  Exhibit  No.  5." 
Q.  This  is  the  westerly  line  of  West-st. 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  From  what  was  that  line  established. 
A.  As  by  the  law  of  1798. '« 

Q.  The  premises  in  the  suit  on  that  map  are  shown  in  blue  lines. 
A.  They  are  shown  by  a  pink-shade  around  them. 
Q.  Does  this  pink-shade  exclude  the  piers  and  include  the  48  feet 
A.  Yes,  sir. 
Q.  Since  when  have  these  premises  been  filled  in. 

Objected  toia  as  assuming  a  fact  not  proved. 

«  1798. — This  date  not  belonging  to  the  present  century,  had  to  be  written  in 
lull.  See  this  Eeader,  p.  78,  8a. 

is  Objected  to. — I  usually  write  06;°,  as  in  the  engn.ving,  for  Objected  to; 
1,  because  I  can  then  more  readily  refer  to  the  Objections;  2,  because  it  saves 
making  a  period,  or  commencing  a  new  paragraph. 


152         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC  HEADER. 

Q   Are  those  premises  filled  in. 

A.  They  are. 

Q.  Since  when  were  they  filled  in. 

A.  Since  1829  ;  they  have  all  been  filled  in  since  1829. 

Q.  Were  you  at  any  time  employed  by  any  of  the  city  authorities 

to  survey  the  ground  then  filled  in  and  make  a  map  of  it. 
A.  I  was,  sir — a  portion  of  it. 
Q.  When. 
A.  In  1849. 
Q.  By  whom. 
A.  By  the  Street  Commissioner,  at  the  request  of  the  Chairman  of 

the  Market  Committee. 
Q.  What  was  the  object  of  that  survey. 

Objected  to. 
MB.  E ."  I  want  to  show  that  the  ground  was  occupied  as  far 

back  as  five  years  prior  to  our  lease  ;  that  is,  as  far  back  as  1853. 
ME.  B .  No  matter  what  the  answer  to  that  may  be,  it  won't 

show  that. 

Objection  sustained,  because  the  inquiry  went  to  the  motive 

of  the  party  having  the 

Af\  survey  made. 

Q.  Did  you  make  a  map  of  your  survey. 
A.  I  did. 
Q.  Is  it  here. 
A.  No,  sir. 
Q.  A  copy  of  it. 
A.  No,  sir. 

14  E This  is  the  initial  of  the  name  of  one  of  the  lawyers  employed  in  this 

ease.  The  initial,  or  (perhaps,  for  distinction's  sake,  when  two  or  more  names  be- 
gin with  the  same  letter)  two  letters,  is  all  that  is  necessary  to  wriie  instead  of  the 
lawyer's  name.  These  letters  might  be  inclosed  by  a  curved  line,  as  suggested  in 
this  Reader  at  p.  121,  29"  ;  but  this  may  usually  be  saved  in  law-reporting,  without 
causing  confusion  or  doubt,  especially  when  the  long  period  is  placed,  as  is  the  case 
in  the  engraving,  before  the  initial  letter  or  letters.  (&)  When  a  lawyer's  name  is 
•written  at  the  commencement  of  his  remarks,  especially  in  a  body  of  testimony,  the 
transcriber  should  commence  it  a  little  to  the  left  of  the  left-hand  line  of  •  riting,  as 
in  this  Key.  It  should  be  underlined  with  two  strokes  of  the  pen.  And  upon  the 
neatness  of  doing  this,  and  other  little  things  of  the  kind  very  much  of  the  good 
appearance  of  a  manuscript-report  will  depend ;  and  hence  it  pays  to  do  them  well 
— neatly. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES. 


153 


Q.  What  did  you  do  with  that  map. 

A.  It  was  taken  to  the  Committee  and  left  with  them  ;  that  is  the 

last  I  have  seen  of  it. 
Q.  Woro  you  employed  in  1850  by  any  person  connected  with  the 

city  authorities  to  take  soundings  near  these  premises. 
A.  I  was. 

Q.  Did  you  make  soundings. 
A.  T  rli.l. 

y.  Did  you  draw  a  plan. 
A.  I  did. 
Q.  Plan  of  what. 

A.  Plan  of  filling  the  outer  bulkhead. 
Q.  What  did  you  do  with  that  plan. 
A.  I  left  it  with  the  Street  Commissioner. 
Q.  When  was  that. 

A.  In  1851,  I  think  ;  late  in  the  spring  of  1851. 
Q.  On  that  plan  was  there  any  designation  of  the  outer  bulkhead 

as  it  is  now. 

A.  No,  sir,  not  as  it  is  at  present. 
Q.  When  was  the  present  bulkhead  first  begun. 
A.  I  think  it  was  along  in  the  early  part  of  the  fall  of  1851 ;  I 

speak  from  memory  alone ;  I  may  not  be  strictly  correct  as  to 

the  date  ;  it  was  in  1851  ;  I  think  the  early  part  of  the  fall. 
Q.  When  was  it  finished. 
A.  In  1858. 
Q.  During  that  time  was  there  any  filling  in  of  the  intermediate 

space. 
A.  It  was  going  on  all  the  time. 

Cross-Examination  Resumed, 

Q.  Did  not  the  bulkhead  give  way,  so  as  to  render  useless  the  land 

in  front  within  the  pink-shade  upon  Exhibit  No.  5. 
A.  Not  that  I  am  aware  of. 
Q.  Since  1853,  and  about  the  time  of  its  completion  in  1853,  as  you 

have  stated,  were  you  in  the  habit  of  being  upon  or  adjacent  to 

these  premises. 

A.  I  have  been  there  occasionally,  but  for  no  particular  purpose. 
Q.  Which  of  the  city  authorities  employed  you  to  make  soundin^i, 

as  you  have  stated. 
A.  The  Street  Commissioner. 


154:         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

Q.  What  was  his  name. 
A.  Mr.  Dodge. ' 


CHARGE  TO  THE  JURY. 

\Charge  of  His  Honor,  Judge  Nelson,  in  the  case  of  Alexander  Smith,  et  al,  versus 

Alvin  ffiggins,  et  al.     In  the  United  States  Circuit  Court  for  the  Souttiern 

District  of  New  York.] 

GENTLEMEN  OF  THE  JURY  :2  The  patent3  in  this  case  was  originally 
granted  to  Alexander  Smith  on  the  18th  of  June,  1850.  On  the  10th 
of  December  of  the  same  year,  an  undivided  half  of  the  patent  was 
assigned  to  Jonathan  Smith.4  The  suit  is  in  the  name  of  the  two.* 
The  patent  was  surrendered  and  re-issued  with  an  amended  specifica- 
tion on  the  llth  of  May,  1852.  The  suit  is  founded  upon  this  re-issued 
patent  and  amended  specification. 

The  first  question  to  be  considered  by  the  Court  and  Jury*  is,  what 
is  the  invention  of  the  plaintiff?  This  we  must  ascertain  and  settle  in 
order  to  be  able  to  determine  whether  or  not  it  has  been  appropriated 
or  infringed  by  the  defendant.7 


40 


Dodge.— It  is  usually  unnecessary  to  insert  in  the  notes  the  word  Mister 
(see  Webster).  If  it  should  be  inserted  in  the  transcript  even  when  not 
spoken,  it  could  do  no  harm.  At  any  rate,  the  memory  may  be  relied  upon,  in  such 
a  trivial  matter  as  that 

a  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury.— p.  169,  E.  12,  b. 

«  patent. — The  use  of  Pee3  as  a  word-sign  for  patent  originated  with  the 
author.  Its  value  will  be  seen  in  the  engraving  of  this  Charge. 

«  to  .Jonathan  SmMh.— Jay  is  here  written  for  Jonathan,  under  the  prin- 
ciple of  special  contraction  (237,  E.  2).  When  it  first  occurred  in  reporting  itfe  case 
(of  which  this  Charge,  of  course,  was  but  a  small  part),  it  was  written  in  full— Jay- 
En-Then.  See  this  Header,  p.  107,  24< ;  118,  2S13. 

*  of  the  two.— See  this  Eeader,  p.  74,  63. 

•  by  the  Court  and  Jury.— 250,  8.    The  words  Court  and  Jury,  in  law- 
reporting,  are  usually  commenced  with  a  capital  letter. 

~i  by  the  defendant.— The  use  of  Dee3  for  Defendant,  and  Def2  for  Defense, 
originated  with  the  author.  I  mention  this  fact  here,  as  in  many  other  cases  I  have 
mentioned  the  fact  of  having  devised  word-signs  and  contractions  and  introduced 
valuable  principles,  in  order  that  his'ory  may  not  be  falsified  or  concealed  by  those 
who  for  any  reason  would  obscure  or  deny  my  improvements  of  the  art,  or  under- 
rate their  value.  But  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  I  have  mentioned  a  tithe  ot  the 
instances  of  my  improvements.  They  are  too  frequent  to  permit  that.  Take  Ibis 
line  for  instance.  Ken2  is  a  new  word-sign  for  Question  ;  the  phrase-sign  for  By  t/ie 
Court  and  Jury  would  not  have  been  found  in  the  Old  Phonography;  En-Ven3  for 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  155  , 

The  invention  is  described*  by  the  patentee  as  a  new  and  useful  ap- 
paratus for  parti -coloring  yarn.* 

It  is  therefore  a  patent  for  machinery — for  the  means  to  be  used  in 
this  work.  The  patentee  then  refers  to  the  modes  of  parti-coloring  in 
use  at  the  time  he  made  his  invention  ;  the  first  being  by  printing,  and 
the  second  by  dipping  the  skeins  into  a  dye-vat,  the  part  not  to  be 
dyed  being  clamped,  or  tied,  or  wrapped  around,  to  prevent  the  access 
of  the  dye. 

He  then  states  that  these  methods10  in  previous  use  were  imperfect, 
the  printing  not  admitting  of  permanent  colors,  besides  requiring 
complex  machinery,  and  the  dyeing  by  clamping,  tying,  etc.,  being 
unsuccessful  on  account  of  the  access  of  the  dye  to  the  parts  sought  to 
be  excluded.  He  then  speaks  of  the  nature  of  his  improvement,  which, 
he  says,  con&ists  of  parti-coloring  yarns  that  have  been  reeled,11  by 
means  of  direct  immersion12 


41 


in  the  dye,  by  the  use  of  movable  frames1  adapted  to  receive 
and  hold  the2  skeins  as  they  are  arranged  upon  a  reel,  and  so 


invention  is  a  new  contraction,  in  analogy  with  which  many  other  contractions  are 
formed.  Plent2  is  a  new  word-sign  for  Plaintiff.  Dee2-Tren  is  a  new  contraction 
for  determine.  Whether  or  not  would  not  have  been  so  quickly  written  by  the  Old 
Phonographers.  Per2-Pret  is  a  new  contraction  for  appropriated,  formed  in 
accordance  with  a  new  general  principle,  which  makes  a  saving  of  one  or  more 
strokes  in  thousands  of  words.  En-Fren1  is  a  new  contraction  for  infringed.  In 
the  next  line  there  are  fourteen  variations  from  the  Old  Phonography,  by  which 
fourteen  strokes  and  eight  liftings  of  the  pen,  besides  other  advantages,  are  gained 
over  the  Old  Phonography. 

a  Is  described — p.  182,  K.  4. 

•  parti-coloring  yarn.— This  is  a  special  contraction,  in  which  Pret-Kel 
stands  for  parti-coloring  (ing  being  omitted),  and  yarn  is  added,  as  though  it  were 
the  word  ya'n,  by  the  En-hook.  The  phrase  might  have  been  written  Pret-Kel-Arn, 
but  the  Arn  in  rapid  writing  would  degenerate  into  nearly  an  En-hook  ;  and  thus, 
in  fact,  originated  the  sign  in  the  engraving,  so  far  as  representing  yarn  by  an  En- 
hook  is  concerned,  (o)  In  this  contraction  the  word  color  should  strictly  have  been 
represented  by  its  sign,  Kler ;  but  the  small  hook  is  used,  because  the  making  of  the 
large  hook  would  require  more  time  than  the  small  one ;  and  there  is  no  counter- 
vailing objection  on  the  ground  of  legibility,  because  the  contraction  given  in  the 
engraving  is  perfectly  legible;  and  no  principle  is  violated,  because  it  falls  under 
the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  E.  2),  which  permits  the  abbreviation  of 
eign- words  quite  as  readily  as  others. 

10  that  these  methods.— See  this  Pveader,  p.  87, 18s. 

11  that  have  been  reeled.— See  this  Header,  p.  128,  31'8. 

12  direct  immersion. — 164. 

A  -i   i  movable  frames.— This  is  a  special  contraction.    287,  E.  2,  5. 

»  adapted  to  receive  and  hold  the. — And  is  omitted  here.    This 


156         SECOND   STAND  ABB-PHONOGRAPHIC   KEADEB. 

comlined  with  the  dye-vat  that  ihey  will  permit  the  yarn  to  be  let 
down  to  a  determinate  distance  in  the  dye.  There  is  then  a  particular 
description  of  the  machinery  used  in  this  process,  and  finally  the  more 
material  part  of  the  specification,  particularly  when  we  are  inquiring 
as  to  the  thing  invented  or  discovered — the  claim.  What  the  patentee 
claims  to  have  secured  is  the  method  substantially  as  described,3  of 
parti-coloring  yarns  which  have  been  reeled,4  by  direct  and  free  im- 
mersion, by  means  of  frames  carrying  the  reeled  yarns,*  combined  with 
the  dyeing-vat  by  machinery  adapted  to  let  down  and  draw  up  the 
frame  and  measure  the  extent  of  the  immersion.  The  reel  on  which 
the  yarn  is  reeled  (which  was  exhibited  in  Court)  is  not  a  part  of  the 
combination,  and  as  regards  this  question  of  novelty  in  the  combina- 
tion described  by  the  patentee,  and  in  which  his  invention  consists, 
may  be  laid  out  of  view.  The  thing  invented,  then,  is  this :  The  hori- 
zontal frame  carrying  the  reeled  yarns  combined  with  the  dyeing- vat 
by  machinery  adapted  to  let  down  and  draw  up  this  frame  and  measure 
the  extent  of  the  immersion,  or  the  extent  of  the  line  of  dyeing  upon 
the  yarn.  In  other  words,  the  thing  discovered  is  the  combination  of 
the  horizontal  frame  carrying  the  reeled  yarns  with  the  dyeing- vat  by 
machinery — which  must  always  be  kept  in  view  as  very  important — 
which  lets  down  the  frame  carrying  the  yarn,  and  draws  it  up,  and  at 
the  same  time  measures  the  line  of  yarn  to  be  dyed. 

Now,  this  being  the  thing  invented — the  improvement  patented — 
the  next  question*  is,  is  it  new  and  useful  ?    It  must  be  both  in  order 

phrase  occurred  very  often  throughout  the  entire  case ;  so  that  the  omission  of  and 
from  it  was  safe,  although  it  would  not  have  been,  perhaps,  if  it  had  occurred  but 
rarely. 

3  substantially  as  described— This  phrase  is  of  frequent  occurrence  iu 
patent  suits,  and  this  phrase-sign  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old-Phonographic 
expression — Sbees*-Ten  Iss3  Dee-Sk  ay-Bed. 

*  which  have  bten  reeled.— p.  169,  E.  12.    In  case  the  Advanced  Corre- 
sponding and  the  Reporting  outline  for  the  present  tense  of  a  verb  terminates  with 
a  full-length  stroke  with  a  large  initial  hook — as  Bee-Kel,  barrel ;  Kler3,  color— the 
Advanced  Correspondent  may  add  the  d  of  the  past  tense  either  by  Dee  or  .  rather) 
by  shortening ;  (2)  but  the  Reporter  in  such  case  writes  the  present  for  the  past 
tense  (or  time),  because.  (A)  he  thereby  saves  either  an  ad'liiional  stroke  or  the  liltle 
extra  care  of  shortening,  (B)  and  secures  the  further  advantages  (")  of  adding  a 
consonant,  as  n  (for  yarn)  in  the  special  phrase-sign  lii-l'di1.  Keeled  yarn  ;  (b)  of 
shortening  to  add  it,  as  Reid1,  Reel  (or  Reeled)  it;  KUnl-,  Color  ed  it;  (<•)  and  of 
lengthening  to  add  thr,  as  in  Reldher1,  Reel  (or  Reeled)  thr  ;  Klerdhi  r1,  Cleai-ed 
thr. 

»  reeled  yarns.— In  this  special  contraction  yarns  is  added  the  tame  as  in 
Pret-Klens,  particolored  yarns. 

•  next  question.— 286  8. 


KEY   TO   THE   KEPORTING   EXERCISES.  157 

to  constitute  a  valid  patent.  The  utility  of  the  arrangement  and  com- 
bination I  have  not  understood  to  be  contested  by  the  learned  counsel 
for  the  defendant.7 

As  to  the  novelty  of  the  arrangement  and  combination,  there  has 
been  introduced  in  the  course  of  the  trial,  intending  to  bear  upon  this 
question,  as  well  as  upon  the  question  of  infringement,  the  previous 
printing  apparatus,  the  clamping  process  and  apparatus,  and  the 
methods  of  Graham,  Stevenson,  Whittock,  and  that  of  Kerr,  one  of 
the  witnesses  who  testified  on  the  part  of  the  defendant. 

Now,  the  question  of  novelty  is  not  whether  free  immersion  has 
been  before  used  for  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns ;  but  whether  this 
dyeing  of  parti-colored  yarns  by  free  immersion  was  done  previous 
to  the  date  of  the  invention  of  the  plaintiff,  by  an  arrangement  and 
combination  of  machinery  like  that  described  in  his  patent.8  This  is 
not  a  patent  for  the  discovery  of  the  idea  of  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns 
by  immersion  in  the  dye,  but  it  is  for  an  arrangement  and  combination 
of  machinery,  as  a  means  to  be  used  in  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns  by 
immersion  in  the  dye.  In  order,  therefore,  to  disprove  the  novelty  of 
the  invention,  it  must  be  shown  that  these  previous  modes  used  prac- 
tically in  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns  by  immersion  or  otherwise,  em- 
braced within  them  this  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  machinery 
described  in  the  patent.  If  it  was  done  by  modes  and  processes  not 
embracing  this  combination  and  arrangement,  then  such  previous  use 
•would  not  disprove  the  novelty  of  the  plaintiff's  invention.* 

On  this  point,  therefore — the  question  of  novelty — it  will  be  your 
duty  to  look  into  these  old  modes  of  parti-coloring  yarn  by  immersion 
or  otherwise  in  the  dye,  and  say  whether  they  contain  the  special  com- 
bination and  arrangement  of  the  machinery  described  and  used  by  the 
plaintiff. 

If  you  should  arrive  at  a  conclusion  in  favor  of  the  plaintiff  as  to 
the  novelty  or  utility  of  his  improvement,  the  next  question  will  be  as 
to  the  alleged  infringement  by  the  defendant  in  the  adoption  of  ma- 
chinery whereby  yarn  is  parti-colored  by  immersion.  That  question 

'  by  the  l<-arned  counsel  for  tHe  defendant. — Lay-Kay-Dt-e  for  Ifiirnfd 
counsel  for  the  defendant  may  be  introduced  into  general  reporting,  though  it  is 
formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  R.  2,  t)— Lay 
standing  for  Learned,  Kay  for  Counsel,  and  Dee  for  Defendant.  This  sign,  trans- 
ferred to  the  common  print,  would  be  "L.  C.  D."  See  phrases  commencing  with 
Learned  Coiinnel  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary 

8  described  In  Ills  patent.— 246, 1. 
»  plaintiff's  Invention.— 1ST,  K.  1. 


158          SECOND    STANDAED-PIIONOGRAPIIIC    HEADER. 

will  depend  upon  the  fact  whether  or  not  the  arrangement  of  the  mi- 
chinery  used  by  the  defendant  in  dyeing  yarn  embraces  the  combina- 
tion of  the  plaintiff;  in  other  words,  whether  the  defendant's  mode 
and  machinery  embodies  within  it  the  new  ideas  of  the  patentee  ; 
whether  or  not  he  has  appropriated  the  ideas  which  ae  at  the  founda- 
tion of  the  plaintiff's  improvement  or  discovery. 

In  order  to  constitute18  an  infringement,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
arrangement  and  combination  of  the  party  charged  with  the  infringe- 
ment should  be  the  same  to  the  eye,  or  in  point  of  fact.  If  they  em- 
body the  ideas  of  the  patentee,  and  the  machinery  of  the  defendant 
operates  by  such  adoption  and  appropriation,  then,  though  the  arrange- 
ment inay  be  apparently  different,  in  reality"  and  in  judgment  of  law 
an  infringement  exists.  Hence,  it  will  be  not  only  proper,  but  essen- 
tial, that  the  jury  should  look  into  the  arrangement  and  operation  of 
the  machinery  used  by  the  defendant  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining 
whether  or  not  it  embodies  within  it  the  principle  of  the  patentee ; 
whether  or  not  its  successful  operation  is  attributable  to  such  appropri- 
ation. If  it  does,  then  it  is12  an  infringement.  If  it  does  not,  then 
there  has  been  no  infringement. 

k  O  It  has  been  insisted  by  the  learned  counsel  for  the  defendant1 
*•**  that  he  does  not  use  the  reeled  yarn,  or  rather  the  yarns  on 
a  reel,  as  is  done2  by  the  plaintiff;  and  hence  it  is  insisted  that  in 
this  respect  the  defendant's  arrangement  or  combination  of  machinery 
differs  from  that  of  the  plaintiff's.  It  is  true,3  however,  that  the 
combination  and  arrangement  of  the  machinery  of  the  plaintiff  is  use- 
less, and  would  not  be*  patentable  without  yarn  to  be  operated  upon 

10  In  order  to  constitute.— This  phrase  might  be  written  by  the  advanced 
reporter,  NertP-Stet,  the  first  t  of  Cbnutitute  being  omitted  under  286,  8. 

11  In  reality.- See  these  words,  and  In  relation,^mong  the  phrases  begin- 
ning with  In  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

12  then  It  Is — See  this  Reader,  p.  63,  xri. 

A  O  *  by  the  learned  counsel  for  tlic  defendant — This  phrase-sign 
**  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (23T,  B.  2, 
6).    For  tlm  is  omitted  under  250,  8.    See  this  Reader,  p.  156,  41T. 

as  la  done.— 245. 

»  It  is  true—See  this  Reader,  p.  134,  83". 
«  and  would  not  be — See  this  Reader,  p.  104,  22' 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  159 

in  the  process  of  dyeing  ;  and  in  order  to  make  out*  an  infringement, 
it  must  appear  that  the  defendant  not  only  used  the  combination  of 
the  plaintiff,  but  that  it  is  used  for  dyeing  by  letting  down  and  taking 
up  the8  reeled  yarn  into  and  out  of  the  vat,  and  measuring  the  extent 
of  the  immersion  at  the  time. 

I  will  state  this  proposition  again,  as  it  is  undoubtedly  important. 
1  have  said  that  the  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  plaintiff's 
machinery  is  useless,  and  would  not  be  patentable  without  yarn  to  be 
operated  upon7  in  the  dyeing  process.  The  invention  is  the  combina- 
tion for  the  purpose  of  dyeing  by  immersion,  and  the  machinery 
which  is  employed  to  effectuate  this  process.  It  must  therefore  ap- 
pear, in  order  to  constitute  an  infringement,  that  the  defendant  uses 
this  combination  and  arrangement  for  the  purpose  of  dyeing  by  immer- 
sion, by  means  of  machinery  which  lets  down  the  yarn  into  the  dye  ; 
that  he  uses  the  combination  of  machinery  which  effects,  or  appears  to 
effect,  this,  and  at  the  same  time  measures  the  extent  of  the  dyeing. 
Whether  or  not  the  yarn  to  be  dyed  is  on  a  reel,  like  the  plain  tiff's,  is 
not  material.  If  the  yarn  is  so  arranged  as  to  be  acted  upon  by  the 
plaintiff's  combination,  and  is  so  acted  upon  by  the  defendant's 
arrangement  that  it  may  be  let  down  into  the  dye  and  taken  up,  and 
at  the  same  time  measure  the  extent  of  the  immersion,  then  an  in- 
fringement exists.  There  would  then  be  an  embodiment  of  the  ideas 
of  the  patentee  in  the  arrangement  or  combination  of  the  machinery 
of  the  defendant,  and  an  appropriation  of  the  improvement  of  the 
patentee.  Gentlemen,  this  branch  of  the  case,  the  question  of  nov- 
elty, is  a  question  of  fact  which,  under  the  views  of  the  law  which  I 
have  endeavored  to  explain  to  you,  must  be  examined  and  determined 
for  yourselves.  Undoubtedly,  before  the  plaintiff  is  entitled  to  re- 
cover,8 he  must  have  established  to  your  reasonable  satisfaction  that 
his  new  mode,  combination,  or  arrangement  of  machinery  for  the  pur- 
pose of  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns,  and  the  ideas  involved  and  em- 
bodied in  this  new  arrangement  and  combination  which  enabled  him 
to  work  out  his  improvement  as  a  useful  one  ;  that  these  are  substan- 
tially, practically  involved,  embodied  in  the  defendant's  arrangement 

8  and  In  order  to  make  out. — To  is  implied  by  joining,  and  out  added 
to  the  word-sign  for  make  (Em)  by  halving  it.    p.  63,  xvi. 

•  and  taking  up  the.— 23T,  K.  1,  6. 
i  to  be  operated  upon.— 94,  IT1. 

*  Is  entitled  to. — This  contraction  for  entitled  (En-Tee1)  is  raluable.     Sec 
ENTITLE-D  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


160         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    KEADKE. 

and  operation  of  his  machinery.  If  you  find  these  there,  although 
the  form  may  be  different  to  the  eye — if  you  find  the  essence  of  the 
plaintiff's  arrangement,  the  practice  and  operation  of  it  embodied 
within  the  defendant's,  then,  in  judgment  of  law,  there  is  an  infringe- 
ment. This  is  a  question  of  fact,  which  it  is  your  province  to  de- 
termine. 

The  remaining  question  in  the  case  is  the  question  of  damages, 
which  has  been  presented  by  the  counsel  fur  the  plaintiff.  Upon  this 
question  the  general  rule  is  that  the  patentee  or  his  assignee,  in  case 
of  an  infringement  or  appropriation  of  his  invention  by  another'  with- 
out his  license,  the  patentee  or  the  assignee,  as  the  case  may  be,  is  en- 
titled to  the  actual  damages10  which  he  has  sustained  by  reason  of  this 
infringement.  It  is  often,  indeed  almost  always,  an  exceedingly  diffi- 
cult11 question  to  arrive  at,  upon  any  certain18  or  satisfactory  data. 
The  theory,  or  the  principle  in  respect  to  the  damages,  is  that  a  person 
who  adopts,  appropriates,  or  uses  the  improvement  of  another,  inter- 
feres13 with  his  custom,  his  monopoly,  or  rather  property  (for  it  is  not 
a  monopoly,  it  being  the  fruits  of  his  own  mind) ,  and  affects  the  bene- 
fits which  he  would  otherwise14  be  entitled  to ;  and  the  jury  should 
look  into  the  case  with  a  view  to  ascertain  the  actual  damage  which 
the  patentee  under  such  circumstances  has  sustained.  The  rule  of  law 
excludes  any  exaggerated  or  vindictive  damage,  which  is  sometimes 
allowed  in  cases  of  willful  trespass.  That  rule  of  damage  has  no  appli- 
cation in  this  case. 

In  this  case,  one  view  probably  to  be  taken  upon  the  question  of 
damages  would  be  this :  the  benefits  and  advantages,  whatever  they 
may  be,  if  there  are  any,  derived  in  the  use  of  the  plaintiff's  improve- 
ment over  the  old  modes  practiced  and  in  use  ;  and  this  is  the  useful 

•  by  another.— See  under  DHB  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

10  to  actual  damage*.— As  the  word  damage  will  probably  occur  often  in 
this  part  of  the  Charge,  it  may  safely  be  contracted  to  Dee  Era  (I.  «.,  d<im.). 

11  an  exceedingly  difficult.— The  word  erceedingly  is  written  in  full  by 
Kays  Dee:' ingly'  (232,  5).    In  analogy  with  the  word-siun  l\>r  erixt  (Ses-Tve2).  the 
Kay  may  be  elided  ;  and  ingly  may  be  omitted  under  the  principle  of  237,  E.  1,  6. 
I  prefer,  however,  to  make  at  once  Sdee1  a  word-sign  for  Exceedingly.    See  these 
words  in  the  Dictionary. 

i>  upon  any  certain — Any  is  vocalized  with  e,  so  tltat  the  phrase-sign  may 
not  be  read  upon  unctrUiin. 

is  Interferes*— See  this  Reader,  p.  94,  IT4.  The  words  Interfere-d  are  con- 
traded  in  analogy  with  Infer-red  (En-Ef-)  to  Eut-EP.  See  these  words  in  the  Dic- 
tionary. 

14  which  he  would  otlierw  1st.— Sec  this  Bender,  p.  104,  22'  ;  p.  62,  xi;i. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISE8.  161 

result,  if  any,  consequent  upon  the  new1*  invention  over  old  modes. 
If  it  can  be  shown  that  there  are  benefits  and  advantages  derived  by 
the  use  of  the  new  mode  over  the  old,  these  are  such  as  are  to  be  taken 
into  consideration1"  upon  the  question  of  damages. 

You  have  heard  the  testimony  of  the  experts  which  has  been  offered. 
I  shall  not  go  over  or  call  attention  particularly  to  it.  Their  estimates 
and  opinions  are  not  always  reliable17  and  very  certain.  But  still  they 
are  competent  and  admissible  on  the  question  of  damages,  and  proper 
to  be  taken  into  account  by  the  jury  in  attempting  to  arrive  at  the 
actual  damages  which  the  plaintiff  has  sustained.  This  is  also  a  ques- 
tion of  fact  which  belongs  to  the  jury,  and  with  which  I  do  not  desire 
to  interfere. 


ALEXANDER  VON  HUMBOLDT. 

[An  Address  by  Prof.  Francis  Lieber,  at  a  Meeting  called  by  the  New  York  Geo- 
graphical Society,  held  on  the  evening  of  June  2, 1859,  in  the  Hall  of  the  New 
York  Historical  Society.] 

k  9  "TiiE  whole  earth  is  the  monument  of  illustrious  men." 
^*J  There  are  passages  in  the  works  of  antiquity  which,  to  our 
ears  and  minds,  have  the  sound  and  the  depths  of  inspiration.  They 
impress  themselves  on  our  souls,  and  corresponding  occasions  on  the 
paths  of  our  lives  restore  them  to  visible  letters.  Such  seem  to  me 
these  words  of  Pericles,  and  such  the  occasion  which  has  brought  us 
together  in  this  place.  What  Pericles  said,  in  his  funeral  speech,  of 
the  men  who  had  fallen,  not  for  the  defense  but  for  the  glory  of 
Athens,  seems  to  apply  in  a  double  sense  to  Alexander  von  Humboldt. 
Wherever  death  occurs  or  is  remembered,  there  is  solemnity  ;'  nor  can 
we-  wholly  free  ourselves  even  from  mourning  when  a  revered  man  has 


is  upon  the  new.— The  is  omitted  under  250,  3.    See  HEW  in  the  Standard* 
Phonographic  Dictionary. 

"to  be  taken  Into  consideration. — The  En-hook  of  taken,  (Ten)  is  omiW 
ted  to  secure  the  advantage  of  phrase-writing,  and  into  is  omitted  under  250,  8. 
»  reliable — See  this  Reader,  p.  92, 163. 

JO  '  solemnity.— See  this  Reader,  p.  117,  285,  2. 
2  nor  can  we.— p.  169,  E.  12,  b. 


102         SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

lelt  us,  however  full  his  measure  of  a  favored  life  may  have  been.3  He 
lived  so  long  and  so  large  a  life  that  generations  over  the  whole  globe 
had  grown  up  familiar  with  his  name,  and  we  were  so  accustomed  to  it 
that  our  very  intellects  feel  a  degree  of  discomfort  at  presenting  to  our 
minds  the  world  henceforth  as  existing  without  him.  Yet  it  is  one  of 
the  noblest  delights  for  those  who  reflect  and  love  to  be  grateful,  to 
trace  the  chief  components  of  the  monument  of  illustrious  men  to 
their  authors — to  find  whence  came  the  discoveries,  inventions,  con- 
ceptions, institutions,  and  endeavors  of  ages  in  the  field  of  culture, 
freedom,  and  truth.  Who  has  not  enjoyed  the  pleasure  of  finding  the 
spots  on  the  charts  of  human  progress,  where  you  put  down  your 
finger  and  say :  Here  is  Aristotle,  here  are  the  Waldenscs,  here  the 
causes  and  the  effects  of  the  University — and  of  tracing  the  lines  of 
civilization  in  different  directions  from  point  to  point  ?•  And  this  de- 
light we  may  enjoy  when  meditating  on  the  period  of  which  Humboldt 
was  one  of  the  most  distinct  exponents — we  may  enjoy  it  even  now, 
although  he  has  left  us  but  yesterday  ;  for  God  allowed  to  him  days  so 
long  that  he  passed  into'  history  before  he  passed  away  from  among 
us.  Many  of  my  young  friends  have  asked  me  as  their  teacher,  and, 
indeed,  many  other  friends  have  repeated  the  question,  as  I  conversed 
with  them  on  that  news  which  on  its  arrival  attracted  more  interest 
than  the  advice  of  the  threatening  contest  in  the  plains  of  Italy — Was 
he  not  the  greatest  man  of  the  century?  I  do  not  believe  it  fit  for 
man  to  seat  himself  on  the  bench  in  the  chancery*  of  humanity,  and 
there  to  pronounce  this  one  or  that  one  the  greatest  man.  How  many 
men  have  been  called  the  greatest !  But  if  it  is  an  attribute  of  great- 
ness to  impress  an  indelible  stamp  on  an  entire  movement  of  the  col- 
lective mind  of  a  race  ;  if  greatness, 


44 


in  part,'  consists  in  devising  that  which  is  good,  large,  and 
noble,  and  in  perseveringly  executing  it  by  means  which,  in 


8  may  liavc  been. — Emb  being  used  as  a  word  sign  for  may  be — be-n  is  writ- 
ten by  adding  the  En-hook,  have  being  omitted  and  to  be  supplied.  249;  250,  3. 
The  best  Old  expression  of  this  phrase  was  Em3-Vee-Ben ;  i.  e.,  the  New  expression 
is  more  than  three  times  as  fust  as  the  Old. 

4  troin  point  to  point. — 250,  3,  example  from — to. 

'  that  lie  passed  Int  >.— A  t  is  omitled  here  for  the  sake  of  phrase-writing 
(286, 3),  as  also  in  the  subsequent  phrases— before  he  passed  away  ;  Great-ext  man. 

«  la  the  chancery. — See  CIIAXCEKT  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary. 

1  i    i  In  part—  24*5,  1 .    The  Old  form  for  Part  was  Pee-Ret ;  but  the  best  form 
^*~*  both  alone  and  in  phrase-writing  is  Pret.    It  also  is  the  best  form  for  part 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  163 

the  hands  of  others,  would  have  been  insufficient,  and  against  obstacles 
which  would  have  been  insurmountable  to  others  ;  if  the  daring  soli- 
tude of  thought  and  loyal  adhesion  to  its  own  royalty  is  a  constitu- 
ent of  greatness ;  if  rare  and  varied  gifts,  such  as  mark  distinction 
when  singly  granted,  showered  by  Providence  on  one  man  ;  if  modest 
amenity  gracing  these  gifts,  and  encouraging  kindliness  to  every  one 
of  every  nation  that  proved  earnest  in  his  pursuit — whether  he  had 
chosen  nature  or  society,  the  hieroglyphics  or  the  liberty  of  America, 
the  sea  and  the  winds,  or  the  languages,  astronomy,  or  industry,  the 
canal  or  prison  discipline,  geography  or  Plato ;  if,  in  addition,  an 
organizing  mind — a  power  of  evoking  activity  in  the  sluggish — and 
sagacity  and  unbroken  industry  through  a  life  lengthened  far  beyond 
that  which  the  psalmist  ascribes  to  a  long  human  existence  ;  if  a  good 
fame,  encircling  the  globe  on  its  own  pinions,  and  not  carried  along 
by  later  history, — if  these  make  up  or  prove  greatness,  then  indeed  we 
may  say,  without  presumption,  that  our  age  has  been  graced  by  one 
of  the  greatest  men — so  favored  an  exemplar  of  humanity  that  he 
would  cease  to  be  an  example  for  us  had  he  not  manifested  through  his 
whole  life  of  ninety  years  that  unceasing  labor,  unvarying  love  of 
truth  and  advancement,  and  that  kindness  to  his  fellow-beings,  which 
are  duties,  and  in  which  every  one  of  us  ought  to  strive  to  imitate  him. 
What  an  amount  of  thinking,  observing,  writing,  traveling,  and  dis- 
covering he  has  performed,  from  that  juvenile  essay  of  his  on  the 
textile  fabrics  of  the  ancients,  to  the  last  line  of  his  "  Cosmos,"  which 
reminds  us  of  Copernicus  reading  the  last  proof-sheet  on  his  death-bed,2 
shortly  before  his  departure ;  or  of  Mozart,  who  directed  with  dying 
looks  the  singing  of  a  portion  of  his  requiem,  which  he  had  in  part 
composed  on  his  death-bed  !  Let  us  one  and  all,  young  and  old,  sym- 
bolize by  his  name  the  fact  that,  however  untrue  assuredly  the  saying 
is  that  genius  is  labor,  it  is  true  that  the  necessary  factor  or  coefficient 
of  genius  and  of  any  talent  is  incessant  diligence.  We  are  ordained 
not  only  to  eat  the  bread  of  our  mouth  in  the  sweat  of  our  brow,  but 
to  earn  in  the  same  way  the  nourishing  bread  of  the  mind.  This  is  no 
world  of  trifling,  and  Humboldt,  like  the  Greeks,  whose  intellectuality 
he  loved  to  honor —whose  Socrates  loved  to  say,  Arduous  are  all  noble 
things — was  a  hard-working  man,  far  harder  working  than  most  of 
those  who  arrogate  the  name  to  themselves.  He  ceased  to  work,  and 

in  the  following  words:  Compartment,  'com':Pret-Ment;  Depa>-t-ed,  rs,  Dee-Pret;  | 
Uepitrtment,  Dee-Pret  (Ment) ;  Impart,  Em-Fret.    See  In  particular  and  In  part 
in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

-  ori  Ills  death-bed.— 25. 


164:         SECOND    STANDARD-rilOXOGKAPHIC   READER. 

to  work  hard,  only  when  he  laid  himself  down  on  that  couch  from 
which  he  never  rose  again.  It  is  not  considered  inappropriate,  I  be- 
lieve, on  occasions  like  this,  to  give  distinctness  to  the  picture  by 
stating  personal  observations.  Allow  me,  then,  to  relate  a  very  sim- 
ple, yet  a  characteristic  fact.  I  visited  Humboldt  at  Potsdam,  in  the 
year 

1844,  when  he  had  reached,  therefore,  the  age  of  75  ;  for  you 
know  that  he  was  born  in  that  memorable  year  of  1769,  in 
which  Cuvier  was  born,  and  Wellington,  and  Chateaubriand,1  and 
Napoleon,  and  Canning,  and  Walter  Scott,  and  Mackintosh — just  ten 
years  after  Schiller2 — just  twenty  after  Goethe.3  Humboldt  told  me  at 
that  time  that  he  was  engaged  on  a  work  which  he  intended  to  call 
Cosmos;  that  he  was  obliged  chiefly  to  write  at  night,  for  in  the  morn- 
ing he  studied  and  arranged  materials,  and  in  the  evening  he  was 
obliged  to  be  with  the  king  from  9  o'clock  to  about  11.  After  his  re- 
turn from  the  king  he  was  engaged  in  writing  until  one  or  two  o'clock.4 
Humboldt,  when  in  Berlin  or  Potsdam,  was  retained — if  we  may  use  a 
professional  term — to  join  the  evening  circle  of  the  king  for  the  indi- 
cated hours.  It  was  all,  I  believe,  he  was  expected  actually  to  perform 
in  return  for  the  titles,  honors,  and  revenue  which  he  was  enjoying, 
except  that  the  monarch  sometimes  selected  him  as  a  companion  for 
his  journeys.  Humboldt  described  to  me  the  character  of  these  royal 
evening  reunions.  Everything  of  interest,  as  the  day  brought  it  to 
notice,  was  there  discussed.  The  drawing  of  a  beautiful  live  oak  near 
Charleston,  which  a  fair  friend  had  made  for  me,  was  taken  by  Hum- 


45 


Cliateanforlnnd.— This  name  is  pronounced  Shat6briot'-  (,)  indicating 
the  nasalization  of  the  preceding  vowel.     Ii  might  have  been  written 
Chet-Brend,  as  though  pronounced  Cbato'briand.    See  this  Reader,  p.  90,  15'. 

a  Sclilll«-r. — Pronounced  SheTer.  This  does  not  violate  the  rule  of  161,  b ;  for 
this  is  not  Shel,  but  Shier.  Moreover,  that  is  a  rule  of  safety  for  the  inexperienced 
writer,  but  not  necessarily  to  be  or  served  by  the  reporter,  who,  able  to  command 
his  pen  or  pencil,  can  as  Bureiy  distinguish  by  difference  of  inclination  between 
Shel  and  Shen  when  standing  alone  as  between  Chay  and  Ray,  Shel  being  written 
more  inclined  than  Shen.  This  liberty  becomes  safer  in  ihe  case  of  Schler,  for 
there  is  no  separate  outline  Ish'shon  to  conflict  with.  It  is  also  saf<-r  in  the  case  of 
Shelder,  because  in  the  case  of  double-lengths  the  distinction  of  inclination  is  very 
easy.  20T,  R.  5. 

»  Goethe.— The  sound  of  the  German  oe  or  6  (63,  as  a  German  calls  it)  is  the 
sound  of  the  rowel  in  first,  erxt,  earth.  For  its  Standard-Phonographic  sign,  see 
Coinp.,  p.  206,  §  24,  Nos.  81  and  32.  Goethe  =  Gce-te. 

«  one  or  two  o'clock.— 350,  3.    See  this  Reader,  p.  74,  6s. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  165 

boldt  to  that  circle,  where  it  attracted  so  much  attention  that  he 
begged  me  to  leave  it ;  and  he  told  me  that  the  volume  describing  our 
aqueduct,  which  my  friend  the  author — now  the  president  of  our  col- 
lege— had  given  me  at  the  time  of  its  publication,  and  which  I  had 
then  sent  him,  had  furnished  the  topic  of  discussion  for  an  entire 
week.  "We  collected,"  he  said,  "all  possible  works  on  ancient  and 
modern  aqueducts,  and  compared,  discussed,  and  applied  for  many 
successive  evenings."  Is  there,  then,  a  royal  road  to  knowledge,  after 
all,  when  a  Hum  boldt  can  be  retained  ?  May  I  extend  your  supposed 
permission  of  giving  personal  anecdotes,  provided  they  are  of  a  suffi- 
ciently biographical  character,  such  as  Plutarch,  perhaps,  would  not 
have  disdained  to  record  ?  I  desire  to  show  what  interest  he  took  in 
everything  connected  with  progress.  I  have  reason  to  believe  that  it 
was  chiefly  owing  to  him  that  the  King  of  Prussia  offered  to  me,  not 
long  after  my  visit,  a  chair  to  be  created  in  the  University  of  Berlin, 
exclusively  dedicated  to  the  Science  and  Art  of  Punishment,  or  to 
Pcenology.  I  had  conversed  with  the  monarch  on  the  superiority  of 
solitary  confinement  at  labor  over  all  the  other  prison  systems,  when 
he  concluded  our  interview  with  these  words  :  "  I  wish  you  would  con- 
vince Mr.  Von  Humboldt  of  your  views.  He  is  rather  opposed  to  them. 
I  shall  let  him  know  that  you  will  see  him."  Humboldt  and  prison 
discipline  sounded  strange  to  my  ears.  I  went,  and  found  that  he 
loved  truth  better  than  his  own  opinion  or  bias  ;  and  my  suggestion 
that  so  comprehensive  a  university  as  that  of  Berlin,  our  common 
native  city,  ought  to  be  honored  with  having  the  first  chair  of  Pcenol- 
ogy (for  which  it  was  high  time  to  carve  out  a  distinct  branch,  treating 
of  the  convict  in  all  his  phases  after  the  act  of  conviction),  was  seized 
upon  at  once  by  his  liberal  mind.  He  soon  carried  the  minister  of 
justice  along  with  him,  and  the  offer  to  which  I  have  alluded  was  the 
consequence.  On  the  other  hand,  a  friend,  whose  name  is,  perhaps, 
more  interwoven  with  the  history  of  our  canal  than  that  of  any  other 
citizen,  except  Clinton,  informs  me  that  he  had  the  pleasure  of  sitting 
by  the  side  of  Humboldt  at  a  royal  dinner  at  Charlottsburg.  During 
the  whole  time,  they  were  engaged  in  conversing  almost  exclusively  on 
our  great  canal,  and  that  greater  one  which  ought  to  unite  in  ever  last- 
in";  wedlock  the 


A  /?  sturdy  Atlantic  and  the  teeming  Pacific,  having  now  yearned 
*  "  for  one  another  for  centuries.     Humboldt  spoke  with  a  knowl- 
edge of  details  and  a  sagacious  discernment  which  were  surprising  to 
my  friend,  well  versed  in  all  the  details  tf  these  topics.     Although  it 


166          SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

has  been  stated1  by  high  authority  that  the  works  of  Humboldt  show 
to  every  one  who  can  "read  between  the  lines,"  an  endeavor  to  pre- 
sent nature  in  her  totality,  unconnected  with-  man,  I  can  not  other- 
wise than  state  here  that,  on  the  contrary,  it  has  ever  appeared  to  me 
that  this  great  man,  studying  nature  in  her  details,  and  becoming  what 
Bacon  calls  her  interpreting  priest,  elevates  himself  to  those  heights 
whence  he  can  take  a  comprehensive  view  of  her  in  connection  with3 
man  and  the  movements  of  society,  with  language,  economy,  and  ex- 
change, institutions,  and  architecture,  which  is  to  man  almost  like  the 
nidifying  instinct  to  the  bird.  Humboldt's  tendency  in  this  respect 
seems  to  me  in  its  sphere  wholly  dissimilar  to  the  view  which  his  friend 
Hitter  takes  of  geography  in  connection  with  history.  Humboldt,  it 
would  seem,  could  hardly  be  expected  to  stand  in  a  different  relation 
to  the  natural  sciences.  He  was,  with  all  his  erudition  and  the  grandeur 
of  his  knowledge,  eminently4  a  social  man.  I  have  found  a  passage  in 
a  paper  written  by  a  diplomatist  and  highly-cultivated  writer,  Varn- 
hagen  von  Ense*  which,  I  feel  sure,  will  be  listened  to  with  interest. 
Von  Ense  describes  his  sojourn  in  Paris  in  1810,  and  says  : 

"In  the  salons  of  Metternich*  (at  that  time  Austrian  Ambassador 
near  the  Court  of  St.  Cloud)  I  saw  Humboldt  only  as  a  brilliant  and 
admired  meteor — so  much  so,  that  I  hardly  found  time  to  present  my- 
self to  him,  and  to  whisper  into  his  ear  a  few  of  those  names  which 
gave  me  a  right  to  a  personal  acquaintance  with  him.  Rarely  has  a 
man  enjoyed  in  such  a  degree  the  esteem  of  all,  the  admiration  of  the 
most  opposite  parties,  and  the  zeal  of  all  in  power  to  serve  him.  Na- 
poleon does  not  love  him.  He  knows  Humboldt  as  a  shrewd  thinker, 
whose  way  of  thinking  and  whose  opinion  can  not  be  bent ;  but  the 
Emperor  and  his  Court,  and  the  high  authorities  in  the  state,  have 
never  denied  the  impression  which  they  received  by  the  presence  of 

l  P  i  although  It  lias  been  stated.— p.  1C9,  E.  12.    See  this  Header,  p. 
U  63,  xvi. 

a  unconnected  with.— 250,  3,  and  example  With. 
«  In  connection  -with— 250,  3,  and  example  With. 

*  a  social. — The  rule  of  161,  6,  is  conformed  to  here,  for  Shel  does  not  stand 
alone ;  but  the  word  social  may  be  written  by  the  reporter  Iss-Shel  even  when 
alone,  if  he  is  particular  to  write  the  Shel  more  inclined  than  Shen  would  natu- 
rally be.     See  this  Reader,  p.  164,  45". 

5  Variihagcn  von  Knsc — Pronounced  Farnha'gen  fgn  En'se. 

•  Mettcrislch.— Pronounced  Met-ernic.    For  the  Standard-Phonographic  sign 
for  the  sound  <;,  see  the  Compendium,  p.  206,  §  24,  No.  66.    As  to  the  sound,  see  p. 
210,  §  25,  No.  66. 


KEY    TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  167 

this  bold  traveler,  by  the  power  of  knowledge,  and  the  light  which 
seems  to  stream  from  it  in  every  direction.  The  learned  of  all  nations 
are  proud  of  their  high  asso'ciate,  all  the  Germans  of  their  country- 
man, and  all  the  liberals  of  their  fellow."  *  *  *  "It  has  been 
rarely  vouchsafed,"  continues  Von  Ense,  "  to  a  man  in  such  degree  as 
to  Hurnboldt,  to  stand  forth  in  individual  independence  and  always 
equal  to  himself,  and  at  one  and  the  same  time,  in  scientific  activity 
and  in  the  widest  social1  and  international  intercourse,  in  the  solitude 
of  minute  inquiry,  and  in  the  almost  confusing  brilliancy  of  the  soci- 
ety of  the  day  ;  but  I  know  of  no  one  who,  with  all  this,  has  endeav- 
ored throughout  his  whole  life  to  promote  the  progress  and  welfare  of 
our  race  so  steadily,  uniformly,  and  with  such  ample  success." 

So  far  Von  Ense.  This  picture  is,  doubtless,  true  ;  but  we  ought 
not  to  recall  it  to  our  memory  without  remembering  at  the  same  time 
one  of  his  most  prominent  characteristics — his  simplicity  and  amenity, 
so  inherent  in  him  that  they  were  never  dimmed,  so  far  as  I  know,  by 
the  luster  of  his  talents  or  energy  of  his  thought.  The  most  perfect 
image 

k  H  of  social  refinement  which  I  have  to  this  day  in  my  mind,  is 
*  '  an  early  evening  party  at  the  villa  of  William  von  Hurnboldt, 
near  the  Lake  Tegel.  Nature  has  not  done  much  for  that  spot,  but 
refined  simplicity,  courtesy,  and  taste,  easy  interchange  of  thought  and 
experience,  men  of  name  and  women  of  attractive  elegance  and  high 
acquirements,  young  and  old,  travelers,  courtiers,  soldiers,  and  stu- 
dents, music,  works  of  art,  with  green  lawns,  shrubbery,  and  winding 
paths  along  smooth  water  and  waving  fields,  are  components  of  that 
scene  in  the  midst  of  which  the1  two  illustrious  Humboldts  moved  and 
delighted  others  as  much  as  they  seemed  to  be  gratified,2  giving  and 
receiving  as  all  the  others  did,3  never  condescending,  never  indicating 
a  consciousness  that  they  encouraged  the  timid,  but  showing  how 
gladly  they  received  additional  knowledge  from  every  one.  There  are 
men  here  around  me,  of  honored  names  in  those  sciences  which  Hum- 


i  sodal.-See  this  Reader,  p.  164,  452,  and  p.  166,  464. 

I  n  i  in  the  midst  of  which,  the. — 286,  8.    The  t  of  midst  is  elided,  in 
"*  '  accordance  with  236,  3,  and  of  is  implied  by  joining. 

*  scemtd  to  be  gratified.— Seem  is  written  here  instead  of  the  past  tense, 
Be  is  added  by  widening,  and  To  is  omitted.    See  this  Eeader,  p.  7T,  76. 

*  us  all  the  others  did.— See  DUB  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary. 


168         SECOND   8TANDAED-PHONOGKAPHIC   KEADEE. 

boldt  cultivated  more  especially  as  his  own.4  I  hope  they  will  indicate 
to  us  how  he  infused  a  new  spirit  into  them — how  he  immeasurably 
extended  them,  how  he  added  discoveries  and  original  conceptions  ; 
but  I,  though  allowed  to  worship  these  sciences  in  the  peristyle  only, 
and  not  as  a  consecrated*  priest,  crave  permission  to  say  a  few  words 
even  on  this  topic.  Some  h'fteen  years  ago,  Humboldt  presided  over 
the  annual  meeting  of  naturalists,  then  held  at  Berlin.  In  his  open- 
ing speech  he  chiefly  discoursed  of  the  merits  of  Linnaeus.  He  knew 
of  Linnaeus  as  Herodotus  knew  of  Salamis  and  Thermopylae ;  for  the 
life  of  the  great  Swede  overlapped  by  some  ten  years  that  of  Humboldt, 
and  all  he  there  said  of  Linnaeus  seems  to  me  to  apply  to  himself  with 
far  greater  force,  and  on  an  enlarged  scale.  In  that  speech,  too,  I  re- 
member he  quoted  his  friend  Schiller.  Humboldt  was,  in  a  marked 
manner,  of  a  poetic  temperament.  I  do  not  believe  that  without  it  he 
would  have  been  able  to  receive*  those  living  impressions  of  nature, 
and  to  combine  what  was  singly  received,  in  those  vivid  descriptions 
«o  true  and  transparent  that  they  surprise  the  visitor  of  the  scenes  to 
this  day.  He  had  that  constructive  imagination — 1  do  not  speak  now 
of  inventive  fancy — without  which  no  man  can  be  great  in  any  branch, 
whether  it  belong  to  nature  or  to  history.  But  yesterday  an  officer  of 
our  navy,7  whose  profession  has  made  him  well  acquainted  with  South 
America,  by  sea  and  land,  with  the  Andes — one  of  the  monuments  of 
our  illustrious  man* — told  me  that  he  knew  of  no  descriptions,  or  rather 
characteristics,  so  true  to  living  reality  as  "  Humboldt' s  Views  of  Na- 
ture," which  he  had  perused  and  enjoyed  on  the  spot.  The  power  of 
collocation  and  shrewdness  of  connection,  the  knowledge  of  detail  and 
the  absence  of  a  desire  to  perceive  things  according  to  a  system,  the 
thirst  for  a  knowledge  of  the  life  of  nature,  and  the  constant  wish  to 
aiake  all  of  us  share  in  the  treasures  of  his  knowledge — his  lucid  style, 
which  may  raise  hu>  ' '  Cosmos' '  to  a  German  classic — these  seem  to  me 
to  characterize  Humboldt  in  his  studies  of  nature,  besides  all  that  which 
ne  has  done  as  a  professional  naturalist.  Humboldt' s  name  and  life 
.nay  be  termed,  with  strict  propriety  of  language,  international.  He 

*  as  his  own.— p.  162,  B.  4. 

*  aa  a  consecrated.— p.  112,  B.  7,  I>. 

*  he  would  have  been  able  to  receive. — Sec  this  Beader,  p.  104,  22" ; 
comp.,  249 ;  p.  169,  II  12  and  B.  14. 

»  of  our  navy.— 25. 

*  of  our  Illustrious  man.— Man  is  vocalized  here,  so  that  it  shall  not  be 
rend  Men,  though  a  critical  reporter  would  not  need  such  aid  for  the  correci  read- 
ing of  the  phrase-sign. 


KEY   TO   THE   BEPOBTING  EXERCISES.  169 

read  and  spoke  English  and  Italian.  He  spoke  and  wrote  Spanish  with 
care  and  correctness,  and  French  almost  as  well  as9  German.  He  lived 
for  entire  peiiods  of  many  years  in  Paris,  and  counted  many  French 
among  his  best  friends,10  yet  not  at  the  expense  of  patriotism.  In  that 
very  speech  at  Berlin, 

k  0  which  has  been  mentioned, '  he  dwells  with  pleasure  on  the 
•^  penetrating  effect  which  the  German  mind  has  exercised  en  all 
the  physical  sciences,  no  less  than  in  the  mental  branches.  Humboldt 
was  a  dweller  in  kingly  palaces — a  courtier,  if  you  choose,2  and  the  son 
of  a  courtier — without  a  taint  of  servile  flattery  or  of  submission.  He 
was  rather  the  honored  guest  of  royalty.  He  loved  liberty,  and  con- 
sidered it  a  necessary  element  of  our  civilization.  He  was  a  sincere 
friend  of  substantial,  institutional  freedom.  His  mind  often  traveled 
to  this  country  ;  and  that  he  loved  America,  sometimes  with  sadness, 
is  sufficiently3  shown,  were  it  not  otherwise  well  known,  by  the  singular 
love  which  the  Americans  bore  him.  To  me  that  little  piece  of  news 
was  inexpressibly  touching,  which  simply  informed  us  that  our  Minis- 
ter in  Berlin,  with  the  Americans  now  present  at  that  city — a  cluster 
of  mourners  from  afar — formed  part  of  his  funeral  procession — the 
only  foreign  nation  thus  represented.  In  his  simplicity  and  genial 
warmth  he  did  what  many  a  bold  man  would  have  hesitated  to  do.  I 
was  present  as  a  young  and  distant  listener,  when  at  Rome,  imme- 
diately after  the  Congress  of  Verona,  the  King  of  Prussia,  Humboldt, 
and  Niebuhr  conversed  on  the  affairs  of  the  day,  and  when  the  last- 
mentioned4  spoke  in  no  flattering  terms  of  the  political  views  and 
antecedents  of  Arago,  who,  it  is  well  known,  was  a  very  advanced  re- 
publican of  the  Gallican  school,  an  uncompromising  French  democrat. 
Frederic  William  the  Third  simply  abominated  republicanism,  yet 
when  Niebuhr  had  finished,  Humboldt  said,  with  a  sweetness  which  I 
vividly  remember,  "  Still  this  monster  is  the  dearest  friend  I  have  in 
France."  Humboldt  had  all  his  brother's  views  of  the  necessity  of 

»  almost  as  well  as.— The  t  of  Almost  is  omitted  under  236,  3,  As  is  added 
by  enlarging  the  circle,  and  the  hook  of  Well  is  omitted— for  the  sake  of  phrase- 
writing. 

10  among  Ills  best  friends. — 236,  3;  164. 

JO  i  which  has  been  mentioned. — p.  169,  K.  12. 
:(J  a  if  you  choose.— p.  167,  B.  2. 
*  Is  sufficiently.— p.  182,  It.  4 
«  last-mentioned.— 236,  3. 


170         SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   EEADEB. 

the  highest  university  education,  and  he  gave  impulse  to  many  a  sci- 
entific, historical,  or  ethnological  expedition,  fitted  out  even  by  foreign 
governments,  for  he  was  considered  the  counselor  of  all.  But  I  can  not 
dwell6  here  any  longer  on  his  versatility  and  manifold  aptitude.  It  is 
proved  by  the  literature  of  almost  every  branch.  If  we  read  "  Earth 
on  Central  Africa, "  we  find  Humboldt ;  if  we  read  Say's  "Political 
Economy,"  we  find  his  name ;  if  we  study  the  history  of  the  Nine- 
teenth Century,  we  find  his  name  hi  the  diplomacy  of  Prussia  and 
France  ;  if  we  read  general  literature,  we  find  his  name  in  connection 
with  Schiller  and  Madame  de  Stael ;  if  we  look  at  modern  maps,  we 
find  his  isothermal  lines  ;  if  we  consult  Grim's  Dictionary  of  the  Ger- 
man Language,  we  find  Humboldt  as  authority.  That  period  has 
arrived  to  which  Croesus  alluded  in  the  memorable  exclamation,  "  Oh, 
Solon,  Solon,  Solon!"  and  we  are  now  allowed  to  say  Humboldt  was 
one  of  the  most  gifted,  most  fortunate,  and  most  favored  mortals — 
favored  even  with  comeliness,  with  a  brow  so  exquisitely  formed  that, 
irrespective  of  its  being  the  symbol  of  lofty  thought,  is  pleasant  to 
look  upon  in  his  busts,  as  a  mere  beautiful  thing — favored  even  in  his 
name,  so  easily  pronounced  by  all  nations  which  were  destined  to  pro- 
nounce it.  When  we  pray  not  only  for  the  kindly  fruits  of  the  earth, 
but  also,  as  we  ought  to  do,  for  the  kindly  fruits  of  the  mind,  let  us 
always  gratefully  remember  that  He  who  gives  all  blessed  things  has 
given  to  our  age  and  to  all  posterity  such  a  man  as  Humboldt. 

«  but  I  can  not  dvrclL— /  is  omitted  here  under  250,  3,  for  the  sake  of 
phrase-writing.    Bee  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary  under  /. 


INDEX  OF  THE  NOTES. 

A. 

page  67,  note  22. 

A  supplied  after  Of  and  To  

67,  n!5  and  17. 

Above  all  

141,  n  27. 

141,  n27. 

Accom-,  objection  to  heavy  dot  for,  answered  

72,  n4. 

Actor  sometimes  represented  by  the  verb.  76,  n  1  ;  121,  n  21 
Admits  that  

;  126,  n  16  ;  140,  n  2. 
143,  n  8. 

Advantage  of  adding  AH  by  a  hook  

..68,  n  26;  74,  n  15 

Affinity                         

...          .  117  n  5. 

119  n3. 

.127,  n  17;  159,  n  6. 

146  n  5 

Agassiz,  Prof.,  estimates  the  age  of  a  human  foot  and  jaw.  .... 

91,  n  5. 

91,  n  5. 

Ah  may  be  written  in  longhand  

52,  n  6. 

All  added  by  an  El-hook  or  by  enlarging  an  Ar-hook  

..62,  xiv.;  141,  n  27. 
.  .68,  n  26;  74,  n  15 

All  dhr                .  ..              

167,  n  3 

83  n4 

American,  contraction  for  107,  n 

3;  140,  n  2;  148,  n  5. 
106,  n  3. 

American  Bible  Society  Anniversary,  Report  of  

American  Bible  Society,  contraction  for  

107,  n4. 

A  n  expressed  by  a  tick,  value  of  the  device  

67,  n  22 

An  supplied  after  Of  and  To  

..     .67,  n  15  and  17 

74,  n  14  •  135  n  16 

.  .   .  .               66  u  4 

84  n  8 

A  nd  (&)  

.  .    .  .            134  n  12 

Anil  distinguished  from  joined  Of  

.84  n  9-  144  n  17 

And  joined  by  horizontal  or  perpendicular  tick  .        

66  n  7 

And  omitted  ,       

155,  n  2. 

And  prefixed  to  words  in  the  Fourth  Position  

116,  n  2;  138  n  18 

And  so  forth     

134  n  12  c 

And  Me,  how  it  may  be  disposed  of  by  the  practiced  reporter  . 
And  what  

..13S,n8;  141,  n  24. 
123,  n  8. 

172  INDEX   OF  THE  NOTES. 

And  would i.'s,  n  4. 

Answer,  how  to  indicate  the  beginning  and  end  of,  in  Law-Reporting 119,  n  4. 

Anything  and  Nothing  distinguished 139,  n  IT. 

Applause,  etc 119,  n  4. 

Applause  and  Laughter liS,  n  7. 

Are  frequently  expressed  by  an  Ar-hook,  or  by  enlarging  a  small  El-hook. .  62,  XT. ; 

75,  n  8. 

Ar-hook  implied 84,  n  7 ;  129,  n  4. 

Ar-hook  implied  after  Dbees 103,  n  7;  112,  n4;  118,  n  8. 

Ar-hook,  small,  enlarged  to  add  All  or  Witt 6-',  xiv. ;  73,  n  8. 

Are,  how  to  be  written  when  standing  alone 142,  n  2. 

Around  joined  to  Loot-ed 114,  n  12. 

As  added  by  enlarging  a  circle 169,  n  2. 

.4«  prefixed V8,  n  4. 

A»  prefixed  to  words  in  the  Fourth  Position So.  n  3. 

Association  and  Society  distinguished  when  contracted 91,  n  4. 

As  to  distinguished  from  As  to  the 92,  n  1. 

At  sometimes  added  by  shortening 63,  xvi. ;  68,  n  29. 

Audi  Alteram  Partem 95,  n  7. 

Aye 119,  n  2. 

B. 

Baconian  Philosophy 69,  n  83. 

.Be  added  to  Em  by  widening 77,  n  6;  S7,  n  1. 

Beautiful  traits  of  character 125,  n  2. 

Been  thr  and  Be  thr 74,  n  19. 

Being. 133.  n  4. 

Beneficent 144,  u  16. 

Beneficial 148,  n  9. 

Benefits  of  Reporting  Studies  and  Practice 131,  n  10. 

Benjamin  Franklin 141,  n  18. 

Black  Republicans 124.  n  10. 

-Ble  sometimes  written  with  Bee  instead  of  Bel 92,  n8;  114,  n  1;  123,  n4; 

132,  n  15 ;  148,  n  10;  161,  n  17. 

Brief  Way  and  Tay  enlarged 61,  x.;  129,  n  5. 

Brief  Way  and  Yay  joined  as  simple  w  aud  y 67,  n  21. 

But  I  cannot 170  n  5. 

But  it 74,  n  16. 

But  not 109,  n  13. 

By  the  Learned  Counsel  for  the  Defendant 167,  n  7 ;  153,  n  1. 

C. 

Capable 92,  n  3. 

Chancery 162,  n  6, 

Change  of  Outlines  or  Direction  for  sake  of  Phrase-writing 139,  n  1 ;  145,  n  4 ; 

147,  n  3;  169,  n  9. 

Chapters  and  verses 9-,  n  8. 

Characteristics  of  the  Reporting  Style 61-63, 

"Chase  with  the  Speaker"  to  be  avoided C4. 


INDEX  OF  THE   NOTES.  173 

Cheers,  etc. — mode  of  indicating 119,  n  4 

Circle  between  two  strokes. .   87,  n  2 ;  148,  n  8. 

Circle  between  curves  156,  n  10. 

Circle,  large  initial 6T,  n!9;  127,  n  21. 

Classical  and  Reporting  Studies  Compared 181,  n  10. 

Con-  and  Com-  implied ISO,  n  8;  168,  n  3. 

ConjUct  contracted 107,  n  10. 

Common,  new  word-sign  for. 126,  n  11. 

Contra-o,  etc.,  implied  by  proximity. 109,  n  12. 

Contractions  for  general  use  sometimes  formed  on  the  principle  of  special 
contractions 136,  n  15, 17, 19. 

Contraction  for  Habea*  Corpus 186,  n  15. 

Contractions— general  principles  observed  in  making,  in  Standard  Pho- 
nography   129,  n  6. 

Contraction— progressive  degrees  of 100,  n  1 ;  107,  n  4 ;  125,  n  6. 

Contractions  sometimes  vocalized 129,  n  6,  c. 

Contraction— value  of  a  good  one. 66,  n  12. 

CoiUi-i-  joined 88,  n  1. 

Contributed 88,  n  1. 

Contribution 88,  n  1. 

Country,  new  word-sign  for 187,  n  8. 

Court  and  Jury 154,  n  6. 

Cross-examination,  how  indicated 150,  n  9. 

Cwcter,  pronunciation  of. 74,  n  20. 

D. 

Dagger  (f)  use  of,  in  indicating  outlines ,.58,  par.  29. 

Dashes  with  Hooks,  how  distinguished  from  shortened  letters 71,  n  13. 

Daes,  how  written 76,  n2;  78,  n2;  149,  n  4;  151,  n  12. 

Defendant,  word-sign  for 154,  n  7. 

"  Democratic  Party"  contracted 118,  n  13. 

Derivative  contractions  or  wor J-signs,  positions  of 186,  n  2,  Z>,  c,  and  d. 

Derivative  word-signs SO,  9". 

Derivative  words  sometimes  contracted,  and  not  the  Primitives 129,  n  6,  b. 

Described  in  his  patent 157,  n  8. 

Description,  phonographic— example  of 59-9. 

Dhees-Em  .   155,  n  10. 

Dtir  and  sometimes  Tr  and  Dr  added  to  straight  lines  by  lengthening 62,  xii. 

Dhr=</«T£,  their,  etc.,  added  by  lengthening  to  straight  lines 62,  xii. ;  148,  n  8. 

Dhr—t'ifir,  tliert,^  etc.,  added  by  a  heavy  tick 61,  xiii. 

Different,  Headings 188,  n  9. 

Different  Values  of  Phonographic  Letters  distinguished 71,  n  18. 

Directions  changed  forsake  of  Ptirase-writing 128,  n  23  ;  145,  n  4. 

Discrimination  required  in  Note  reading. 138,  n  9. 

Disdained  to  be 66,  n  5. 

Disparities  in  speed  in  the  Old  Phonography 85,  n  5. 

D  ssolution  and  Desolation 127,  n  20. 

Distinguishing  different  values,  etc.— law  of,  stated 71,  n  13. 

Pouhle  read:ng 188,  n  9. 

riutj  of  Reporters 85,  n  8. 


INDEX   OF   THE  NOTES. 


E. 

Ef-hook  expressing  Have,  Eter,  For*e,  Ful-lyness  ....  63,  xvii ;  106,  n  9 ;  113,  n  5 ; 

122,  n  24- 

Ef-hook  •ometimes  added  to  curves     120,  n8;  139,  n  16. 

Ef-Sem 87,  n  2. 

El-hook  employed  to  add  Att  or  Will 62, xiv. 

El-hook,  small— enlarged  sometimes  to  add  Are,  Were,  Our 62,  xv. 

Ems-Ith 143,  n  8. 

England,  new  word-sign  for 1ST,  n  4. 

En-hook  omitted 107,  n  3  ;  110,  nl;  111,  nT;  113,  nC;  118,  n  8;  120,  n9; 

122,  n  20;  125,  n  13;  181,  n  12  ;  132,  n  17;  140,  n  2;  141,  n  23;  143,  n  10;  154,  n  2. 

Ens-circle  between  strokes 14S,  n  7  ;  150,  n  10 ;  157,  n  9. 

Entire  and  its  derivatives 133,  u  5. 

Entitle-d  contracted 159,  n  8. 

Es-sounds  omitted 69,  n34;  94,  n  6;  134,  n  11;  149,  n5;  150,  n  7. 

Etc 134,  n  12. 

Example  of  Phonographic  Description 58  9. 

Et  cetera  and  It  is  true 134,  n  12,  d. 

Exceed-ing-ingly 160,  n  1 1. 

Exercises,  errors  in  writing 52,  par.  3. 

Exercises,  examples  for  close  imitation  and  copying 57. 

Exercises,  method  of  studying 51-2, 

Exercises  to  be  written  from  Dictation 52,  par.  2. 

"  Exhibits"  in  Law-Eeporting 150,  n  8. 

Extemporaneous  speech,  phrases  of 113,  n  7 ;  133,  n  9. 

Extracts,  how  indicated,  etc 102,  n  2. 

F. 

Farther  and  farther 89,  n  6. 

-Fer-red,  etc. 94,  n  4. 

Final  "Wuh-hook,  rule  for,  stated. 104,  n  L 

For  a  considerable  time 94,  n  1. 

Fore  added 84,  n  5 

Foreign  names 90,  n  3;  126,  n  15;  164,  n  1 

Foreign  languages,  reporting  of 101,  n  1. 

Form,  how  written  in  the  Eeporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonography 117,  n  3. 

For  our  distinguished  from  From Ill,  n  7. 

For  the  omitted 153,  n  1. 

From  omitted. S3,  nl;  121,  n  19,  c;  162,  n  3. 

Fractions 89,  n  8. 

Ful-ly  expressed  by  Ef  sometimes 133,  n  1 ;  145,  n  2 ;  148,  n  6. 

-Fulness 93,  n  2. 

G. 

Gay  between  Ing  and  other  letters  sometimes  omitted 118,  n  12. 

General , 121,  n  16. 

-=<*neral  contractions 70,  n  8. 

~al  Council 92,  ni. 


INDEX   OF   THE   NOTES.  175 

Goethe,  pronunciation  of. 164,  n  8. 

Gordian  knot  cut 38,  n  28. 

Greatest  speed  of  writing,  how  to  attain  it 58,  par.  2. 

G  reek  quotation,  pronunciation  of 101, 11 1 

H. 

Habeas  Corpus 185.  n  15. 

Hud  added  by  shortening 63,  xvi. ;  142,  n  30 ;  144,  n  12. 

Half-length  Hook-letters  distinguished  from  Hook-dashes 71,  n  18. 

Halving  to  add  It,  Had,  What,  Would,  and  sometimes  At  and  Out 63,  xvi. ; 

159,  n  5. 

Hand,  hesitating  movement  of,  to  be  avoided 52,  par.  2. 

Hast S3,  n  3. 

Have  added  by  the  Ef  hook 122,  n  24. 

Have  implied  after/ 110,  n  2  and  3;  113,  n  9  ;  119,  n  14;  120,  n5;  141,  n  IT. 

Have  omitted  73,  n  9 ;  74,  n  19 ;  110,  n  2  and  3. 

Jfate,  when  it  should  not  be  omit'.ed 111.  n  3,  c. 

He  expressed  by  a  tick  in  the  Reporting  Style 60,  iv.,  1. 

"  Hear  the  other  side,"  and  why 94,  n  7. 

Hi*  added  to  a  Loop 144,  n  13. 

Hooks  implied  sometimes  by  offsets 155,  n  12. 

Hooks  omitted 76,  n  2  and  7;  81,  n  3  and  4;  85,  n  2;  83,  n  3;  161,  n2  and  16; 

166,  n  1 ;  169,  n  1  and  9. 

//oio  expressed  by  a  tick  in  the  Eeporting  Style 60,  i v.,  2. 

Human  Family 143,  n  10. 

I. 

7,  brief  sign  for 127,  n  23. 

/,  how  expressed  in  the  Reporting  Style 60,  iv.,  3. 

/ornlted 120,  n  15;  128,  n  27,  b;  170,  n  5. 

I  would  to  God 113,  n  7. 

/  written  to  imply  Have 110,  n  2  and  3. 

Iinpioux  and  Impossible 145,  n  20. 

Implying  and  Supplying  distinguished 67,  n  15. 

Implying,  a  remark  upon 130,  n  9,  b. 

Implying  ing  preceding  a-n  or  the 72,  n4;  142,  n  31. 

«  "  «  thr 89,  n7;  129,  nl;  140,  n  5. 

Improvements,  why  mentioaed 154,  n  7. 

la  order  to  constitute 158,  n  10. 

In,  prefixed  by  an  In-hook 108,  n  7 ;  127,  n  18 ;  148,  nil. 

1  In  Hie  first  place 135,  n  17. 

i  In  (fit)  relation  and  /n,  real-ity 25,  n  4. 

I  Incapable 114,  n  1. 

Indian's  skull  found  at  New  Orleans,  age  of 91,  n  5. 

]n:iiiite-ly,  etc !-5.  n  5. 

1  In_'  lengthened  to  add  thr 117,  n  4. 

i  Ing  omitted 95,  nlO;  128,  n  29. 

I  'ing'  omitted 122,  n  27;  184,  nlO;  137,  i  6;  159,  n  C. 

i  Ing  thr 89,  n  7; 


176  INDEX   OF   TIIE   NOTES. 

•ingly 80,  nl. 

-ings 7 2,  n  4. 

Initial  circle,  large,  saving  of 6f,  n!9;  127,  n  21. 

Initial  circle  implying  an  Ar-hook 10S,  n  6. 

Intelligencer,  Phonographic,  referred  to 149,  n  1. 

Interfcre-d 160,  n  12. 

Interrogation,  mark  of,  In  Law-Reporting 149,  n  2,  b. 

Interruptions 121,  n  19. 

Into  omitted 161,  n  16. 

Introduction 55-64 

Characteristics  of  the  Reporting  Style 60-64. 

Example  of  Phonographic  Description 63. 

Key  to  the  Pronunciation 53. 

Phonographic  Nomenclature 65-57. 

Is  prefixed  by  enlarging  a  circle 65,  n  8;  169,  n  8. 

Iss-Shel  may  be  used  by  the  reporter  even  when  alone 166,  n  4. 

It  added  by  halving 68,  xvl.  ;  71,  n  12  ;  75,  n  5 ;  90,  n  1 :  108,  n  6 ;  111,  n  8  ; 

115,  n  4 ;  128,  n  1 ;  127,  n  19  and  22 ;  147,  n  4  ;  158,  n  12  ;  166,  n  1. 

It  added  to  the  past  tense  of  verbs  ending  in  Mel,  Nel,  and  Rel 156,  n  4,  2,  B,  b. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact .-. 128,  n  23. 

It  is  true  and  Et  cetera 134,  n  12. 

It  not 141,  n  18. 

Ith-Sem 87,  n  i. 

J. 

John  Bull 124,  n  9. 

Joinings 83,  n  4 ;  93,  n  5 ;  125,  n  5 ;  139,  n  15 ;  144,  n  15 ;  145,  n  21 ;  147,  n  1 ; 

163,  n  2 ;  163,  n  7. 

Joining  sometimes  requires  change  of  outline!  even  of  word-signs 147,  n  8 ; 

165.  n  11. 

Joining  with  a  preceding  Ens-circle 143,  n  7. 

Jury  to  be  capitalized  in  transcribing 154,  u  6. 

K. 

-Kay  omitted 68,  n  30 ;  72,  n  5. 

Kay-omitted 71,n8;  118,nlO;  118,nl2;  125,  n  6. 

Key  to  the  Pronunciation 63. 

b. 

Large-hook  letters,  shortening  of C6,  n  2;  144,  n  19. 

Large  initial  circle,  advantage  of 67,  n  19. 

"        "      hook  for  ion  Em,  En,  Ray 61,  viii. 

"         "          "      —instance  of  value 65,  n  2. 

letter— when  terminating  verbs  in  the  present  tense.. .  .156,  n  4. 

67,  n   0. 

121,  n  22. 

X^. 149,  n  1. 

149. 

ind  cross-examination .150,  n  9. 


INDEX   OF   THE   NOTES.  177 

Law-Eeporting— Punctuation  in 150,  n  11. 

Lawyers'  names,  how  indicated 152,  n  14. 

Legibility  favored  by  indicating  punctuation 75,  n  3. 

"        by  Standard-Phonographic  method  of  implying  Of. 65,  n  8. 

-Lossness 98,  n  2. 

Letters  crossed  for  greater  legibility 88,  n  4. 

Letters,  crossing  of,  how  indicated 63,  par.  29. 

Letters  muat  not  be  made  too  large 51. 

Let  thr 81,  n  1. 

Loir  eabins 113,  n  10. 

Long  stroke  before  the  last  figure  of  dates 76,  n  3. 

Loud  laughter 121,  n  22;  119,  n  4. 

.L<y 71,  nil;  117,  n  5,  3. 

-Ly  omitted 72,  n  2;  75,  n  4;  89,  n  5. 

M. 

MaTtevtA  Take 70,  n  6. 

Make  it 98,  n  4 

Maybe 16.',  n  3. 

May  have  been 162,  n  8. 

Merely  and  Immorally 129,  n  4. 

Mett  rnich 166,  n  6. 

Misrepresentation,  what  it  is 95,  n  7. 

Mi-,  may  be  omitted  in  nott -taking 154,  n  1. 

"    prefixed  to  names  in  transcribing 121,  n  20;  154,  n  1. 

Much 83,  n  2 

Multiply-ied,  multitude 65,  n  ? 

Must  have  been  there 74,  n  19 

W. 

Names,  foreign,  how  written 90,  n  J 

Nearly 129,  u  4 

-Next  omi'ted 124,  n  12 

Never,  Standard-Phonographic  word-sign  for 66,  n  12 

New  Orleans,  Indian  skull  found  there 91,  n  5 

Nomenclature,  Phonographic,  use  of 53,  par.  8 

explanation  of 55-57. 

None  others 126,  n  14. 

North  contracted 126,  n  9;  146,  n  7. 

Northern 120,  n  14  ;  123,  n  7. 

Sot  added  by  an  En-hook 109,  n  1?. 

Notes,  discrimina  ion  required  in  reading ...    131,  n  10. 

11  Notes"  of  exercises  written  from  dictation  to  be  read  rapidly E2,  par.  4. 

Notes  on  ihe  exercises,  object  of 53. 

'•  Notes"  taken  from  dictation  to  be  transcribed 52,  par.  5. 

frothing  and  Anything 139,  n  17.   ( 

I   Numbers,  how  generally  written 74,  n  2  :  123,  n  5;  154.  •  ' 

|    Numerals,  phonographic 

1   Numerical  denominations 1 


178  INDEX   OF   THE    NOTES. 


O. 

Oand  Oh 82,  n  6. 

ObJ;ct  of  comparing  the  Old  and  the  New  Phonography  in  the  notes.  63;  151,  n  7. 

ObJ  cted  to 151,  n  13. 

OL.J  ctions  in  Law-Reporting,  how  noted 151,  n  13. 

"          to  certain  contractions  answered 125,  n  6  ;  l-'7,  n  23. 

Of  (t^n  or  the)  omitted  at  the  end  of  lines 69,  n  31. 

"  expressed  by  a  Vee-hook 84,  n  8 ;  121,  n  17. 

1  t  «quently  implied  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonography 61,  vi. 

"  h  wing 63,  n  23- 

"  it.-» 70,  n  4;  74,  n  1. 

-  advantage  of 65,  n  8  ;  67,  n  17;  73,  n  12. 

"  ttit  omitted  at  the  end  of  a  line 84,  n  1. 

"    '•  new  word-sign  for 74,  n  1 ;  126,  n  10. 

Offer  distinguished  from  Form 106,  n  6. 

-O(jr-  iphy-ic-ical 74,  n  14. 

Old  *  honography— confusion  of,  in  the  representation  of  icho-*e-m 109,  n  9. 

"  defect  as  to  the  representation  of  Or  not,  But  not Iu9,  n  18. 

"                      "      in  the  representation  of  phrases  of  extempora- 
neous speech 113,  n  7. 

"  did  not  imply  To ". 63,  n  2. 

"                    "     "    provide  word-signs  for  numerical   denomina- 
tions   74,  n  1 S. 

"  disparities  of  speed  in 85,  n  5. 

"  its  inferiority  as  to  outlines 132,  n  15. 

"  its  mode  of  expressing  a-» 67,  n  22. 

"  plan  of,  as  to  W  and  Y 67,  n  21. 

"  rule  of,  as  to  joining 83,  n  4. 

"  rule  of,  as  to  joining  and 66,  n  7. 

"  sacrificed  uniformity  and  consistency 135,  n  16. 

Omission  of  vowels  in  the  Reporting  Style 61,  i. 

"  words       "  "  63,  xix, 

"  ing 95,  n  10. 

««  It 94,  n  6. 

«  t 106,  n  5;  100,  n  2. 

OM  addelby  an  En-hook 96,  n  1. 

Onf.  and  i  he  same 71 ,  n  7. 

One  omitted 72,  n  3. 

One  or  two 71,  n  2. 

Or  not 109,  n  13. 

Or  entitled 164,  n  4. 

"  when  joined 84,  n  9. 

Other  expressed  by  the  Dher-tick 62,  xiii. ;  112,  n  1 ;  126,  n  14 ;  160,  n  14. 

"expnssed  by  lengthening.... 62,  xii. ;  111,  n  2;  113,  n  6;  117,  n  4;  119.  n  17; 

14S,  n  8 ;  167,  n  3. 

«igns  thus  formed Ill,  n  7;  1*0,  n  4. 

-»ography  by  an  Ar-hook  or  by  en- 

:  111,  n  7  ;  141,  n  27  ;  125,  n  2  ;  167,  n  1. 
r  xvi. ;  96,  n  12  ;  130,  n  5  ;  142,  n  29 ; 
159,  n  5. 


INDEX   OF   THE   NOTES.  179 

Outlines  changed  sometimes  in  phrase-writing 189,  n  1. 

Overlapping  sometimes  resorted  to  in  phrase-writing.  .94,  n  1 ;  121,  n  18 ;  128,  n  £6 ; 

159,  n  7. 

P. 

Parentheses 137,  n  7. 

Parenthetic  curres— uses  of,  in  Phonographic  Nomenclature 58,  par.  30. 

Parti-coloring  yarn 155,  n  9. 

Part-ed 162,  n  1. 

Party,  in  special  contractions,  added  to  Em  by  widening 119,  n  16. 

Past  participles  before  which  Have  may  be  omitted 110,  n  3,  and  111. 

Past  tense  of  verbs  ending  in  Mel,  Nel,  Eel.  156,  n  4. 

Patience,  results  of 52,  par.  6. 

Patent-ed,  word-sign  for 154,  n  3. 

PeP  distinguished  from  PletoidVPee 112,  n  9. 

Period  in  reporting  testimony 149,  n  2. 

Perpendicular  tick  for  <t  n-d 66,  n  7. 

Phonographic  Description,  explanation  of. 89. 

Nomenclature,  use  of 53,  par.  3. 

Numerals,  how  distinguished  sometimes 76,  n  3  ;  78,  n  2. 

Phonography  in  the  Law-Courts 149,  n  1. 

Phraseoijraphic  power  of  Standard  Phonography 64 

Phrase- writing 112,  n  3  ;  113,  n  7  ;  125,  n  8 ;  128,  n  25 ;  158,  n  2  ;  138,  n  10 ; 

139,  n  1 ;  140,  n  4,  7,  9,  and  11 ;  143,  n  6  ;  1-14,  n  14 ;  145,  n  22  and  23 ;  n  1  and  4. 

Phrase-writing  facilitated  by  Standard  Phonography 64 

"  over-lapping  in.  .94,  n  1 ;  121,  n  18 ;  182,  n  12  ;  135,  n  18 ;  136,  n  20 ; 

137,  n  5. 

"  progressive  degrees  of 100,  n  1. 

"  Mr.  B.  Finnan's  estimate  of  its  value 63,  xxi. 

Place,  contraction  for,  in  phrases  like  In  tiie  first  place 136,  n  19  (&). 

Platonic  philosophy 69,  n  83. 

Position-adaptation  of 72,  n  6 ;  109,  n  11 ;  116,  n  1 ;  118,  n  11 ;  131,  n  11 ; 

132,  n  16  ;  133,  n  8 ;  143,  n  3  ;  157,  n  8. 

"          distinction  between  the  Third  and  Fourth  in  case  of  the  hori- 
zontals  65,  n  1. 

Position  of  signs  formed  by  prefixing  Our  by  an  Ar-hook  or  by  enlarging 

the  small  El-hook Ill,  n  7. 

Position  of  a  contraction  for  a  number  of  related  words 136,  n  2. 

"                 "            sometimes  determined  by  the  rule  of  the  Corre- 
sponding Siyle 137,  n  2,  e. 

Position  zero 115,  n  4. 

Pi>~J3"r— why  written  Pee-Eay  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonog- 
raphy          70,  n  1. 

Pitman's  (Isaac)  use  of  disjoined  ticks  criticised 71,  n  4. 

Pre-eminente,  Prominence,  and  Permanence 141,  n  19. 

Preface 51. 

Present  for  the  past  tense,  principle  and  instances  of  . .  .61,  vii. ;  69,  n  35  ;  73. ,p-"1 

" 

Present  tnnse  frequently  written  for  the  past  tense  in  the  Kepo 
6tandard  Phonography 


180  INDEX   OF  THE   NOTES. 

Prof.  Agassiz'  estimate  of  the  age  of  a  human  foot  and  jaw  d  Bcover*d  in 
Florida  .................................................................  W,n& 

.Progressive  degrees  of  phrase-writing  and  contraction  ....................  100,  n  1. 

Pronunciation,  Key  to  .........................................................  58. 

«*  of  Luke  x.  16  ............................................  101,  n  1. 

Pro-slavery  ..........  ...................................................  119,  n  1. 

Prosperity  and  Prospect  ................................................  120,  n  6. 

Proximity  to  imply  Of  only,  advantage  of  ................................  67,  n  17. 

Punctuation  in  note-taking  ...............................................  75,  n  3. 


Question,  best  mode  of  indicating  in  law-reporting  .......................  149,  n  2. 

Quest!  on-ed  ..............................................................  88,  n  2. 

Questions  by  the  Court  and  by  a  Juror,  how  indicated  ..................  150  n  9,  b. 

Quotations  ...........................................  ...................  126,  n  1  2. 

"        from  foreign  languages,  how  disposed  of  .......................  101,  n  1. 

"  "     accessible  books,      "  "          .......................  102,  n  2. 

R. 

Kate  of  reading  or  speaking  from  memory  .............................  108,  n  2,  I. 

Bay-Ter  and  Kay-Der  .....................................................  84,  n  7. 

Beading  notes  of  the  exercises  written  from  dictation  ...................  52,  par.  4. 

"  "     a  difficulty  in,  avoided  .....................................  75,  n  3. 

"       rate  of  .......................................................  103,  n  2,  <f. 

Eeferences,  how  they  are  made  in  this  work  ...................................  54. 

"  in  reporting  ................................................  102,  n  2. 

Repeated  quotations  usually  not  taken  in  full  ...........................  102,  n  2,  c. 

Bepetitions,  mode  of  expressing  in  Standard  Phonography  ........  63,  xx.  ;  89,  n  6  ; 

101,  n  2;  118,  n»;  12-!,  n  30. 
Beporting  exercises  .........................................................  1-48. 

"  "        Keyto  ................................................  65-170. 

"         Notes  on  ..............................................  65-170. 

"         foreign  languages  .............................................  101.  n  1. 

"         of  American  Bible  Society  Anniversary  .......................  106,  n  3. 

"         study  and  experience  and  the  study  of  the  Classics  compared..  131,  n  10. 
"         Style,  general  characteristics  of  .....................  .  ...........  60-68. 

"         —what  it  is,  and  what  it  is  not  ..................................  95,  n  8. 

"         word-signs  and  contractions,  method  of  study  .......................  51. 

"  "  "  "  must  be  familiarized  ............  51,  p:ir.  4. 

Roman  contracted  .............................  .  ......................  ____  93,  n  4. 

Round,  joined  to  Look  ..................................................  114,  n  12. 

"  Bough  places  made  smooth"  by  Standard  Phonography  ..............  ...  86,  n  5. 

117,  n  5. 


188,  n  12. 
..16(5,  n4. 
.127,  n  21. 


INDEX   OP  THE   NOTES.  181 

Secetsion  added  by  Ses-eshon 12T,  n  24. 

Second  Reader,  design  of 51. 

8eem-ed 167,  n  2. 

Selections  for  the  exercises,  principle  of  miking  them 54. 

SWA  joined 88,  n  3  ;  115,  n  2. 

Aexsion  ii'idcd  by  Iwreshon 127,  n  24,  f>. 

Sliler  written  upwa  d  when  alone 164,  n  2. 

Shon  andTiv  hook« 66,  n  9. 

Shortened  hook-letters  distinguished  from  hook-dashes 71,  n  13. 

Shus-li-ness,  words  ending  in,  contracted 70,  n  8;  124,  u  11. 

Size  of  writing  best  lor  speed  .  51. 

Slavery 119,  nl;  14S,  n  5. 

Small  El  or  Ar  hook  enlarged  to  add  a  consonant 61,  ix. 

Soci  al 166,  n  4. 

Society,  88,  n  4.    Society,  when  contracted,  distinguished  from  Association 

contracted 91,  n  4. 

So  much 83,  n  2. 

Spacing  to  indicate  omission 105,  n  2. 

Speaker,  chase  with,  how  to  avoid 64. 

"        how  to  get  up  close  with,  as  with  a  bound 64  ;  85,  n  5. 

Speakers,  change  of 121,  n  19. 

Speaker's  name,  how  indicated... 152, -n  14. 

Special  contractions  to  be  devised  by  the  reporter 118,  u  13. 

"  "  — principle  and  instances.. 69,  n33;  74,  nl4;  8%n4;  92,  n  2; 
93,  n  4 :  107,  n  4 ;  113,  n  8  and  9  ;  113,  n  13  ;  119,  n  1  and  3 ;  120,  n  10,  11,  and  14; 
V21,nl6;  123,n2;  123,  n  7  ;  124,n9;  129,n2;  130,  n  7;  133,  n  7;  136,  n2;  138,  u4; 
141,  n  28 ;  142,  n  1 ;  141,  n  18 ;  146,  n  7 ;  148,  n  5 ;  154,  n  4 ;  155,  n  1 ;  156,  n  5 ;  160,  n  10. 
Special  contractions  employed  for  general  purposes  by  the  experienced  re- 
porter  129,  n  2;  142,  n  1 ;  144,  n  18. 

Standard  Phonography  greatly  superior  to  other  systems  in  respect  of 

phrase  writing 64;  133,  n  9. 

Standard  Phonography,  adequacy  in  the  representation  of  phrases  of  com- 
mon speech 118,  n  7. 

"  "  advantages  of,  referred  to 71,  n  10. 

"  how  it  makes  the  rough  places  smooth 85,  u  5? 

"  "  its  mode  of  expressing  repetitions 128,  n  80. 

"  object  of  mentioning  in.-tances  of  its  superiority  ..154,  n  7. 

u  "  superiority  of,  as  to  outlines  often  where  no  new 

principles  are  involved 132,  n  15. 

"  "  uniformity  of 94,  n  4  ;  135,  n  16- 

"  "  word-signs  of,  how  constructed 77,  n  4. 

Stars 85,  n  4;  116,  n  7. 

Stationary 66,  n  9. 

Straight  lines  lengthened  to  add  thr  (tr  and  dr) 62,  xii. 

"  You  and  We  prefixed  to 62,  xi. 

Study  of  the  Classics  and  of  Iteporttng 181.  n  10. 

Substantially  as  described 156,  n  ". 

Such  are 141,  n  27. 

Such  will 141,  n  27. 

Supplying  and  Implying  distinguished 67,  n  15. 

Surely 129,  u  5. 


182  INDEX   OF   THE   IfOTES. 


T. 

Tacitus,  quotation  from 95,  n  7. 

Take  It 93,  n  4. 

Testimony,  notes  of,  to  be  freely  vocalized l.%0,  n  11. 

Than  had 144,  n  12. 

That  distinguished  from  WWi  it  (Dhet°) 115,  n  4. 

Titan  frequently  added  by  an  En-hook. 68,  xviii. ;  SS,  n  5  ;  140,  n  8. 

"      omitted 77,  n  5. 

Tlie  emphasized 73,  n  11. 

"    omitted 161,  n.  15. 

"    sometimes  omitted 70,  n  2,  7. 

"  "          written  separately 68,  n  24. 

Therefore,  added  84,  n5;  9S,  n  1. 

There  have 108,  n  5. 

These  great  results 10S,  n  7. 

TJiey  were  added  by  lengthening 14i»,  n  16. 

Third  Position  distinguished  from  the  Fourth  in  case  of  horizontals. 65,  n  1. 

"  "        for  half-lengths. 107,  n  1. 

This  immense 87,  n  2. 

Thr  added  to  present  tenses  of  verbs  ending  in  Mel,  Nel,  Kel 156,  n  4. 

"    (<r,  dr)  added  to  straight  lines  by  lengthening 02,  xii. ;  ~1.  n  17 ;  109,  n  10 ; 

119,  n  17 ;  160,  n  9. 

"    added  by  a  tick  sometimes 62,  xiii. ;  73,  n  7 ;  94,  n  3 ;  96,  n  12  ;  143,  n  5. 

To  alL 72,  n  1. 

"    (Pletoid-)  prefixed  to  straight  lines  in  the  same  direction 112,  n  9. 

To  le  added  to  Em 167,  u  2. 

To  before  ascending  letters,  and  how  it  may  be  implied 66,  n  14 

"  frequently  implied  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Phonography 61,  v. ; 

84,  n  6  ;  129,  n  1 ;  130,  n  9,  b;  133,  n  2  ;  167,  n  2. 

To  have  'been  added  to  Em 77,  n  6. 

To  himself. 65,  n  1. 

To  implied  before  horizontals,  remarks  on C5,  n  1. 

"        "       by  a  principle  in  Standard  Phonography — 63,  n  23  ;  85,  n  3  ;  106,  n  8 ; 

109,  n  10  ;  113,  n  5 ;  141,  n  21. 

"        "       instances  of 66,  n  5  :  85,  n  3. 

To  it  thprefore 109,  n  10. 

remitted  for  the  fake  of  phrase- writing. .  .106,  n  5 ;  10T,  n  2  ;  120,  n  13  ;  122,  n  25 ; 
123,  n  3 ;  125,  n  1 ;  129,  n  3 ;  132,  n  14 ;  133,  n  8  ;  134.  n  11  and  14 ;  140,  n  12  ;  141, 
n  26  ;  150,  n  7  ;  156,  n  6 ;  153,  n  10  ;  162,  n  5 ;  167,  n  1 ;  169,  n  4  and  9. 

To  omitted 162,  n  8 ;  167,  n  8. 

Too  much 83,  n  ?. 

To  onr  " 69.  n  36. 

To  the 84,  n  6  ;  92,  n  1 ;  140,  n  13. 

Tr  and  Dr  added  by  the  advanced  writer  to  straight  lines  by  lengthening  . .  .62,  xil. 

Transcribing  law  reports ...149.  n  2,  ?i,  r,  d. 

Trctn*fer-red,  etc 94,  n  4. 

Two 74,  n  2;  1M,  n  5  ;  164,  n  4. 

•  T-j,  how  disposed  Df  !n  Standard  Phonography 117,  n  5 ;  140.  n  8  ;  143.  n  4 ; 

147,  n  2;  161,  n  1. 


INDEX   OF  THE  NOTES.  •      183 


U. 

Us,  principle  of  joining,  in  Standard  Phonography 68,  n  25 ;  120,  n  12. 

Uniformity 94,  n  4;  117,  n  3  ;  126,  n  18. 

Upon  gome  parts  of  it 116,  n  5. 

Uses  distinguished 71,  n  13. 

Uncon-  joined 124,  n  11. 

Unconscious , 124, 11 11. 

V. 

Varnhagen  Von  Ense 160,  n  5. 

Vet-hook  to  add  Have 113,  n  6. 

Verb  for  the  Actor 7«,  n  1. 

Versss  and  chapters,  how  indicated 98,  n  3. 

Vocalization  in  the  Eeporling  Style 146,  n  6;  160,  n  12;  16S,  n  8. 

Vowels  generally  omitted  in  the  Reporting  Style 61,  i. 

W. 

Washington 125,  n  14. 

Was  that , 145,  n  21. 

Way,  brief,  enlarged 61,  x. ;  S2,  n  5. 

We  frequently  prefixed  by  a  Way-hook  even  to  straight  lines 61,  xi. ;  81,  n  4 ; 

111,n4. 

We  may  le  (Wemb) 87,  n  I. 

We  icere  and  We  wuld 114,  n  11. 

Well  in  phrase-writing 128,  n  28. 

"  hook  of,  omitted  in  phrase-writing. 169,  n  9. 

Were  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography  by  an  Ar-hook  or  by  enlarging 

a  small  El-hook 62,  xv. 

Were  and  Are  added  by  an  Ar-hook,  method  of  distinguishing 66,  n  11. 

Were,  the  principle  of  adding  by  an  Ar-hook  shown  to  be  new 66,  n  11. 

Western  Roman  Empire 100,  n  1. 

What  added  by  a  final  Wuh-hook 104,  n  1 ;  111,  n  6  ;  123,  n  8 ;  136,  n  1. 

"  "  halving  .  .63,  xvi. ;  9i>,  n  2  ;  95,  n  9 ;  104,  n  1 ;  122,  n  28 ;  128,  n  27. 

Wfuitever  (Tef )  joined  to  But  (Tetoid2; 120,  n  15. 

Whether  or  not 154,  n  7. 

Which  they 93,  n  5. 

Which  were  so 66,  n  11 ;  141,  n  25. 

While,  Old  form  for,  criticised 86,  n  5. 

Who,  etc 120,  n  7. 

Wio-sc-m,  how  represented  in  Standard  Phonography 109,  n  9. 

TF/ty,  O!u  form  for,  criticised 86,  n  5. 

Widnninsj  of  Em 119,  n  16. 

Will  added  by  an  El-hook  or  by  enlarging  a  small  Ar-hook 62,  xiv. ;  70,  n  8. 

•ft  ith  it 115,  n4. 

With  omitted £8,  n  4 ;  89,  n  9 ;  106,  n  7 ;  166,  n  2  and  3. 

"  prefixed  to  Em,  etc.,  by  a  Way-hook 143,  n  7. 

With  what 69,  n  32. 

Word-sign,  the  advantage  of  a  good  one 66,  n  12. 


184:  INDEX   OF   THE   NOTES. 

Word-signs  and  contractions  of  the  Reporting  Style  must  be  learned  thoroughly. 51. 

"  nsed  as  prefix-signs 1*J,  n  6. 

"  ai.d  contractions  may  sometimes  be  vocalized  77,  n  4  ;  98,  n  4  ;  99,  n  8. 

"Words  omiltcil 77,  n  5 ;  83,  n  1 ;  84,  n  1 ;  85,  n  2 ;  88,  n  4  ;  89,  n  9 ;  96,  n  13  ; 

105,  n  1;  IOC,  n  7;  120,  n  15;  149,  n3;  155,  n2;  158,  n  1;  160,  n  9;  161,  n  15  and 
16 ;  162,  n  4 ;  101,  n  4 ;  166,  n  2  and  3. 

Would  added  by  a  Wuh  hook 104,  nl;  153,  n  4;  168  n  6. 

"  "       halvi  g 68,  xvi. 

n'ouldeeem 71,  n  18;  1^8,  n  9. 

Writing  exercises  from  dictation 52,  par.  2;  53. 

"       size  of,  mu*t  not  be  too  large 51. 

Wub-hook  final,  rule  of,  stated 104,  n  1. 

T. 

Tay,  brief,  enlarged 61,  x. 

Yes,  sir 149,  n  6. 

you  expressed  in  phrase-writing  by  Yen  sometimes    60,  iv.,  4  ;  115,  n  5 ;  118,  n  15. 

"    sometimes  written  by  a  Yuh  hook 62,  xi. ;  96,  n  11 ;  145,  n8;  169,  n  2. 

You  were  and  You  would 114,  n  11. 

Z. 

Zero-position 115,  n  4. 


INDEX  OF  THE  EXERCISES  AND  KEY 

OF  THE 

SECOND  STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC  READER. 


NOTE.— par  =  para  graph;  t  =  top;  m  =  middle;  b  =  bottom;  tm  =  between  top 
and  middle ;  mb  =  between  middle  and  bottom.  Figures  over  48  refer  to  pages  of 
the  Key  ;  under  49,  to  pages  of  the  Engraved  Exercises. 

A. 

Abolitionists,  who  are  they? 31  tin;  126. 

Abolition  of  Slavery,  why  not  expressly  provided  for  by  the  Framers  of 

th-  Constitution  83  mb ;  135  b. 

Age  of  the  Human  Kace 18-15;  88-91, 

"  All  men  created  equal,"  etc.— what  did  it  mean  ? 86  t ;  142. 

American  Bible  Society 23-28 ;  10T-118. 

Anatomy,  Comparative,  use  of,  in  restoring  the  history  of  the  primeval 

earth 5  b ;  74  t 

Ancient  and  Modern  Philosophy  compared 8-4 ;  65-70. 

Ancient  Philosophers,  business  of 3  m ;  ti8. 

A  New  Education  needed 81  tm  ;  125  b. 

Ansted,  Prof. — quotation  from 5;  78-75. 

Aristotle's  View  of  Creation 12  t ;  84  m. 

B. 

Baconian  Philosophy,  its  object  and  effect 8  b  ;  69. 

Bacon,  Lord,  what  he  proposed  8  b  ;  69. 

Baltimore  Democratic  Convention  of  1860— Mr.  Gaulden's  speech  in 2S  ;  118. 

Bible,  different  copies  of 13  t;  86  m. 

Blacks,  were  they  citizens  under  the  Constitution? 37  tm;  146. 

Blood,  the  circulation  of,  proved  by  Harvey 6  7;  75-73. 

Buck's  Thtvlogii'.al  Dictionary  quoted 11-18  ;  84-88. 

C. 

Cahill,  Eev.  Dr.— abstract  of  a  lecture  by 17;  95. 

Catholic  Church  claimed  10  be  infallible 17  ;  95. 

Change  wrought  by  Death    10  m  ;  82  t. 

Charge  to  trie  Jury 40 ;  154. 

Chief  Justice  Tuney's  Discovery 86  b ;  142  ;— 87  ;  145. 


186  INDEX   OF   THE   EXFRCISE8   AND   KEY. 

Chronology 18  ttn;  8T  tm. 

Church  of  Komi;,  its  infallibility  discussed 15;  17  :— 91  ;  95 

Church  of  Rome,  what  it  claims 15  b;  91  b. 

Circulation  of  the  Blood,  evidences  of >'.-1 ;  75-73. 

Compensation  to  the  Slaveholder 31  m  ;  126. 

Conflict  between  Ideas 24;  107. 

Creation 11-13 ;  84-SS. 

"       different  dates  for,  given  by  different  copies  of  the  Bible 18  t ;  86  m. 

"  Rev.  Dr.  Pye  Smith's  theory  of 8  t ;  7<  m. 

Creative  Power  of  Deity 13  t;  86m. 

D. 

Declaration  of  Independence,  importance  of 85m  ;  141. 

Discoveri-rs,  their  usual  treatment 7  m  ;  7T  m. 

Disowning  the  lawfulness  of  Slavery,  results  of 87  mb  ;  146. 

Dissolution  of  the  Union 31  mb  ;  127  b. 

E. 

Edinburgh  7?«rtV?r,  extract  from 8-4  ;  65-70. 

Kffects  of  the  Baconian  Philosophy 8  b ;  69  b-70. 

Evidence  offered  by  traces  of  animal  life  in  the  strata  of  the  earth 6  t ;  75  t. 

Evidences  of  the  Circulation  o."  the  Blood    6-7  ;  75-78. 

Extinct  animals,  traces  of,  in  the  earth's  strata C  t ;  75  t 

F. 

Framprsof  the  Constitution— were  they  guilty  of  hypocrisy? 84  b:  139  b. 

Franklin,  Benjamin,  petitioned  for  the  Abolition  of  Slavery 86  mb ;  144. 

Fugitive-servant  clause  of  the  Constitution— does  it  refer  tu  Slaves? 84  m ;  139. 


G. 

Ganlden,  of  Georgia,  speech  of,  in  the  Baltimore  Democratic  Convention  .  .28  ;  118. 

Geology .5;  73-75. 

Gerrit  Smith,  speech  of,  claiming  that  there  can  be  no  law  for  Slavery 80 ;  124. 

Greek  Quotation   21  t;  101  b. 


II. 

Hamilton,  Alexander— his  remark  about  the  sacred  rights  of  mankind  .  .86  m  ;  144. 

Handsome  set  of  little  children ,.J9  mb;  121  b. 

Harvey,  discoverer  of  the  Circulation  of  the  Blood 7  ;  76  m. 

Heliopolis  (Egypt),  investigations  ai 14  m  ;  '!>  m. 

History,  primeval,  restored 5  b  ;  73-74  t. 

Horncr,  Mr.  Leonard— his  researches  in  the  Nile  valley 14  t  n  ;  -8  b. 

Human  Race,  age  of. .' ..  18-15;  SS-91. 

Humboidt,  Alexander  Von 43-43 ;  161-170. 


INDEX   OF   THE   EXERCISES   AND   KEY.  187 


I. 

Uleas,  "  irrepressible  conflict"  between 24  t ;  107. 

Infallibility,  no  foundation  for,  in  Reason  or  Scripture 16  mb  ;  93  m. 

Infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church,  what  it  means 17  m  ;  95  !. 

Infallibility  of  the  Church— a»ainst  the 15;  91. 

"  «  "         For 17;95. 

Intellect,  brilliant  triumph  of 5  b  ;  78  b. 

Intolerance,  are  its  bars  broken  down  ? 26  b  ;  111  b. 


J. 

fay,  John,  Chief  Justice  of  the  United  States— what  he  said  of  Slavery..  36mb ;  145. 

K. 

Key  to  the  Keporting  Exercises G5-170. 

Ii. 

Laws  of  Nature,  stability  of 17  mb  ;  96. 

Law-Reporting .39;  149. 

Liberty,  Genius  of,  can  it  shriek? 28  b;  119. 

Lieber,  Prof.  Francis,  an  Address  by 43-48 ;  161-170. 

Logic 4 ;  70-73. 

M. 

Man,  Glory  and  Dignity  of 81  tm  ;  126. 

Mann,  Hon.  Horace — what  he  snid  about  Religion  and  Science 8  ;  78-80. 

Memphis  (Egypt),  chronological  investigations  at 14  mb  ;  89  b. 

jr. 

New  States— did  the  Constitution  give  them  the  right  to  have  Slavery  ?.  .34  tm ;  137. 

Ko  Law  for  Slavery 30 ;  124. 

Non-intervention,  a  Slave-breeder's  idea  of 29  mb  ;  122  t. 


O. 

Orthodox  View  of  the  World's  Salvation 24  tm  ;  103, 

Our  Friends  in  Heaven 9-11 ;  80-63. 

P. 

Patience  of  Harvey  in  philosophical  investigation t  tm  ;  77  t. 

Philosophers,  ancient,  business  of 3m;  68. 

Philosophy  of  Health,  extract  from 6-7;  75-78. 

"  Seneca's  view  of 3  tm  ;  68. 


188  INDEX   OF  THE   EXERCISES   AKD   KEY. 

Platonic  Philosophy,  aim  of 3  mb;  69. 

Politics 28  -88 ;  118-143. 

Posidonius  and  Seneca 8  im  ;  67. 

Priests—  can  they  make  a  mistake  in  Faith  ? 20  t ;  100  L 

Pro-Slavery  interpretations  of  the  Constitution  by  Anti-Slavery  men  . .  .85  t ;  189  b. 


R. 

Rameses  II.,  Statue  of,  when  erected  14  mb;  89  rab. 

Reasoning  Process,  sameness  of,  in  all  cases 4  b ;  71-78. 

Religion  and  Science 8-10;  78-80. 

Kijjuteof  Mankind,  where  written 86  mb;  144. 


S. 

Sassnett,  Dr.  Wm.  J.,  an  Address  by 28-23;  107-11>. 

Science  not  Sectarian 8b;  79  b. 

"       the  Interpreter  of  Nature 9  mb  ;  80  b. 

Secession,  Gerrit  Smith's  view  of 81  mb;  127  b. 

Seneca's  view  of  Philosophy 8m;  63. 

Slaveholders,  character  of 80  mb  ;  124. 

Slavery,  a  practical  way  to  protect.        29  m  ;  121  i. 

"       how  long  was  it  to  continue? 88  mb;  136  m. 

"       no  law  for 80 ;  124. 

"       remedy  for 88  m ;  148. 

"       the  institution  of,  claimed  to  be  the  chief  source  of  the  prosper- 
ity and  intelligence  of  the  White  Race 29  t;  120  t 

Smith,  RKV.  Dr.  Fye— his  theory  concerning  the  Garden  of  Eden 8t;  78m. 

Stowe,  Mrs.  Harriet  Beecher,  quoted 9-11;  80-£S. 

Supreme  Being  alone  infallible. 16  mb  ;  93  m. 

Supreme  Court,  what  it  says  respecting  laws  against  rights  and  fun- 
damental principles 82  b ;  182  mb. 


T. 

The  Bible  claimed  to  be  the  grand  instrumentality  for  saying  the  world .  26  tm ;  112. 
The  Bible  recognized  as  coming  from  God,  notwithstanding  different 

constructions 27  mb  ;  116  m. 

The  Christian  Religion  said  to  be  the  source  of  all  that  is  truly  good  in 

Human  Naiure 27  t ;  1  IS  t 

The  Constitution— is  it  a  bargain  between  the  Whites  »nd  Blacks  ? 82  m  ;  130. 

The  Constitution  — is  it  a  bargain  between  the  Whit  s  of  the  North  and 

the  Whites  of  the  South?.. 82  m;  181. 

The  Constitution— is  it  a  law  for  Slavery  ? 81  b ;  12S  b  ;-82  t ;  129. 

"  Pro-slavery  imerpretations  of,  by  Anti-Slavery  men. 35  t ;  139  b. 

"  was  it  intended  to  favor  Slavery  ? 32  b  ;  132. 

"  "  "          by  the  Framers  or  by  the  People  to  favor 

Slavery? 33  t;  183. 

Theological  preconceptions,  tenacity  of 8m;  79  m. 


INDEX   OF   THE   EXERCISES   AND   KEY.  189 

The  way  to  govern  men 26  b;  114  tnb. 

Traces  of  Animal  Life  in  the  strata  of  the  earth— evidence  offered  thereby.  .6 ;  75  U 

T7. 

Union,  dissolution  of 81  mb;  12T. 


W. 

Wash  ington 80  m ;  ]  44  t 

W  hateley's  Elements  of  Logic,  extract  from 4 ;  70-73. 

World's  Salvation,  Orthodox  and  Rational  views  of  the 24  tm  ;  108, 

Vfrilot Habeas  Corpus,  effect  of,  on  Slavery 88  m;  1364. 


UNIVERS/A 


u 


3  1158  01126  1079 

I   1  ^JR  i  I  111  I 


:UNIVER%       v^lOSANGElfrx 

•"•*»   'O  (S    -^**.        -  *£• 

-r>  o 

2  a 


•UBRARYQc.       ^-lIBRARYQr 
1  1 


